Scrîba 3 Software Programming Manual Issue H

Scrîba 3 Software
Programming
Manual
Original instructions

Copyright ©

i Document No: QP00033 Issue: H

 Scrîba 3 Software Programming Manual Issue H

UK Office & Headquarters Electrox Electrox

Avenue One 1819 North Pitcher Street Bureau France
The Business Park Kalamazoo Immeuble Danica B
Letchworth Michigan 21 avenue Georges Pompidou
Hertfordshire, SG6 2HB 49007 69486 Lyon Cedex 03
United Kingdom USA France
Tel: +44 (0) 1462 472400 Tel: 001 269 345 7155 Tel: +33 (0) 4 72 91 31 58
Fax: +44 (0) 1462 472444 Fax: 001 269 345 5945 Fax: +33 (0) 4 72 91 30 30
E-mail: sales@electrox.com E-mail:sales@electroxus.com E-mail: info.fr@electrox.
E-mail:techsupport@electrox.com E-mail: service@electroxlaser.com techsupport@electrox.com
http://www.electrox.com http://www.electrox.com http://www.electrox.com

Electrox Scrîba 3 Software Manual

Document No: QP00033
Issue:H
 Electrox 2001 - 2010

No part of this manual may be reproduced by any means, electronic, mechanical,

photocopying, recording or otherwise without prior permission from Electrox.

Electrox Raptor 2 is illustrated on the front cover.

ii Document No: QP00033 Issue: H

 Scrîba 3 Software Programming Manual Issue H

Contents at a Glance

Section 1: Introduction and Installation................................................................1

Section 2: Main Display .....................................................................................12
Section 3: File Menu...........................................................................................25
Section 4: Edit Menu ..........................................................................................55
Section 5: View Menu ........................................................................................59
Section 6: Data Block Menu ...............................................................................62
Section 7: Marker Menu .....................................................................................71
Section 8: Send Menu .......................................................................................109
Section 9: Vision Menu ....................................................................................123
Section 10: Tools Menu ....................................................................................128
Section 11: Window and Help Menus ..............................................................147
Section 12: Data Block Properties ....................................................................150
Section 13: Text Programming .........................................................................165
Section 14: Vector Graphics Programming ......................................................185
Section 15: Fill Editor.......................................................................................220
Section 16: Raster Graphics..............................................................................245
Section 17: 1D and 2D Codes Programming....................................................261
Section 18: Serialisation, File Input and Variable Text Fields.........................278
Section 19: Special Data Blocks and Commands .............................................292
Section 20: Motion Control ..............................................................................306
Section 21: The Laser Marker Serial Link Control ..........................................313
Section 22: Laser Marker Programming Language ..........................................321
Section 23: Laser Marker Profiles ....................................................................339
Section 24: On-The-Fly Marking .....................................................................343
Appendix A: DXF File Specification used for Importing ................................349
Appendix B: Standard Error Messages.............................................................351
Appendix C: Installed Scriba Files ...................................................................353
Appendix D: Laser Inputs/Outputs ...................................................................355
Appendix E: Changing Scriba 3 Data Block Default Settings .........................356

iii Document No: QP00033 Issue: H

 Scrîba 3 Software Programming Manual Issue H

Contents
Section 1: Introduction and Installation................................................................1
1.1 System Requirements.................................................................................... 2
1.2 Installation (CD ROM) ................................................................................. 3
1.3 Communications Setup to the Laser.............................................................. 5
1.4 Vision System Driver Installation ................................................................. 8
1.5 Running the Software.................................................................................... 9
1.6 Scrîba 3 Software Format............................................................................ 10
1.7 Data Blocks ................................................................................................. 11
1.8 Definitions Used ......................................................................................... 11
Section 2: Main Display .....................................................................................12
2.1 Main Menu.................................................................................................. 14
2.2 File Menu Toolbar ...................................................................................... 14
2.3 Send Menu Toolbar..................................................................................... 14
2.4 Window Toolbar ......................................................................................... 15
2.5 Data Block Toolbar..................................................................................... 16
2.6 Simulation Window Toolbar....................................................................... 17
2.7 Part File Tabs .............................................................................................. 18
2.8 Connection to Marker Indicator . ................................................................ 18
2.9 Data Block List Window............................................................................. 18
2.10 Data Block Properties Window................................................................... 19
2.11 Simulation Window .................................................................................... 20
2.12 Marker Info Toolbar.................................................................................... 22
2.13 Laser Parameter Recipes Toolbar ............................................................... 23
2.14 Re-import Files Toolbar.............................................................................. 23
2.15 Camera Toolbar........................................................................................... 23
2.16 Toolbars – General...................................................................................... 24
Section 3: File Menu...........................................................................................25
3.1 File Menu Toolbar ...................................................................................... 27
3.2 New ............................................................................................................. 28
3.3 Open............................................................................................................ 28
3.4 Close ........................................................................................................... 28
3.5 Close All ..................................................................................................... 28
3.6 Save............................................................................................................. 28
3.7 Save As ....................................................................................................... 28
3.8 Save All....................................................................................................... 29
3.9 Import from Text File.................................................................................. 29
3.10 Export to Text File ...................................................................................... 29
3.11 Send To ....................................................................................................... 29
3.12 Preferences .................................................................................................. 30
3.13 Font Auto Download................................................................................... 47
3.14 Program Auto Download ............................................................................ 48
3.15 Passwords.................................................................................................... 49
3.16 User Interface Customisation ...................................................................... 51
3.17 Linear On-The-Fly Setup Wizard ............................................................... 52
3.18 Print............................................................................................................. 53
3.19 Printer Set-up .............................................................................................. 53
3.20 Exit.............................................................................................................. 53
3.21 Recent File Opening.................................................................................... 54
Section 4: Edit Menu ..........................................................................................55
4.1 Cut, Copy and Paste .................................................................................... 56
4.2 Select All..................................................................................................... 57
4.3 Invert Selection ........................................................................................... 57
4.4 Re-apply all Fills ......................................................................................... 57
4.5 Change File Paths........................................................................................ 57
4.6 Re-import File for Selected Blocks............................................................. 58

iv Document No: QP00033 Issue: H

 Scrîba 3 Software Programming Manual Issue H
4.7 Array Copy.................................................................................................. 58
Section 5: View Menu ........................................................................................59
5.1 View Menu.................................................................................................. 60
5.2 Laser Parameter Recipes ............................................................................. 60
5.3 Full Screen Simulation................................................................................ 61
5.4 View Font.................................................................................................... 61
Section 6: Data Block Menu ...............................................................................62
6.1 Add.............................................................................................................. 63
6.2 Insert ........................................................................................................... 66
6.3 Data Block Toolbar..................................................................................... 67
6.4 Delete .......................................................................................................... 68
6.5 Rename........................................................................................................ 68
6.6 Grouping ..................................................................................................... 68
6.7 Create Multiple ........................................................................................... 70
Section 7: Marker Menu .....................................................................................71
7.1 Marker Info ................................................................................................. 73
7.2 Loaded Programs ........................................................................................ 74
7.3 Loaded Fonts............................................................................................... 75
7.4 Loaded Variable Text Fields....................................................................... 76
7.5 DSP Parameters........................................................................................... 77
7.6 System Rollback.......................................................................................... 81
7.7 Erase Programs ........................................................................................... 82
7.8 Erase Fonts.................................................................................................. 83
7.9 Execute........................................................................................................ 84
7.10 Lens Setup................................................................................................... 86
7.11 Mirror Mode................................................................................................ 98
7.12 Measure Power............................................................................................ 99
7.13 Motion Control.......................................................................................... 102
7.14 Calibrate All Axes..................................................................................... 108
7.15 Pump Source Hours .................................................................................. 108
Section 8: Send Menu .......................................................................................109
8.1 Entire Program .......................................................................................... 112
8.2 Parameters Only ........................................................................................ 112
8.3 Variables Only .......................................................................................... 113
8.4 Download and Mark.................................................................................. 113
8.5 Compiled Files .......................................................................................... 113
8.6 Font ........................................................................................................... 115
8.7 Compile to Disk ........................................................................................ 115
8.8 Compile to Font ........................................................................................ 116
8.9 Use Compression ...................................................................................... 118
8.10 Report Time .............................................................................................. 118
8.11 The Batching System ................................................................................ 119
8.12 Dry Run Mode .......................................................................................... 122
Section 9: Vision Menu ....................................................................................123
9.1 Enable Vision............................................................................................ 124
9.2 Vision Setup.............................................................................................. 124
9.3 Capture Image ........................................................................................... 125
9.4 Enable Live Mode..................................................................................... 125
9.5 Disable Live Mode.................................................................................... 125
9.6 Vision Calibration ..................................................................................... 125
9.7 Use of the Vision System.......................................................................... 127
Section 10: Tools Menu ....................................................................................128
10.1 Font Maker................................................................................................ 129
10.2 Unicode Font Maker ................................................................................. 135
10.3 Laser Parameters Calculator...................................................................... 138
10.4 Marker Comms.......................................................................................... 139
10.5 Part File Converter .................................................................................... 141
10.6 UID Creator .............................................................................................. 143
10.7 Logo Line Reducer Preview ..................................................................... 144

v Document No: QP00033 Issue: H

 Scrîba 3 Software Programming Manual Issue H
10.8 View Comms Buffer ................................................................................. 145
10.9 Reset Registry Entries ............................................................................... 146
10.11 Edit Programs.ini ...................................................................................... 146
10.12 Reload Programs.ini.................................................................................. 146
Section 11: Window and Help Menus ..............................................................147
11.1 Window Menu .......................................................................................... 148
11.2 Help Menu ................................................................................................ 148
Section 12: Data Block Properties ....................................................................150
12.1 Data Block Properties Window................................................................. 152
12.2 Positional Properties ................................................................................. 153
12.3 Laser Properties......................................................................................... 157
12.4 Control Properties ..................................................................................... 159
12.5 Special-to-Type Properties........................................................................ 160
12.6 All Properties ............................................................................................ 162
12.7 Edit Window ............................................................................................. 163
12.8 Global Change........................................................................................... 164
Section 13: Text Programming .........................................................................165
13.1 Text Line Properties.................................................................................. 166
13.2 Text Ring Additional Properties ............................................................... 172
13.3 Text Justification....................................................................................... 174
13.4 Text Line Programming ............................................................................ 177
13.5 Marking Rotary Text................................................................................. 179
13.6 Text Ring Programming............................................................................ 180
13.7 Special Character Marking........................................................................ 182
13.8 Pen Set-up ................................................................................................. 183
13.9 File Input................................................................................................... 183
13.10 Serialisation............................................................................................... 183
13.11 Variable Text Fields.................................................................................. 183
13.12 Date and Time Using the On Board Real Time Clock.............................. 184
Section 14: Vector Graphics Programming ......................................................185
14.1 Adding a Logo Data Block ....................................................................... 188
14.2 Vector File Generation.............................................................................. 188
14.3 Logo Properties ......................................................................................... 192
14.4 Point to Point Logo Programming (PNLs – Points’n’Lines) .................... 200
14.5 ScribaDraw ............................................................................................... 206
14.6 Font Character Generation ........................................................................ 213
14.7 Bitmap to Vector Conversion.................................................................... 214
14.8 Tiling a Logo............................................................................................. 215
Section 15: Fill Editor.......................................................................................220
15.1 Fill Editor .................................................................................................. 223
15.2 File Menu .................................................................................................. 224
15.3 Edit Menu.................................................................................................. 224
15.4 View Menu................................................................................................ 225
15.5 Tools Menu ............................................................................................... 227
15.6 Fill Considerations .................................................................................... 243
Section 16: Raster Graphics..............................................................................245
16.1 Importing Artwork .................................................................................... 246
16.2 Adding a Picture Data Block..................................................................... 247
16.3 Picture Editor ............................................................................................ 248
16.4 Resolution ................................................................................................. 257
16.5 Aperturing ................................................................................................. 258
16.6 Scan Speed (Dot Frequency)..................................................................... 258
16.7 Grey Scale Images..................................................................................... 259
16.8 Marking Rotary Pictures ........................................................................... 260
Section 17: 1D and 2D Codes Programming....................................................261
17.1 Bar Codes.................................................................................................. 263
17.2 Bar Code Properties .................................................................................. 264
17.3 Data Matrix Programming ........................................................................ 268
17.4 3DI Code Programming ............................................................................ 274

vi Document No: QP00033 Issue: H

 Scrîba 3 Software Programming Manual Issue H
17.5 RSS-14 (Reduced Space Symbology) Programming................................ 275
17.6 File Input................................................................................................... 277
17.7 Serialisation............................................................................................... 277
17.8 Variable Text Fields.................................................................................. 277
Section 18: Serialisation, File Input and Variable Text Fields.........................278
18.1 Serialisation............................................................................................... 280
18.2 Auto Serialisation...................................................................................... 282
18.3 File Input Programming (Mail Merge)...................................................... 283
18.4 Variable Text Fields.................................................................................. 290
Section 19: Special Data Blocks and Commands .............................................292
19.1 Step and Repeat......................................................................................... 293
19.2 Direct Commands...................................................................................... 295
19.3 Programmable I/O Commands.................................................................. 298
19.4 Auto Programs .......................................................................................... 303
Section 20: Motion Control ..............................................................................306
20.1 Motion XY Step and Repeat ..................................................................... 307
20.2 Motion XYZ Absolute .............................................................................. 308
20.3 Motion XY Increment ............................................................................... 309
20.4 Rotary Movement Control Block.............................................................. 309
20.5 Motion Simulation .................................................................................... 312
Section 21: The Laser Marker Serial Link Control ..........................................313
21.1 Variable Text Fields.................................................................................. 314
21.2 A Typical Program.................................................................................... 315
21.3 Marker Response Summary ...................................................................... 316
21.4 Main Serial Link Commands .................................................................... 317
21.5 Additional Serial Link Commands............................................................ 320
Section 22: Laser Marker Programming Language ..........................................321
22.1 Using the Scriba Programming Language with Serial Numbers............... 322
22.2 Scriba Programming Language Reference Manual................................... 329
Section 23: Laser Marker Profiles ....................................................................339
23.1 Setup Profile Selection.............................................................................. 340
23.2 Creating a New Profile.............................................................................. 340
23.3 Existing Profile ......................................................................................... 341
Section 24: On-The-Fly Marking .....................................................................343
24.1 On-The-Fly Marking................................................................................. 344
Appendix A: DXF File Specification used for Importing ................................349
Appendix B: Standard Error Messages.............................................................351
Appendix C: Installed Scriba Files ...................................................................353
Appendix D: Laser Inputs/Outputs ...................................................................355
Appendix E: Changing Scriba 3 Data Block Default Settings .........................356

vii Document No: QP00033 Issue: H

 Scrîba 3 Software Programming Manual Issue H

1
Section 1: Introduction and Installation
In this section:
1.1 System Requirements
1.2 Installation (CD ROM)
1.2.1 Windows Vista Installation Additions
1.2.2 Windows 7 Installation Additions
1.2.1.1 64bit PCs
1.3 Communications Setup to the Laser
1.3.1 USB Communications for Windows 98, ME, 2000, XP
1.3.2 USB Communications for Windows Vista
1.3.3 USB Communications for Windows 7 (32 bit)
1.3.4 Ethernet Communications
1.4 Vision System Driver Installation
1.5 Running the Software
1.5.1 Use of Screensavers
1.6 Scrîba 3 Software Format
1.7 Data Blocks
1.8 Definitions Used

1 Document No: QP00033 Issue: H

 Scrîba 3 Software Programming Manual Issue H

Introduction
Welcome to the Electrox Scrîba 3 laser marking program, a program capable of
creating Text, Bar codes, Data Matrix codes, 3DI codes and a variety of Vector and
Raster graphics that may be marked with the laser. The Scrîba 3 software is a full
32 bit application.

An IBM-compatible personal computer (PC) is used to create and store these part
programs. Before using the Scrîba 3 software you should have a working
knowledge of the computer and the Windows™ operating system. You should
know how to use a mouse and standard Windows™ menus and commands and
therefore understand the meaning of ‘select’, ‘click’, ‘double click’, ‘drag’ and ‘pull
down’. If you need to review these techniques, see the documentation that came
with your computer and Windows™ software.

Scrîba 3 software is written in C++ (copyright Borland International Inc.). All .DLL
files are part of this system and covered by the copyright agreement.

You are not permitted to, or permitted to attempt to, de-compile, disassemble,
reverse engineer, create derivative works from or make changes to the executable
(exe) files or the library (dll) files in any way, whichever version you have.

This software has the capability to communicate with the laser marker via the RS232
serial port, a USB port (version 1.0 or later) or an Ethernet port. Note that on earlier
markers the USB and Ethernet options may not be available.

Note that the USB is NOT available on Windows 64bit PCs.

1.1 System Requirements

To run your Scrîba 3 software the following is recommended as a minimum:

An IBM PC or compatible
1 GHz CPU (AMD, Intel)
128 MBytes of RAM, 16 MBytes of video RAM
CD ROM drive
Colour SVGA monitor set to 1024 x 768 resolution
Free serial port
Free USB port (version1.0 or later) (32bit PCs only)
Free Ethernet port
Minimum of 12Mbytes free space on hard disk
Windows™ ’98, ME, 2000, XP (home or professional) or Windows 7
operating system installed – Windows XP is preferred
.NET Frameworks installed (version 2.0 or later)
Firewire port (for vision system)

2 Document No: QP00033 Issue: H

 Scrîba 3 Software Programming Manual Issue H

1.2 Installation (CD ROM)

1) Start Windows™.
2) Insert the Scrîba 3 CD into the computer’s CD ROM drive.
3) The CD will automatically run (unless auto-run is disabled) and the
following screen will be displayed.

4) To install Scriba 3, click the Install Scriba 3 button and follow the on-screen
instructions.
5) If you are using an Electrox camera system, you will need to install the
drivers relevant to your operating system by clicking the Install Camera
Drivers for 32 bit Windows button if you are using a 32 bit operating system,
or the Install Camera Drivers for 64 bit Windows button if you are using a 64
bit operating system.

A number of files will be decompressed and loaded into the directory specified when
the setup program is run – these files are listed in Appendix C.

Installation must be carried out with full administrator rights.

3 Document No: QP00033 Issue: H

 Scrîba 3 Software Programming Manual Issue H
On installation, if the default settings are used the Scrîba 3 software is installed to
the following directory (the install directory):
C:\Program Files\Electrox\Scriba 3
Six subdirectories are created Driver Settings, DSP parameters, Help and
USBDrivers.

If this is not your first installation of Scriba 3, once the installation is complete the
Autorun program will ask if you wish to overwrite your existing marker.ini file,
clicking yes will overwrite the existing marker.ini file with the one on the
installation CD.

On the first launch of the Scrîba 3 software a number of files are copied to another
directory - in the Shared applications data folder under Windows 2000 and Windows
XP, so that the software can be run in non-administrator modes. Under XP this
directory is C:\Documents and Settings\All Users\Application Data\Electrox.
These files are the marker.ini and programs.ini files. A further file
DSPParameters.log is also written to this directory when any of the DSP parameters
are changed and sent to the marker.

1.2.1 Windows Vista Installation Additions

To enable Scriba 3 to run under Windows Vista the following procedure to change
some properties must be used after the Scriba 3 installation.

1) Right mouse click on the Scriba 3 shortcut or executable file and select
‘Properties’.
2) Select the ‘Compatibility’ tab.
3) In the section ‘Compatibility Mode’ check ‘Run this program in compatibility
mode for:’ and select ‘Windows 98/Windows Me’.
4) In the section ‘Settings’ check the following:
a) Disable visual themes.
b) Disable desktop composition.
c) Disable display scaling on high DPI settings.
5) In the section ‘Privilege Level’ check ‘Run this program as an administrator’
and click OK.
6) Then go to the desktop and right mouse click and select ‘Personalize’.
7) Select ‘Window Color and Appearance’.
8) In ‘Color scheme:’ select ‘Windows Standard’ and click OK.

There is one issue related to running Scriba 3 on Windows Vista; the serial port
communications does not function with version 3204 or earlier. Version 3205 or
later should be used if serial communications is required. The USB communications
is not affected.

Installation of the USB driver is very similar to the installation under Windows XP
and uses the same driver as that used for Windows XP.

4 Document No: QP00033 Issue: H

 Scrîba 3 Software Programming Manual Issue H

1.2.2 Windows 7 Installation Additions

There is an additional setup procedure required for Windows 7.

The compatibility mode must be set after installation. This is done as follows:
1) Right click on the Scriba 3 icon.
2) Select Properties.
3) Select Compatibility.
4) Check the ‘Run this program in compatibility mode for’ box.
5) Select ‘Windows 98/Windows ME’ from the drop down list.
6) Click OK.

1.2.1.1 64bit PCs

The USB connectivity is no longer available. Connection to the marker must be

either via RS232 or Ethernet.

1.3 Communications Setup to the Laser

Communications to the laser is by one of the following:
1. RS232 serial
2. USB (32bit PCs only)
3. Ethernet
RS232 serial is available on all lasers. USB is available on Scriba 2 lasers with
eprom version G0 series or later. Ethernet is available on G2 electronics with
firmware version 22N series or later.

1.3.1 USB Communications for Windows 98, ME, 2000, XP

When the Scrîba 3 software has been installed you then need to install the USB
drivers for communication to the laser marker. Do not connect the USB cable yet.

Proceed with the following instructions to install the USB driver.

1) Power up the laser and the PC. The hand held controller on the laser will
display a dash, second line down on the main page towards the right hand side.
2) Now connect the USB cable. The dash on the hand held controller will change
to an asterisk. One of two ‘Found New Hardware’ messages (hints) will appear
- Marker Loader 0 or EZUSB Anchor Chips Device.
On a virgin PC where the USB driver has not been installed previously you will
get the message ‘Marker Loader 0’. If the USB driver has been previously
installed but now the USB cable is connected into a different USB socket from
the previous time you will get the message ‘EZUSB Anchor Chips Device’.
3) The ‘Found New Hardware Wizard’ appears. It displays the question ‘Connect
to Windows Update?’ Select ‘No, not this time’ and click NEXT.
4) On the next screen select ‘Install from a list or a specific location (Advanced)’
and click NEXT.

5 Document No: QP00033 Issue: H

 Scrîba 3 Software Programming Manual Issue H
EITHER
5) a) On a PC without a previous installation of the drivers, select ‘Search for best
driver from location’. Deselect ‘Search removable media’. Select ‘Include
this location in the search’. Then browse to …Electrox\Scriba
3\USBDrivers\WinXP\v2.0. Click OK. Click NEXT.
The display then shows ’Anchor Chips EZ-USB Sample Device’ being
loaded.
b) A message is displayed ‘…has not passed Windows Logo testing…’ Click
CONTINUE ANYWAY.
c) Click FINISH. Windows will then display the message ‘New Hardware
Found’ and then ‘EZUSB Anchor Chips Device’.

OR
6) a) On a PC with a previous installation of the drivers the path shown in the
browse window will be from the previous installation - …Electrox\Scriba
3\USBDrivers\WinXP\v2.0. Select ‘Don’t search, I will choose driver to
install’ and click NEXT.
b) The next window displays a list with one or more entries of ‘Anchor Chips
EZ-USB Sample Device together with the message ‘This driver is not
digitally signed’. Select the first entry. Click HAVE DISK. Click NEXT.
The display then shows ’Anchor Chips EZ-USB Sample Device’ being
loaded.
c) A message id displayed ‘…has not passed Windows Logo testing…’ Click
CONTINUE ANYWAY.
d) The next window ‘Files Needed’ appears. The message ‘The file
‘EZUSB.SYS’ on (unknown) is needed’. Browse to …Electrox\Scriba
3\USBDrivers\WinXP\v2.0 and select the EZUSB.SYS file and click OPEN
and then OK.
e) Another window may appear informing you an older or newer file exists.
‘Do you want to overwrite?’ Click YES.
f) Click FINISH. Windows will then display the message ‘New Hardware
Found’ and then ‘EZUSB Anchor Chips Device’.

1.3.2 USB Communications for Windows Vista

Initially DO NOT connect the USB cable from the marker to the PC – this comes later.

On a PC where the driver has been installed before.

1) If the driver has been previously installed, run the System Restore and restore to a
known point prior to the previous installation of the USB driver.
2) Go to step 1 below (virgin machine).

On a PC where the driver has not been installed before.

1) Run System Restore to create a restore point. This is required if there are attempts
to install the USB driver multiple times later.
2) Install the Scriba 3 software.
3) Switch on the laser and allow to boot. DO NOT connect the USB cable to the PC
yet.

6 Document No: QP00033 Issue: H

 Scrîba 3 Software Programming Manual Issue H
4) Press the Laser Start button. Ensure that the emission indicators on the hand held
controller remain illuminated.
5) Connect the USB cable to the PC.
6) Windows displays a message “Found new hardware” and “Windows needs to
install driver software for your marker loader 0”. Select “Locate and install driver
software”
7) Hit “Continue”.
8) Select “Don’t search online” – the window with this message only appears if
connected to the internet. Continue to next step.
9) A new window appears with the message “Insert the disk that came with your
marker loader 0”.
Select “I don’t have the disk. Show me other options”.
10) On the next window select “Browse my computer for driver software (advanced)”.
11) Browse to where the Scriba 3 software was installed. If the default was used this
will be C:\Program Files\Electrox\Scriba 3\USB Drivers\WinXP\v2.0.
12) Select “next”. A window appears with the message “Windows can’t verify the
publisher of this driver software”.
13) Select “Install this driver software anyway”. A window appears “Found new
hardware – Installing driver software” followed by a second window “Successfully
installed Anchor Chips EZ-USB device”.
14) Select “close”.

Ensure that the same USB socket is used each time if it is disconnected and reconnected. If
a different socket is used a balloon window appears “Found new hardware – Installing
driver software” followed by a second “Successfully installed Anchor Chips EZ-USB
device”.

1.3.3 USB Communications for Windows 7 (32 bit)

The USB driver must be installed manually under Windows 7 as follows.

1. Assuming the Scriba 3 was installed to the default directory, navigate to the
directory C:\Program Files\Electrox\Scriba 3/USBDrivers /WinXP/v2.0 and double
click the ‘EzDriverInstaller.exe’ program.
2. The EzDriverInstaller window opens, from the menu select File then Open, select
‘EzUsb.inf’ and click Open. The Hardware ID text box is then populated with the
following information: USB\VID_0547&PID_0080.
3. Click the Start Driver button. Wait for the installation to complete.

Switch on the Marker, press Laser Start and connect the USB lead to the PC. The marker
driver will automatically be found.

If the installation is done automatically then the wrong driver will be installed. This is
usually a TV driver of some description. If this is installed this must be removed before
attempting the correct driver installation.

To de-select this driver navigate to the Control Panel, Hardware and Sound, Device
Manager. Select the driver that has been installed and uninstall it. Once this has been
uninstalled disconnect the USB cable to the marker and install the correct driver as stated
above.

7 Document No: QP00033 Issue: H

 Scrîba 3 Software Programming Manual Issue H

1.3.4 Ethernet Communications

See Section 6.4 of the Laser System manual on the Ethernet communications setup.

NOTE: Contact your system administrator before attempting to setup an

Ethernet connection.

1.4 Vision System Driver Installation

To install the camera drivers follow the following procedure:

1. In the Vision directory in the Scriba 3 install directory the file

FireiSetupx32_031207.exe can be found. Double click on thisand follow the
on screen instructions. This installs the camera drivers on the PC but will not
register them until the camera is plugged in.

2. Plug in the camera (FireWire).

3. If the “Found new hardware” message appears go to step 4; if not then

navigate to the Control Panel, select System, Hardware, Device Manager. In
the Device Manager locate the device with the yellow exclamation mark by
it, right mouse click and select Update Driver.

4. The Hardware setup Wizard appears and asks: “Can Windows connect to
Windows update…”. Select “No, not this time” and click Next.

5. Select “Install from a specific Location”.

6. Select “Don’t search. I will choose the driver to install”.

7. From the list select “Unibrain Fire-I driver / IIDC spec 1.04 compliant
camera” and click Next/OK, then Finish. The drivers should now be
installed.

8 Document No: QP00033 Issue: H

 Scrîba 3 Software Programming Manual Issue H

1.5 Running the Software

The Scrîba 3 installation program will have installed an item in the Windows
programs menu. To run the Scrîba 3 software click on the Scrîba 3 entry in the
programs menu. When the Scrîba 3 software is run for the first time the serial port
(COM2) will be selected for communications to the marker. To change this to
something else see section 3.11.1.8 Application Preferences – Comm Port.

On running the Scriba 3 software and the message “Could not load vision library
appears”, close the Scriba 3 software. Navigate to the Microsoft Distributable
directory in the Scriba 3 install directory and locate the file vcredist_x86.exe.
Double click this file which installs the required Microsoft files.

On running the ElectroxCapture program and the message “Failed to Initialise…”

appears, close the ElectroxCapture program. Navigate to the Microsoft Distributable
directory in the Scriba 3 install directory and locate the file vcredist_x86.exe.
Double click this file which installs the required Microsoft files.

1.5.1 Use of Screensavers

It is recommended that screen savers be disabled when running the Scrîba 3

software. This is because screensavers can disrupt certain operations of the Scrîba 3
software, which may in turn cause program errors and/or crashes.

9 Document No: QP00033 Issue: H

 Scrîba 3 Software Programming Manual Issue H

1.6 Scrîba 3 Software Format

The Scrîba 3 software is presented in a standard Windows format. The mouse is

used to select the various menu items which control the software. When the
application is opened the main screen appears (Figure 1.1).

Data block list window Data block properties window

File menu toolbar Simulation window toolbar

Main menu

Window toolbar Simulation window

Part file tabs Connection to marker indicator

Data block toolbar

Figure 1.1 Main Screen

The main screen is split into three separate and distinctive areas: the data block list
window, the data block information window and the simulation window.

The Data Block List window shows the data blocks contained in the part program
and hence the marking order.

10 Document No: QP00033 Issue: H

 Scrîba 3 Software Programming Manual Issue H

The Data Block Properties window contains all the information pertinent to the
selected data block. This described in more detail in section 10.

The simulation window simulates the laser marking field.

To establish connection to the marker click on the Connection to Marker Indicator.

This will colour green when connection is made and will colour red when there is no
connection. Connection is made when the Scrîba 3 marker is switched on and
connected to the host computer.

1.7 Data Blocks

A Scrîba 3 part program (*.bpt) is made up of individual data blocks. A data block
defines the information to be marked, the location of the mark, the format of the
characters and the laser parameters. If different items are to be marked within one
part program, a data block must be created for each item. The data block is
designated by a data block number and a data block type, such as Text Line, Bar
Code, Logo, Picture, etc. The maximum number of data blocks is limited only by
the amount of memory available on the host computer.

For example if you wished to mark a text line, a text ring, a logo, a bar code and a
picture then five data blocks would be required in your part program.

Data Block 1

Data Block 2

Data Block 3

Data Block 4
Data Block 5
Part Program
*.bpt

1.8 Definitions Used

Throughout the text the following definitions are used when describing some of the
Electrox lasers - DSP and non-DSP lasers. The only non-DSP lasers are the Scriba 1
and Scriba 2 lasers. All other lasers are DSP lasers.

11 Document No: QP00033 Issue: H

 Scrîba 3 Software Programming Manual Issue H

2
Section 2: Main Display
In this section:
2.1 Main Menu
2.2 File Menu Toolbar
2.3 Send Menu Toolbar
2.4 Window Toolbar
2.5 Data Block Toolbar
2.6 Simulation Window Toolbar
2.7 Part File Tabs
2.8 Connection to Marker Indicator .
2.9 Data Block List Window
2.10 Data Block Properties Window
2.11 Simulation Window
2.11.1 Mouse wheel zooming
2.11.2 Adding a Data Block in the Simulation Window
2.11.2.1 Visible Data Blocks
2.11.2.2 Invisible Data Blocks
2.11.3 Deleting selected objects
2.11.4 Note on Logo Data Blocks
2.11.5 Resizing Data Block on Simulation Screen
2.12 Marker Info Toolbar
2.13 Laser Parameter Recipes Toolbar
2.14 Re-import Files Toolbar
2.15 Camera Toolbar
2.16 Toolbars – General

12 Document No: QP00033 Issue: H

 Scrîba 3 Software Programming Manual Issue H

Main Display
When the Scrîba 3 software is opened the main window appears. The individual
areas are described below.

Main Menu Data Block List Window Data Block Properties Window

File Menu Toolbar Send Menu Toolbar Laser Recipes Toolbar

Camera Toolbar
Marker Info Toolbar Re-import
Files Toolbar

Edit Window Simulation Window

Simulation Window Toolbar

Part File Tabs Connection to Marker Indicator

Data Block Menu Toolbar

Figure 2.1 Main Display Window

13 Document No: QP00033 Issue: H

 Scrîba 3 Software Programming Manual Issue H

2.1 Main Menu

The main menu allows all the functionality of the application and is described in
detail in sections 3 to 11

Figure 2.1 Main Menu

2.2 File Menu Toolbar

The File menu toolbar has the same functionality as the File item selection from the
main menu. These selections are described in detail in section 3.

New Save Print Printer Setup Exit

Marks Counter Window

Open Close Save As Error Window

Full Screen Simulation

In addition to the File menu selections are Full Screen Simulation, Error Window
and Marks Counter Window. Clicking on the Full Screen Simulation tool causes the
simulation window to occupy the whole screen. Clicking on the Error Window tool
displays the Error window. Clicking on the Marks Counter Window tool displays
the Marks Counter window.

2.3 Send Menu Toolbar

The Send menu toolbar has the same functionality as the Send item selection from
the main menu. These selections are described in detail in section 8.

Send Entire File Send Parameters Only Display Execute Window

Cancel Sending Start Dry Run Mode

Stop the Box command

Send Font Send Compiled File Run the Box command

14 Document No: QP00033 Issue: H

 Scrîba 3 Software Programming Manual Issue H

2.4 Window Toolbar

The window toolbar is used to hide the data block list window and the data block
properties window, making the simulation window fill the entire display area and to
display the error window.

Hide data block list and data block properties window

Display error window

Error Window
Figure 2.2 Main Window

The Error window displays the error messages generated by the marker. These are
listed in the order they occurred; ie the most recent at the top of the list. Each line
consists of the date and time of the error occurrence and which error occurred.

Error Log file

When errors are received from the marker they are also stored in an error log file.
This file is called error.log and is located in the directory where Scrîba 3 was
installed. It contains the same information as shown in the Error window above.

15 Document No: QP00033 Issue: H

 Scrîba 3 Software Programming Manual Issue H

2.5 Data Block Toolbar

This toolbar has the same functionality as the Add items from the Data Block Menu
item of the main menu and is used to add individual data blocks to the current part
file.

Drag and drop tool

Zoom tool
Add Logo Block

Add Text Line Block

Add Text Ring Block

Add 3DI Block

Add Bar Code Block

Add Data Matrix Block

Add RSS14 Code Block

Add Picture Block

Add Motion – Absolute Move Block

Add Motion – Relative Move Block
Add Motion – Step XY Block

Add Step and Repeat Block

Add Step End Block

Add Direct Command Block

Add Comments Block

Add Rotary Move

Add On-The-Fly Trigger Block

Figure 2.3 Data Block Toolbar

To place a selected data block into the required position in the Data Block List
window hold down the control key while selecting the required data block and drag
to the required position in the Data Block List window.

16 Document No: QP00033 Issue: H

 Scrîba 3 Software Programming Manual Issue H

2.6 Simulation Window Toolbar

Centre simulation Redraw simulation

Zoom to data block

Zoom to full Reset zoom Load font

marking field
Position of mouse
Zoom factor
Zoom to Full Marking Field
Select this button to show the full marking field of the laser. The displayed marking area is
defined by the lens fitted. The shaded area is area outside the marking field.

Centre Simulation
Select this button to centre the marking field within the simulation window.

Zoom Factor
The zoom factor defaults to100%. Increasing this value zooms in and decreasing this value
zooms out. A value of 100% means that the screen representation sizes are a close
approximation to the real sizes.

Reset Zoom
Select this button to reset the zoom to 100%.

Redraw Simulation
Select this button to redraw the simulation display. Occasionally when a lot of simulation
takes place with many data blocks presents and overlapping windows ‘holes’ can appear in
the simulation. The ‘holes’ are filled in when the simulation display is redrawn.

Load Font
Select this button to load in a Scriba font for simulation. This does not load the font to the
marker.

Position of Mouse
This display shows the position of the mouse giving the XY coordinates in the selected
units.

17 Document No: QP00033 Issue: H

 Scrîba 3 Software Programming Manual Issue H

2.7 Part File Tabs

1st part program 2nd part program 3rd part program

The Scriba 3 software allows many part programs to be open at any one time. As each part
program is created or opened a tab appears for that part program. This allows the switching
between each open part program. The * in the first part program tab indicates that the part
program has not been saved yet.

2.8 Connection to Marker Indicator .

If the marker is switched on and connected this indicator is coloured green. If the marker is
not in this state then the indicator is coloured red. If the marker is connected after the
application has been run then click on the indicator to establish communication with the
marker (see Section 4.1 for more details).

2.9 Data Block List Window .

The Data Block List window contains a list of all the data blocks contained within the
currently active part program. The order in the list will be the order in which the data
blocks will be marked. When data blocks are added via the menu or the toolbar these are
added to the end of the list. When data blocks are inserted they are inserted before the
currently selected data block.
To re-order the data blocks click on the data block to be moved and keeping the left hand
mouse button pressed select which other data block it is to be inserted in the front of and
release the mouse button. The data blocks number will always remain in ascending order
sequence.

The first entry in the Data Block List window is the set of local preferences that pertain to
the currently opened program or programs and are saved with those programs.

Figure 2.4 Data Block List Window

18 Document No: QP00033 Issue: H

 Scrîba 3 Software Programming Manual Issue H

Blocks within the Data Block List window may be dragged and dropped into new positions
in the list using the mouse (as described above). If a part file with many data blocks is
added it may be possible that the new position for the data block is not visible. In this case
drag the data block over the up and down arrows at the top and bottom of the Data Block
List window; this will cause the list to scroll thereby bringing the required position into
view. To drag multiple data blocks use the shift and control keys to select the required data
blocks.

Each line in the Data Block List window contains the type of the data block followed by the
name given to that data block. This name can be changed by double clicking on the
required data block within the Data Block List window. The Change Data Block Name
dialog then appears (Figure 2.5). Type in the new name as required and click OK.

Figure 2.5 Change Data Block Name Dialog

2.10 Data Block Properties Window

The Data Block Properties window contains all the properties of the currently
selected data block. The currently selected data block is the one that is highlighted
in the Data Block List window (it may also be the one selected in the simulation
window). These properties are described in detail in Section 10

Figure 2.6 Data Block Properties Window (preferences)

When the current part program contains no data blocks the part program preferences
are displayed. These preferences can be changed for the current part program
without affecting any other. Any changes made to these preferences are stored with
the part program when it is saved. They are described in detail in Section 3.10.2.

19 Document No: QP00033 Issue: H

 Scrîba 3 Software Programming Manual Issue H

2.11 Simulation Window

The Simulation window shows an accurate representation of the laser marking field.
A background grid is displayed in the units and interval selected in the part file
preferences (see Section 3.10.2). The current units can be changed with the
preferences shown in the Data Block Properties window and this will be reflected in
the simulation display.

The Simulation window is also used to drag and drop data blocks around the
marking area. Zooming in or out of the Simulation window can also be achieved
(see Section 2.5 above)

When the Simulation window is in the drag and drop mode the data block selected
will also be the one that is highlighted in the Data Block List window and the one
whose properties are shown in the Data Block Properties window.

Rulers Data block hint

Selected data block

Figure 2.7 Simulation Window

As the mouse is passed over the data block in the simulation window the data block hint
appears. This contains the name of the data block and its XY position in the units
selected.Rulers are arranged along the top and left hand side of the simulation window.
These are graduated in the units selected. The centre of the marking field is signified by the
intersection of the horizontal and vertical red dotted lines.

20 Document No: QP00033 Issue: H

 Scrîba 3 Software Programming Manual Issue H
2.11.1 Mouse wheel zooming
The Scriba 3 software has support for mouse scroll wheels. A forward (or up) push by one
‘notch’ will result in a ten percent increase in the zoom on the simulate screen, whereas a
backwards (or down) push by one ‘notch’ will result in a ten percent decrease in the zoom
on the simulation window.

2.11.2 Adding a Data Block in the Simulation Window

2.11.2.1 Visible Data Blocks

Visible Data Blocks include Logo, TextLine, TextRing, 3DI, Bar code, Data Matrix,
Picture.
To add one of the above data blocks to the Simulation Window:
- Select the required data block from the Data Block toolbar or select
from the menu DataBlock/Add.
- Move the cursor to the Simulation Window. On entry to the Simulate
window the cursor changes to a pen, which indicates that a new data
block is about to be added to the current part file.
- Drag a bounding rectangle on the Simulation window and release the
mouse button.
- The data block will be added to the Simulation window in the
following way:
- TextLine – The bounding box height represents the height of the text.
- TextRing – The top left of the bounding box identifies the start point
of the text ring.
- Barcode, 3DI, Data Matrix – The top left of the bounding box
identifies the top left of the object being placed.
- Picture, Logo – The top left of the bounding box identifies the top left
of the object. The size property will have to be adjusted to modify
the size of the imported graphic.

2.11.2.2 Invisible Data Blocks

Invisible Data Blocks include Motion XYZ Absolute, Motion XY Increment,

Motion XY Step Rep, Step Rep, Step End, Direct Block.

To add one of the above data blocks to the Simulation Window:

Select the required data block from the Data Block toolbar or select from the menu
DataBlock/Add. The data block will be added immediately to the data block list.
There may be no visible change on the Simulation window until some of the data
block’s properties are modified.

2.11.3 Deleting selected objects

While simulate screen is active, if the delete key is pressed once, all selected data blocks in
the simulate screen will be deleted and removed from the data block list. After this
operation, no data block is selected in the simulate screen and the highlighted item of data
block list is Preferences.

21 Document No: QP00033 Issue: H

 Scrîba 3 Software Programming Manual Issue H
If there are no selected data blocks on the simulate screen, when the delete key is pressed
nothing happens.

2.11.4 Note on Logo Data Blocks

When a logo data block has been added using the drag and drop method, the software will
prompt for a filename to be selected. If cancel is clicked here, then the data block will still
be added, this allows the manual typing of PNL information, via the text area or
ScribaDraw.
See Section 14 - Vector Graphics – for more information.

2.11.5 Resizing Data Block on Simulation Screen

Figure 2.8 Resizing the Data Block

A selected data block on the simulation screen will be surrounded by a selection rectangle
with mouse pickup points at its four corners. When the mouse is moved over the corners,
the mouse icon changes to a double ended arrow which signifies the ability to drag these
points. To resize, hold down the left mouse button and drag to the required size.

The re-sizing is reflected in the data block properties that are affected. For example in the
text line data block the height of the text and its aspect ratio may be changed.

If more than one data block is selected at the same time, the mouse pickup points are not
shown. Resizing is not available during multiple data block selection.

2.12 Marker Info Toolbar

The Marker Info toolbar has the same functionality as the Marker Info item selection from
the Send menu. These selections are described in detail in section 8.

Marker Info

Marker Info Marker Info

(DSP head 1) (DSP head 2) – Duo only

22 Document No: QP00033 Issue: H

 Scrîba 3 Software Programming Manual Issue H

2.13 Laser Parameter Recipes Toolbar

The Fill Recipes toolbar allows a) the selection of a laser parameters recipe, b) the
application of the selected laser recipe to the selected data blocks and c) to be set as the
default for the application. If selected, this will be used as default the next time Scriba 3
software is launched.

Laser Parameter Recipe selection Set Selected Recipe to Default

Apply the Selected Recipe to the Selected Data Blocks

The laser recipes will only appear in the above selection once they have been created using
the Laser Parameter Recipes setup from the View menu (see Section 5.2 Laser Parameter
Recipes).

2.14 Re-import Files Toolbar

The Re-Import Files toolbar allows the re-importing of ancillary files for a) the selected data
blocks (this is the same action as the Re-import file for Selected from the Edit menu) and b)
all the data blocks in the part file.

Re-import Files for Selected Data Blocks

Re-import Files for all Data Blocks

2.15 Camera Toolbar

This contains a single button which is used to capture an image from a camera which is then
placed as a background within the Scriba 3 simulation screen. See Section 9 – Vision Menu
for further details.

23 Document No: QP00033 Issue: H

 Scrîba 3 Software Programming Manual Issue H

2.16 Toolbars – General

All the toolbars (File Menu toolbar, Data Block toolbar, Window toolbar Simulation
Window toolbar and the Send toolbar) can be repositioned within the main display area.
They can be placed in the same area as other toolbars or left floating anywhere within the
main display area. See the example placements below in Figure 2.9.

Figure 2.9 Main Display with Repositioned Toolbars

24 Document No: QP00033 Issue: H

 Scrîba 3 Software Programming Manual Issue H

3
Section 3: File Menu
In this section:
3.1 File Menu Toolbar
3.2 New
3.3 Open
3.4 Close
3.5 Close All
3.6 Save
3.7 Save As
3.8 Save All
3.9 Import from Text File
3.10 Export to Text File
3.11 Send To
3.12 Preferences
3.12.1 Application Preferences
3.12.1.1 Language
3.12.1.2 Multi Program
3.12.1.3 Sound
3.12.1.4 Rotary Enable
3.12.1.5 X Axis Enable
3.12.1.6 Y Axis Enable
3.12.1.7 Z Axis Enable
3.12.1.8 Comm Port
3.12.1.9 Baud Rate
3.12.1.10 Warnings
3.12.1.11 Log Serialisations
3.12.1.12 Mirror Mode Correction
3.12.1.13 Current Auto Modify
3.12.1.14 Use End of Batch Signal
3.12.1.15 End of Batch Signal Port
3.12.1.16 End of Batch Signal Duration.
3.12.1.17 Default Simulation Control Mode
3.12.1.18 Default Zoom
3.12.1.19 Create Backup Files
3.12.1.20 Short Command System
3.12.1.21 Use End of Serial Number Signal
3.12.1.22 End of Serial Number Signal Port
3.12.1.23 End of Serial Number Signal Duration
3.12.1.24 Error Window Auto Popup
3.12.1.25 Text Area Font
3.12.1.26 Create DSP Profile Backups
3.12.1.27 Comms Logging
3.12.1.28 Save Error Window Log
3.12.1.29 Ethernet Port
3.12.1.30 IP address
3.12.1.31 Remove File Input Items
3.12.2 Part File Preferences

25 Document No: QP00033 Issue: H

 Scrîba 3 Software Programming Manual Issue H
3.12.2.1 Units
3.12.2.2 Serialisation Rollover
3.12.2.3 Serialise To Compiled File
3.12.2.4 Text Rings Position Correction
3.12.2.5 Carry Forward
3.12.2.6 Grid Spacing
3.12.2.7 Ruler Zero Position
3.12.2.8 Heads.
3.12.2.9 Snap To Grid
3.12.2.10 Data Matrix Version
3.12.2.1 Laser Pens
3.12.2.12 Maintain Aspect Default
3.12.2.13 Immediate Variable Text Fields
3.12.2.14 Motion Field Width
3.12.2.15 Motion Field Height
3.12.2.16 Motion X Origin
3.12.2.17 Motion Y Origin
3.12.2.18 Activate Beam Delays
3.12.2.19 Beam On Delay
3.12.2.20 Beam Off Delay
3.12.2.21 Slew Pause
3.12.2.22 Vector Pause
3.12.2.23 Target Machine
3.12.2.24 File Input to Compiled File
3.12.2.25 Logo Mark Size Auto Popup
3.12.2.26 Logo Line Reducer Enabled
3.12.2.27 Logo Line Reducer Tolerance
3.12.2.28 Variable Aperture Enabled
3.12.2.29 Zoom Beam Expander Enabled
3.12.2.30 File Input End Mode
3.12.2.31 On-The-Fly Mode
3.12.2.32 Direction Reversed
3.12.2.33 Pulses Per Metre
3.12.2.34 Marking Angle
3.12.2.35 Offset
3.12.2.36 Conveyor Angle
3.12.2.37 Pulse Width Enabled
3.12.2.38 Text Ring Input Format
3.12.2.39 Text Ring Angle Format
3.12.2.40 Global Text Change
3.12.2.41 Use Part Radius
3.12.2.42 Clear VTFs on Mark Complete
3.12.2.43 Text Substitution Batching Visible
3.12.2.44 Picture Width Correction
3.12.2.45 Display Motion Lens Field
3.12.2.46 Ascii Format Bitmaps
3.13 Font Auto Download
3.14 Program Auto Download
3.15 Passwords
3.15.1 Password Levels Setup Screen
3.15.2 Password Levels Edit Screen
3.15.3 Edit Password Levels Dialog
3.15.4 Select Password Level Dialog
3.16 User Interface Customisation
3.17 Linear On-The-Fly Setup Wizard
3.18 Print
3.19 Printer Set-up
3.20 Exit
3.21 Recent File Opening

26 Document No: QP00033 Issue: H

 Scrîba 3 Software Programming Manual Issue H

File Menu
The File menu commands allow you to create a new part program, open an existing
part program, save a part program to disk, print out a part program to a printer, set
the software preferences, exit the Scrîba software and open any of the eight most
recently used part files. These commands are generally applied to an entire part
program file. Clicking the mouse on File reveals the File menu (Figure 3.1).

Figure 3.1 File Menu

3.1 File Menu Toolbar

New Save Print Printer Setup Exit

Marks Counter Window

Open Close Save As Error Window

Full Screen Simulation

27 Document No: QP00033 Issue: H

 Scrîba 3 Software Programming Manual Issue H

3.2 New
The New command is used to start a new part file and this is created in addition to
those part files already open. Any currently loaded part file will not be destroyed or
saved. These functions must be explicitly done. The data block list is cleared and
contains only the part file preferences for the current file.

3.3 Open
The Open command is used to open a previously created part program file (*.bpt).
When the Open command is selected, a standard file open dialog appears on the
screen. The newly selected file is opened in addition to those files already open.
One or more files can be selected to be opened at the same time.

Figure 3.2 Part File Tabs

3.4 Close
The Close command closes the current part file. If the current part file has not been
previously saved a dialog box will appear asking to save it if required (see Save As
below).

3.5 Close All

The Close All command closes all the currently opened part files. If the part file has
not been previously saved a dialog box will appear asking to save it if required (see
Save As below).

3.6 Save
The Save command is used to store the current part program permanently to disk.
When the Save command is selected one of two things will happen. Firstly, if the
part file is a new file which has not been saved before the ‘Save As’ dialog will be
displayed (see the next section). Secondly, if the part file already has a name it will
simply be saved with that name and to the same location thereby overwriting the
previously saved file. The name of the file must have the first 12 characters unique
and must not include any spaces.

3.7 Save As
The Save As command is used to store the current part program permanently to disk
with a new name. When the Save As command is selected the part program is given
the filename Untitled.bpt. Enter your own filename but keep the file extension the
same. If the file has already been saved any modifications that have been made are
saved over the previous version. The name of the file must have the first 12
characters unique and must not include any spaces.

28 Document No: QP00033 Issue: H

 Scrîba 3 Software Programming Manual Issue H

3.8 Save All

The Save All command saves all the currently open part files. A ‘Save As’ dialog
will appear for each part file that has not been saved previously. The name of each
file to save must have the first 12 characters unique and must not include any spaces.

3.9 Import from Text File

This opens a previously created part file which has been exported as a text file
(*.spt). This command need only be used in trying to ascertain problems within a
created part file. This form of part file will actually consume more of the computer
memory because of its verbose nature.

3.10 Export to Text File

This exports the current part file in a text format (*.spt). This format can be read in
such applications as Notepad or Wordpad. This format is only used for debugging
part file problems.

3.11 Send To
Clicking this item will cause the current part file, along with its associated fill files,
logo files and bitmap files, to be attached to a new email from the default email
client (Figure 3.3). Note that the file must be saved before this can occur. This
would normally be used for diagnostics purposes to send the marking file and all its
associated files to Electrox.

Figure 3.3 Send To Menu Item Selection

29 Document No: QP00033 Issue: H

 Scrîba 3 Software Programming Manual Issue H

3.12 Preferences

Application preferences Default part file preferences

All preferences visible

Figure 3.4 Preferences Window

The Preferences command opens the preferences window from which you can
specify a number of default options for the Scriba 3 software. The preferences are
split into two groups, the application preferences and the default part file
preferences. The application preferences are those preferences that pertain to the
application such as the language selection. The default part file preferences are
those preferences that pertain to any new part files created, such as the units it has
been created in (imperial or metric). Selecting the ‘All’ tab makes visible both sets
of preferences in a single list.
For those properties that are non-numeric double clicking on that property will cycle
round to the next option. For instance if the options are Yes and No double clicking
will alternate between the two.

Clicking the OK button accepts any changes made and clicking the Cancel button
ignores any changes made.

30 Document No: QP00033 Issue: H

 Scrîba 3 Software Programming Manual Issue H

The Export To Text File button allows the saving of all the preferences into a text file.
Clicking on this button opens a standard Windows File Open dialog from which the file to
be saved can be selected. The information in this file contains a list of all the preferences
and their values. This is used for diagnostics purposes or copying the preferences to
another PC running Scrîba 3 software.

The Import From text File allows a previously exported text file to be imported. Clicking
on this button opens a standard Windows File Open dialog from which the file to import
can be selected.

3.12.1 Application Preferences

These are the default preferences that pertain to the application.

3.12.1.1 Language

There are four languages currently available. These are:

English, French, German, Swedish, Spanish, Dutch, Polish, Russian, Korean,

Chinese and Japanese.

The correct version of Windows™ is required for Polish, Russian, Korean, Chinese
and Japanese to be available.

3.12.1.2 Multi Program

This allows you to select either Multi Program or Single Program mode. In Multi
Program mode it is possible to send multiple part programs to the marker, one at a
time and store each program individually. If this mode is not selected then only one
part program at a time can be resident in the marker, as any program already in the
marker will be erased. Selection of the program to be marked is via the operator
control panel or the Serial Link Protocol. Select yes for Multi Program or no for
Single Program mode.

3.12.1.3 Sound

This allows you to turn on the warning sound, an audible beep, used in connection
with the Measure Power and Mark Time functions. The beep is used to remind you
that the marker is performing a power measurement calibration or timing function.
Select Yes or No according to requirement.

3.12.1.4 Rotary Enable

This option enables the rotary sections of the program. When enabled it allows the
rotary axis hardware to be set up and enables the rotary specific properties within
Text Line and Picture data blocks. Select Yes or No according to requirement.

31 Document No: QP00033 Issue: H

 Scrîba 3 Software Programming Manual Issue H
3.12.1.5 X Axis Enable

This option enables the X axis sections of the program. When enabled it allows the
X axis hardware to be set up and the ability to effect motion in the X axis using the
motion control data blocks. Select Yes or No according to requirement.

3.12.1.6 Y Axis Enable

This option enables the Y axis sections of the program. When enabled it allows the
Y axis hardware to be set up and the ability to effect motion in the Y axis using the
motion control data blocks. Select Yes or No according to requirement.

3.12.1.7 Z Axis Enable

This option enables the Z axis sections of the program. When enabled it allows the
Z axis hardware to be set up and the ability to effect motion in the Z axis using the
motion control data blocks. Select Yes or No according to requirement.

3.12.1.8 Comm Port

This option allows the selection of the communications channel between the
computer and the marker. The options are USB, None, COM1 to COM20 and
Ethernet. USB communication is only available with markers with eprom level G0
series or later. Ethernet is only available with markers with G2 electronics with a
firmware level of x22N or later.

3.12.1.9 Baud Rate

This option allows the selection of the comms port communications speed. The
default is 38400. This option is enabled if the Comm Port preference is set to
COM1 through to COM10.

3.12.1.10Warnings

If the software is configured for Comm 1 and this option is set to Yes, a warning will
appear when the software is opened. This warning is a reminder that if the mouse on
your computer is connected to Comm 1 then opening the software could disable the
mouse. If this option is set to No then no warning will appear when the software is
opened.

3.12.1.11 Log Serialisations

When serialising with the marker, it is possible to automatically create a log file of
the parts marked by setting this option to Yes. When serialisation is started you will
be prompted to enter a file name into which the software will list the date, time, part
program name and a list of each serial number marked. If the file name does not
exist then the file will be created. If the file name does exist then the new data will
be appended to that file. If this option is set to No, then no log file will be created.
Note that this log file produced will contain the numbers sent to the Scriba and not
necessarily those marked as the cycle needs to be completed by executing the mark.

32 Document No: QP00033 Issue: H

 Scrîba 3 Software Programming Manual Issue H
3.12.1.12 Mirror Mode Correction

When this option is set to Yes, it corrects any displacements using the DISPLACE
X,Y command for the mirror mode selected. Note that the mirror mode must first be
selected and sent to the marker for this correction to take place.

3.12.1.13 Current Auto Modify

When this option is set to Yes, it automatically modifies the current for each data
block as it is sent to the marker. This can be used after a Measure Power operation,
which ascertains if a change in current is required to maintain a consistent quality of
mark over the life of the lamp in the marker. If set to No, the current is not changed.

3.12.1.14 Use End of Batch Signal

An end-of-batch hardware signal can be generated by the marker. This can be done
by setting the Use End of Batch Signal option to yes and specifying an output to use
and the duration of the output pulse.

3.12.1.15 End of Batch Signal Port

This option specifies the output port to be used for the-end-batch signal. This option
is only enabled when Use End of Batch Signal is set to Yes.

3.12.1.16 End of Batch Signal Duration.

This option specifies the duration of the-end-batch signal. This option is only
enabled when ‘use end of batch signal’ is set to Yes. This value is specified in
seconds.

3.12.1.17 Default Simulation Control Mode

This option allows the default setting of the control mode for the Simulation
window. Previous versions of the Scriba software defaulted to the Zoom mode
while many CAD applications default to a Drag and Drop mode. Select your
favourite setting.

3.12.1.18 Default Zoom

This option allows the default setting of the zoom value for the Simulation Window.

3.12.1.19 Create Backup Files

This option allows the creation or not of backup files. If this option is set to Yes,
then every time a part program is saved as a .bpt file then a backup file is created in
the same directory. This file will be named in the following format:
FILENAME_bpt.001

There will only ever be a maximum of five backup files for each .bpt file, each
backup file being given the next sequential number as its file extension. To load one

33 Document No: QP00033 Issue: H

 Scrîba 3 Software Programming Manual Issue H
of these files back into the Scriba 3 software, rename the file so that the extension
reads .bpt again and it will become visible in the File Open dialog box.
If the option is set to ‘No’ then no backup files will be created at any time.

3.12.1.20 Short Command System

When set to ‘Yes’, this will enable the Short Command System, when set to ‘No’ the
normal Command System will be used.
The Short Command System replaces certain ASCII commands that are sent to the
marker with much shorter commands, resulting in a decrease in the download time
to the marker.
NOTE: This time decrease will be different for each data block, but is generally
around 10% to 12% for logo data blocks.

Note that this feature is eprom dependent.

3.12.1.20.1 Commands Affected

Following is a list of the commands affected, and their short command alternatives.
(All these commands can be found in the Commands and Protocols manual)

Short Command Standard Command

A CCW
B BZV
C CW
F WOBFREQ
I CURRENT
L LINE
O OFFSET
P POS
Q FREQ
R RATE
S SOB
W WOBBLE
X ADDXOFF
Y ADDYOFF

3.12.1.21 Use End of Serial Number Signal

This option allows the production of a hardware signal generated by the marker
when it has been updated with new serial number information from the host
computer. This signifies that the marker is ready to mark again with new data. This
is useful when the marker is controlled by external handling equipment.

3.12.1.22 End of Serial Number Signal Port

This allows the designation of a particular hardware port to signal the arrival of the
updated serial number information.

34 Document No: QP00033 Issue: H

 Scrîba 3 Software Programming Manual Issue H
3.12.1.23 End of Serial Number Signal Duration

This allows the duration of the pulse on the designated hardware port to be altered.

3.12.1.24 Error Window Auto Popup

This allows the Error Window to popup automatically or not when an error is
encountered by the software. The default is Yes. Selecting No will mean that the
Error Window will not appear when an error occurs and to view any errors the Error
Window must be explicitly opened.

3.12.1.25 Text Area Font

This allows the selection of the default font that is used within the data block text
area. When this property is selected a standard font selection dialog will be
displayed from which a font can be selected. Only True Type fonts may be selected.
Changing the font in this way is useful in such situations where a font other than MS
Sans Serif (the default font for the text area) is used, and special characters are
needed. The font can be changed to the true type representation of the font being
used, resulting in special character keystrokes being mapped correctly to the text
area.
NOTE: Only the Font, Font Style and Size portions of the font dialog are used. The
Effects and Script sections are ignored.

Figure 3.5 Text Area on the Left, Simulation on the Right

3.12.1.26 Create DSP Profile Backups

This allows the creation of DSP profiles backups. The backups are created every
time one or more DSP parameters are changed if this option is set to Yes. The
creation of the backups, allows in the future, the capability of rolling back to
previously created settings. See Section 23 - Laser Marker Profiles for further
information.

3.12.1.27 Comms Logging

This turns on or off communications logging between the application and the laser.
This is used for diagnostics purposes only. See section 10.7 for more detailed
information on communications logging.

35 Document No: QP00033 Issue: H

 Scrîba 3 Software Programming Manual Issue H

3.12.1.28 Save Error Window Log

This turns on or off the ability to save the contents of the Error Window (date and
time stamped) to a log file when the application is closed. The log file will be saved
in the Scriba 3 install directory and will have a name similar to the following:
Log_09_48_22 16_Thu_Jul_2009.txt indicating that this file was created on the
16th July 2009 at 9.48am (and 22 seconds). This is useful for logging any errors that
may have occurred with the marker.

3.12.1.29 Ethernet Port

This is enabled if Ethernet is selected in the Comm Port preference. This allows the
setting of the Ethernet port of the marker to which the application will communicate.
The setting of this port in the marker and the PC is detailed in the laser System
manual.

3.12.1.30 IP address

This is enabled if Ethernet is selected in the Comm Port preference. This allows the
setting of the IP address of the marker to which the application will communicate.
The setting of this address in the marker and the PC is detailed in the laser System
manual.

3.12.1.31 Remove File Input Items

This property determines whether the items in a text files being used for file input
are removed or not from that file after use. If set to No, the items are not removed
from the text file. If set to Yes, the items are removed from the text file and hence
allows a resumption of the file input with this text file when restarted later.

3.12.2 Part File Preferences

These are the default preferences that pertain to any new part programs created.

3.12.2.1 Units

This allows the selection of the units used by the Scrîba 3 software and those
displayed in the data blocks. Select Metric or Imperial. Metric units are in
millimetres and Imperial units are in inches. The simulation screen grid will also
change in accordance with the selection.

3.12.2.2 Serialisation Rollover

If your serialisation consists of two characters (for example, 00 to 99) then under
normal serialisation when the numbers reach 99 any further attempts to increment
will be ignored. If the Rollover box is selected then the 99 would rollover to 00. If
decrementing, the value 00 would rollover to 99. The rollover also works with both
upper and lower case letters.

36 Document No: QP00033 Issue: H

 Scrîba 3 Software Programming Manual Issue H

3.12.2.3 Serialise To Compiled File

When a compiled file is created that has included serialisation, the information that
is compiled is normally the last serial number as shown in the text field. When
serialisation data is sent to the marker it sends the character ‘~’ which serves as a
placeholder in the marker. When this preference is selected then the ‘~’ characters
also get sent to the compiled file. This is useful where another controlling program
is using a Scrîba compiled file which it is using to serialise with and allows this
other controlling program to act on the serialisation.

3.12.2.4 Text Rings Position Correction

The function of this control is to adjust the position of the text ring so that its start
position is in the correct place (see below). This option has been added as earlier
users may have compensated for this error already within their previously created
part program.
When the option is selected, any text rings will be re-aligned to the correct position.
This will result in different effects dependant upon the type of justification you are
using. These examples use clockwise ring text justified as stated.

Counter Clockwise Justified:

With correction on, the bottom left of the first character of the first line will be
aligned to the XY position that was specified (see below):

Without correction With correction

Centre Justified:

The centre of the whole first line, with correction on, will be placed at the XY
position therefore ensuring true centre justification (see below):

Without correction With correction

37 Document No: QP00033 Issue: H

 Scrîba 3 Software Programming Manual Issue H

Clockwise Justified:

With correction on, the bottom right of the first character of the first line will be
aligned with the XY position specified (see below):

Without correction With correction

Text Fills:

With correction on, the characters will all appear within the arc defined by the X
Position, Y Position and X End, Y End values.

Without correction With correction

3.12.2.5 Carry Forward

This option allows the selection of the carry forward method for the Scriba3
Software. The possible options are:

None: specifies that no properties should be carried forward.

Last Block: specifies that format, positional and laser properties entered in the
previous data block will be carried forward to the newly created one.

Selected Block: specifies that format, positional and laser properties in the currently
selected block in the Data Block list will be carried forward to the newly created
one.

3.12.2.6 Grid Spacing

This option specifies the size of the visible grid on the simulation window. The base
units will be those specified by the Measurements option above.
38 Document No: QP00033 Issue: H
 Scrîba 3 Software Programming Manual Issue H
3.12.2.7 Ruler Zero Position

This option allows the zero position of the simulation window ruler to be set for a
Scriba Duo. It can be set for the centre of the marking field for head one or head
two.

3.12.2.8 Heads.
Selecting Single Head configures the software for single headed marker operation.
Selecting Double Head configures the software for Duo marker operation. When the
software is configured for double head additional dialog boxes appear in the lens set-
up window. The simulate window also changes to show the marking area of both
heads.

3.12.2.9 Snap To Grid

This option when set to Yes, forces the object being dragged in the simulation
window to be dropped only at an intersection on the visible grid. When set to No,
the object will be dropped where the pointer is located.

3.12.2.10 Data Matrix Version

It is possible to choose whether version 1 or version 2 of the data matrix encryption

algorithm is used to mark the data matrix. Of course the mark will depend upon
which version is fitted to the marker. Some laser markers have version two Data
Matrix capability only whilst others have both version one and two capability. This
capability is dependent upon the firmware fitted to the laser marker.

3.12.2.1 Laser Pens

Figure 3.6 Pens Setup Window

The Pens Setup command opens the Setup Pens window from which you can setup
the laser pens. A laser pen can be considered analogous to plotter pens. Whereas
plotter pens have size and colour the laser pens have five properties, namely, power,
frequency, rate, wobble width and wobble frequency. The Aperture column is only
available when the Variable Aperture Enabled property has been set to Yes (see

39 Document No: QP00033 Issue: H

 Scrîba 3 Software Programming Manual Issue H
section 3.12.2.28). The Zoom Beam Expander column is only available when the
Zoom Beam Expander Enabled property is set to Yes (see section 3.12.2.29). These
values can all be altered in this dialog. The values are saved when the OK button is
pressed. The Cancel button exits the dialog cancelling any changes made. Note also
that each pen can be given a colour and this colour can be changed by clicking on
the grey button just to the right of the colour display. This is for use within the fill
editor which can show by colour which pens are used where (see Section 14 - Vector
Graphics Programming and Section 15 - Fill Editor, for more information on pens).
The Default Colours button sets the pens colours to the base default colours. As
well as a colour each pen can be given a useful name which could pertain to the type
of material being marked.

The Pen window in Fill Editor is also changed in the purpose of displaying Pen
Name (Figure 3.7).

Figure 3.7 Pens Set-up

NOTE: Pen0 is the default pen and does not have a pen name.

3.12.2.12 Maintain Aspect Default

When importing vector generated graphics files (PLT, AI) and using the SIZE
command the aspect ratio of the image imported can either be maintained or not. If
it is not maintained then the graphic is shrunk or stretched to fit the dimensions
specified by the SIZE command (see Section 14 - Vector Graphics Programming).

3.12.2.13 Immediate Variable Text Fields

This option when set to Yes, allows the entry of text into the variable text fields
immediately on download to the marker. Normal use of variable text fields is to use
the Scriba 3 software to allocate fields which can then be updated by a computer
other than the PC which is hosting the Scriba3 software. This option is normally set
to No.

3.12.2.14 Motion Field Width

40 Document No: QP00033 Issue: H

 Scrîba 3 Software Programming Manual Issue H
This property allows the specification of the motion field width for the simulation
window. This is useful when the marker is controlling an XY table.

3.12.2.15 Motion Field Height

This property allows the specification of the motion field height for the simulation
window. This is useful when the marker is controlling an XY table.

3.12.2.16 Motion X Origin

This property allows the X position of the motion origin to be positioned anywhere
within the area of the XY table.

3.12.2.17 Motion Y Origin

This property allows the Y position of the motion origin to be positioned anywhere
within the area of the XY table.

3.12.2.18 Activate Beam Delays

Beam delays are used primarily for the fine tuning of high speed marks. Three types
of beam delay are available – beam on delay, beam off delay and slew pause. The
values of these delays can be altered using the beam delays dialog below.
If this option is set to Yes, then the displayed beam delays and slew pause are sent
with every part file that is downloaded. Note that these delays are only active for the
duration of the actual mark. If these delays are required all the time then they will
need to be sent with every part file. These delays are not added to compiled files. If
this option is set to No, then the beam delays and slew pause already set in the
marker will remain unchanged.

3.12.2.19 Beam On Delay

The beam on delay is a delay in turning the laser beam on with respect to the time it
was commanded to do so.
Non-DSP lasers use 100us precision while DSP lasers use 10us precision.
For DSP lasers, the values may be positive only.
For non-DSP lasers, the values can be both positive and negative. A positive value
will create a delay and a negative value will allow the beam to come on early.

3.12.2.20 Beam Off Delay

The beam off delay is a delay in turning the laser beam off with respect to the time it
was commanded to do so. A positive value will create a delay and a negative value
will allow the beam to go off early.
Non-DSP lasers use 100us precision while DSP lasers use 10us precision.
For DSP lasers, the values must be positive only.
For non-DSP lasers, the values can be both positive and negative. A positive value
will create a delay and a negative value will allow the beam to go off early.

41 Document No: QP00033 Issue: H

 Scrîba 3 Software Programming Manual Issue H
3.12.2.21 Slew Pause

The slew pause is the time that the laser beam pauses for at the end of a slew (move
with no marking) before being commanded to start marking. This can have positive
values only.
Non-DSP lasers use 100us precision while DSP lasers use 10us precision.

3.12.2.22 Vector Pause

The vector pause is the time that the laser beam pauses for at the end of a vector
before continuing with the next slew or vector. Note that these delays will only be
active if the pause is requested by the logo being marked (see Section 14.1 Point-To-
Point Programming and Section 15 - Fill Editor).
This property is only enabled for DSP lasers. DSP lasers use 10us precision and the
values must be positive only.

3.12.2.23 Target Machine

This property is only enabled when no laser is connected.

This allows compiled files to be created with the correct beam on/off delays, slew
and vector pauses. This is because the values of these delays and pauses change
according to whether a DSP, a non-DSP or a fibre laser is in use.

3.12.2.24 File Input to Compiled File

This property when set to YES places file input identifiers into compiled files when
these are created. If set to NO the text strings within the data block will be placed
into the compiled file instead. Set this to YES if the compiled files are used with
other software that must detect the presence of file input.

3.12.2.25 Logo Mark Size Auto Popup

This property enables or disables the automatic popup of the Logo Mark Size Dialog
popup after a Logo Data Block is created on the Simulation Window by a drag and
drop operation.
If this option is set to ‘Enabled’, the Mark Size dialog will be popup automatically as
soon as the mouse left button is released when creating a Logo Data Block by a drag
and drop operation. The user can input new Width and Height values to specify the
Data Block size explicitly.
If the option is set to ‘Disabled’, which is the default value, the Logo Data Block is
created as normal without the Mark Size dialog appearing.

42 Document No: QP00033 Issue: H

 Scrîba 3 Software Programming Manual Issue H

3.12.2.26 Logo Line Reducer Enabled

When some curves are created large and then scaled down, this can result in a large
number of vectors in a very small space being generated to describe that curve. In
this case there are more vectors than is required. If this curve is marked with this
large number of vectors, a slow down in the marking speed can occur and hotspots
can therefore be generated on the work piece. To get around this, it is possible to
reduce the number of these vectors sent to the marker by setting this option to Yes.

3.12.2.27 Logo Line Reducer Tolerance

The number of vectors sent to the marker when the Logo Line Reducer is enabled
can be varied according to the tolerance set. This defines how close the vectors have
to be for removal. The larger this number the more vectors are removed. This can
result in faster marks and reduced hotspots but may also show up the individual
vectors that make up the curve (this number represents the number of 1/4000ths of an
inch).

3.12.2.28 Variable Aperture Enabled

This controls the motorised variable aperture if fitted. Set this option to Yes for the
control to be effective. When this is set to Yes an additional property appears in the
Control section of the Data Block properties allowing an aperture to be set.

3.12.2.29 Zoom Beam Expander Enabled

This controls the motorised zoom beam expander if fitted. Set this option to Yes for
the control to be effective. When this is set to Yes an additional property appears in
the Control section of the Data Block properties allowing a zoom magnification to
be set.

3.12.2.30 File Input End Mode

This setting affects what happens when there are not enough lines in a file input text
file to fill all the file input entries within the data blocks. For example, if there were
three file inputs within the part file and five lines in the text file then the text file
would be one line short.

The settings are as follows:

File Rollover:
This is the default setting. A new file will be prompted for and the first lines in this
file used to fill the remaining file inputs. (In the above example this would mean the
first line in the new file would be placed in the third file input on the second part)
Pad Missing Lines:
This setting fills any unfilled file inputs with blank spaces. (In the above example
the third file input would be blank on the second part).

43 Document No: QP00033 Issue: H

 Scrîba 3 Software Programming Manual Issue H
Throw Away Leftovers:
This setting will prevent any part being marked that does not have a complete set of
filled file inputs. (In the above example the first three lines only in the text would be
marked on the first part).

In all cases when the file is finished, a file open dialog will be displayed prompting
for a new text file. If cancel is chosen the Text Substitution screen will close.

3.12.2.31 On-The-Fly Mode

This may be set to either off or linear. If it is set to off then no on-the-fly marking
will be performed. If it is set to linear then most of the other on-the-fly preferences
(below) are enabled. These include Direction Reversed, Pulses Per Metre, Marking
Angle, Offset and Conveyer Angle. For further information see Section 14.8.3 On-
The-Fly Tiling and Section 24 On-The-Fly Marking.

3.12.2.32 Direction Reversed

This is used to reverse the direction of the on-the-fly marking. Setting this to No
causes the on-the-fly marking to be from left to right while setting this to Yes causes
the on-the-fly marking to be from right to left.

3.12.2.33 Pulses Per Metre

This is the number of pulses per metre that is supplied from an encoder which
provides the conveyer speed. See also section 3.17 – Linear O-the-Fly Setup
Wizard.

3.12.2.34 Marking Angle

This is the angle of the mark with respect to the marking head. For example when
marking text it is normally at zero degrees. If set to 180° it becomes upside down
with respect to the operator. Zero degrees is the direction of the X+ axis (east) and
positive angle values are clockwise. See also section 3.17 – Linear O-the-Fly Setup
Wizard.

3.12.2.35 Offset

This is a linear offset applied to the on-the-fly marking perpendicular to the

direction of the movement of the conveyer.

3.12.2.36 Conveyor Angle

This is the angle of the conveyor with respect to the marking head. Normally at zero
degrees the conveyor is moving right to left ensuring that the on-the-fly marking is
left to right. This is used to take out any angular discrepancy between the conveyor
and the marking head. The zero degree position is the direction of the X+ axis (east)
and positive angle values are clockwise. See also section 3.17 – Linear O-the-Fly
Setup Wizard.

44 Document No: QP00033 Issue: H

 Scrîba 3 Software Programming Manual Issue H

3.12.2.37 Pulse Width Enabled

This preference is used to enable the Pulse Width property within the data blocks.
The Pulse Width property is only required for Scorpion Rapide lasers. If enabled for
other lasers the pulse width is ignored.

3.12.2.38 Text Ring Input Format

This is used to specify which format the application works in for the text ring input.
The default format is XY. For this format the centre of the circle and the start point
of the text ring on the circle’s circumference are specified. The option is R-theta
where the centre of the circle and the start angle are specified. Selection of the R-
theta format enables the Text Ring Angle Format preference.

3.12.2.39 Text Ring Angle Format

If the Text Ring Input Format is changed to R-theta then two angle formats become
available. This preference switches between standard Scriba angles and compass
angles for the Start Angle property in the Text Ring data block. Standard Scriba
angles have zero degrees on the X+ axis (east) with positive angles moving counter
clockwise and negative angles clockwise. Compass angles have zero degrees on the
Y+ axis (north) with positive angles moving clockwise and negative angles counter
clockwise.

3.12.2.40 Global Text Change

This allows the text area of a data block to be included or not when the global
properties are enabled during multiple data blocks’ selection. When set to No and
more than one data block is selected the text cannot be changed globally. When set
to Yes and more than one data block is selected the text can be changed globally.

3.12.2.41 Use Part Radius

Setting this preference allows either the part radius or the part diameter to be used
within the data blocks when specifying rotary movement. Switching between
automatically adjusts the value according to the desired requirement.

3.12.2.42 Clear VTFs on Mark Complete

Setting this preference to Yes causes all variable text fields in the text substitution
screen to be cleared when a mark is completed.

3.12.2.43 Text Substitution Batching Visible

Setting this preference to No causes the batching controls on the text substitution
screen not to be displayed. The default is Yes.

45 Document No: QP00033 Issue: H

 Scrîba 3 Software Programming Manual Issue H
3.12.2.44 Picture Width Correction

This preference is set to Yes by default and enables the picture width correction
present in EPROM series G10A or later; if you have manually corrected this
problem, then this preference should be set to False. This correction corrects the
width of the bitmap picture to exactly the number of bits in the width as opposed to
rounding to the nearest byte (eight bits).

3.12.2.45 Display Motion Lens Field

This preference is used to display the marking field on the simulation screen when
motion data blocks are also used. This is superimposed on top of the larger motion
simulation display field. If set to yes, then when motion simulation is active, a
marking field overlay will display where the marking field is located over the motion
field at the point of the currently selected data block.
In the examples below, it can be seen that the marking field overlay appears at the
motion field origin when the first data block is selected (Figure 3.8), and offset by
the X and Y values (2 inches and 3 inches respectively) contained in the XY motion
increment data block when the third data block is selected (Figure 3.9). Note that
this feature does not work for motion step and repeat blocks.

Figure 3.8 Marking Field Superimposed on Motion Display

46 Document No: QP00033 Issue: H

 Scrîba 3 Software Programming Manual Issue H

Figure 3.9 Marking Field Superimposed on Motion Display

3.12.2.46 Ascii Format Bitmaps

There are two formats in which bitmaps can be sent to the marker; these are binary
(the default) and ASCII format. The binary format is the fastest for sending but if
creating compiled files it is occasionally useful to switch to the ASCII format
particularly if the compiled file is to be manipulated I some way.

3.13 Font Auto Download

This menu item allows the creation of a list of fonts to download automatically once
connection has been established with the marker on launch of Scriba 3. A
disconnect and reconnect sequence will not cause the font auto download. Note that
if program auto downloads are requested then the fonts will be downloaded first.

Figure 3.10 Font Auto Download Dialog

Use the Add button to add fonts to the list. A standard File Open dialog appears
from which the fonts can be selected one at a time. When the fonts are added to the
list they are automatically checked. Only the fonts that are checked are downloaded.

47 Document No: QP00033 Issue: H

 Scrîba 3 Software Programming Manual Issue H
This allows the list to be maintained of commonly required fonts and the ability to
select those actually in use.
To delete a font from the list, select the font and click the Remove button.
Clicking the Send Now button sends the currently checked fonts to the marker
immediately.
Clicking the OK button accepts the font download list and closes the dialog. The
auto download will only be effective on the next launch of the application.

3.14 Program Auto Download

This menu item allows the creation of a list of programs (compiled files – see
Section 8.7) to download automatically once connection has been established with
the marker on launch of Scriba 3. A disconnect and reconnect sequence will not
cause the program auto download. Note that if font auto downloads are requested
then the fonts will be downloaded before the programs.

Figure 3.11 Program Auto Download

Use the Add button to add programs (compiled files) to the list. A standard File
Open dialog appears from which the programs can be selected one at a time. When
the programs are added to the list they are automatically checked. Only the
programs that are checked are downloaded. This allows the list to be maintained of
commonly required programs and the ability to select those actually in use.
To delete a program from the list, select the program and click the Remove button.
Clicking the Send Now button sends the currently checked programs to the marker
immediately.
Clicking the OK button accepts the program download list and closes the dialog.
The auto download will only be effective on the next launch of the application.

48 Document No: QP00033 Issue: H

 Scrîba 3 Software Programming Manual Issue H

3.15 Passwords
This menu item has two purposes, the first is to initially set up the password system,
and the second is to change password level once it has been set up. In previous
versions of the Scriba software, the password system has been designed for specific
users, however in the Scriba 3 software it is fully user configurable. This means that
any number of password levels can be set and the access privileges of each password
level can also be set.

3.15.1 Password Levels Setup Screen

This screen is used to access information about any password levels that have been
specified, from here it is also possible to add and remove password levels. To
activate the current password setup, make sure the Passwords Active box is checked
before clicking on OK. If the Add Password Level button is clicked, then a dialog
will appear asking for the new Password Level’s name, once entered, and the OK
button is clicked, the Edit Password Level screen will appear.

Figure 3.12 the Password Levels Setup Screen

3.15.2 Password Levels Edit Screen

The Password Level Edit Screen is used to set up access privileges for the password
level specified by the Password Level combo box. For a password level to have
access to one of the items in the list, the box next to that item must have a tick in it.
If the Default Password Level box is checked, then no password is needed for the
current password level, if this box is not checked however, then a password must be
entered in the Password edit box before this screen can be exited. Only one
password may be specified as the default password level, this will then be the
password level that the software starts up in.

49 Document No: QP00033 Issue: H

 Scrîba 3 Software Programming Manual Issue H

Figure 3.13 the Password Levels Edit Screen

A right mouse click in the main rights list, displays the pop-up menu as shown above
with the following options:
Select All: This checks all the options in the list box.
Deselect All: This unchecks all the options in the list box.
Invert Selection: This inverts the checked status of all the options in the list box.
Inherit from Previous: This copies the options from the previous password level if
one exists.

3.15.3 Edit Password Levels Dialog

Once passwords have been activated, then clicking on the Passwords menu item has
additional functionality. If the current password level has access to the password
system, then the following dialog will be displayed.

Figure 3.14 the Edit Levels Confirmation Dialog

If Yes is clicked, then the Password Levels Setup Screen will be displayed, if No is
clicked then the Select Password Level Dialog will be displayed. Note that if the
current user does not have access to the password setup system, then the Select
Password Level Dialog will be displayed instead of this screen.

50 Document No: QP00033 Issue: H

 Scrîba 3 Software Programming Manual Issue H
3.15.4 Select Password Level Dialog

This dialog is used to select the password level to switch to, and the password for
that level. If the password matches the password level selected then that password
level will be applied when the OK button is pressed.

Figure 3.15 the Password Entry Dialog

3.16 User Interface Customisation

This menu selection provides the ability for a basic customisation of the Scriba 3.
The following window appears from which the data blocks that are not required can
be disabled and made invisible to the user.

Figure 3.16 User Interface Customisation Window

By default all the data blocks are enabled. Uncheck the data blocks that are to be
disabled. Disabled data blocks appear as greyed out items in both the DataBlock
Add and Insert menus as well as the DataBlock toolbar. If the check box - Disabled
blocks are invisible - is checked, the disabled data blocks are removed from the
menu and toolbar.

51 Document No: QP00033 Issue: H

 Scrîba 3 Software Programming Manual Issue H

3.17 Linear On-The-Fly Setup Wizard

Selection of the Linear On-the-Fly Setup Wizard displays the following screen:

Figure 3.17 Linear On-The-Fly Setup Wizard

This allows an easy visual setup of the linear on-the-fly system for any orientation of
the laser to the conveyor system. The yellow arrows show the direction of
movement of the conveyor. All the properties set up here can also be changed in the
file preferences directly.
Three entities are set up here:
1. The pulses per metre which is calculated from the system attached to the laser.
2. The conveyor angle.
3. The marking angle.
The conveyor angle and the marking angle can be changed either by entering the
value required or by using the rotation controls to the right.

Figure 3.18 Linear On-The-Fly Setup Wizard

The above display shows a conveyor rotation of 135° and a mark rotation of zero.

52 Document No: QP00033 Issue: H

 Scrîba 3 Software Programming Manual Issue H

Figure 3.19 Linear On-The-Fly Setup Wizard

The above display shows a conveyor rotation of 135° and a mark rotation of 45°.

Also see sections 3.12.2.31, 3.12.2.34 and 3.12.2.36. These are the preferences
dealing with pulses per metre, marker angle (rotation) and conveyor angle (rotation)
respectively.

3.18 Print

The Print command prints the part file, data block by data block. This feature is
useful for documenting and troubleshooting part programs and software problems.
To use the Print command you must already have printer hardware and software
compatible with the computer installed and ensure that the printer paper is set-up in
portrait orientation. This command should not be selected if no printer is installed.

3.19 Printer Set-up

The Printer Setup command allows the currently set printer to be setup for printing.
The standard setup windows for the currently installed printer on the computer will
be displayed. This function should not be selected unless a printer has been
installed.

3.20 Exit

The Exit command closes the Scrîba software and reverts to the computer desktop.
If any of the current part programs have not been saved, a dialog box appears asking
if the file should be saved before exiting the software.

53 Document No: QP00033 Issue: H

 Scrîba 3 Software Programming Manual Issue H

3.21 Recent File Opening

A list of up to nine recently opened files is held at the bottom of the File menu.
Selecting any of these will open the file if it still exists in the same location as when
it was last saved. The first in the list will be the most recently saved file.

54 Document No: QP00033 Issue: H

 Scrîba 3 Software Programming Manual Issue H

4
Section 4: Edit Menu

In this section:

4.1 Cut, Copy and Paste

4.1.1 Data Blocks
4.1.2 Text Entry Area
4.2 Select All
4.3 Invert Selection
4.4 Re-apply all Fills
4.5 Change File Paths
4.6 Re-import File for Selected Blocks
4.7 Array Copy

55 Document No: QP00033 Issue: H

 Scrîba 3 Software Programming Manual Issue H

4.1 Cut, Copy and Paste

4.1.1 Data Blocks

The standard clipboard functions are available to cut, copy and paste one or more
data blocks. These functions are available from the Edit Menu and by use of the
standard shortcut keys. Select the data block or blocks using the shift and Ctrl keys
as required.
Any pasted blocks will be added to the end of the data block list.

Figure 4.1 Edit Menu

In addition to the standard paste which adds the copied data block to the end of the
data block list there are the functions Paste Before Selected and Paste After Selected
which respectively insert the copied data block immediately before or after that
block which is currently selected.

4.1.2 Text Entry Area

The text entry area now contains the ability to cut, copy and paste text to and from
the clipboard. This applies to all data blocks that use the text area.

Figure 4.2 Text Area – Right Mouse Click Menu

To use the cut and copy functions, some text must be selected within the text area.
To use one of the functions, either right click on the text area, and choose the
appropriate clipboard function from the menu (Figure 4.2) or use the shortcut keys
indicated by the menu (these are the standard Windows key combinations for cut,
copy and paste).

56 Document No: QP00033 Issue: H

 Scrîba 3 Software Programming Manual Issue H

4.2 Select All

Use this menu item to select all the data blocks in the current part file. This is useful
for applying global changes to the data blocks.

4.3 Invert Selection

This can be used to select, for example, all but data block. Select the one data block
and then select this menu item and then all but the originally selected data block are
selected. This is useful for applying global changes to the data blocks.

4.4 Re-apply all Fills

This item is to be used after converting Scriba 1 or Scriba 2 files (*.PRT) to Scriba 3
file format (*.BPT) using the File Converter that contain fills. This is required
because more information about the fills exists in the Scriba 3 part file than in the
older files. In actual fact the fill definitions are converted, but the fills themselves
are regenerated. This overwrites the original *.EFI and *.FNX files. These files are
not backward compatible.
For more information on the File Converter see Section 10.4.

4.5 Change File Paths

Selecting this item causes the Path Change dialog to appear (Figure 4.3). For this to
be operative one or more Logo or Picture data blocks must be selected. This is
useful if whole directories have moved or the part file and its imported files have
been moved to another PC where the directory structure is different.

Figure 4.3 Original and New Paths

The Original Path and New Path edit boxes will contain the location of the selected
data blocks’ associated graphic file (*.AI, *.DXF, *.PLT). Clicking on either of the
browse buttons will display the Directory Browser (Figure 4.4), from which an
alternative directory can be chosen, this will then be copied back into the respective
data block’s File Name edit box.

57 Document No: QP00033 Issue: H

 Scrîba 3 Software Programming Manual Issue H

Figure 4.4 Directory Browser

When the Ok button is clicked, any logo or picture data block in the current part file
that contains a graphic in the Original Path directory, will have the path changed to
the New Path directory.
For example if the part file had 3 data blocks, two logo blocks and a picture block,
all of which were looking for their associated graphic files in the C:\Images
directory, but if the files hade been moved to the C:\Images\New directory, then by
specifying the former directory in the Original Path edit, and the latter directory in
the New Path Edit, and clicking OK, the software will change the paths so that the
part file looks in the new directory and still be able to find the imported picture files.

4.6 Re-import File for Selected Blocks

This causes the bitmap or vector image associated with the selected block to be re-
imported. This means if it has been changed using an external application, the
software will update to display these changes.

4.7 Array Copy

This is used to copy one or more data blocks with X, Y or rotational offsets.
This function requests the setup of the array via the Array Copy Parameters dialog
(Figure 4.5) which allows copies in both the X and Y directions and in an angular
format to be created. Once the Ok button is clicked the software copies any selected
data blocks, using the number of copies and offsets entered into the Array Copy
Parameters Dialog.

Figure 4.5 Array Copy Parameters

58 Document No: QP00033 Issue: H

 Scrîba 3 Software Programming Manual Issue H

5
Section 5: View Menu

In this section:

5.1 View Menu

5.2 Laser Parameter Recipes
5.3 Full Screen Simulation
5.4 View Font

59 Document No: QP00033 Issue: H

 Scrîba 3 Software Programming Manual Issue H

5.1 View Menu

This menu item allows the enabling and disabling of all the windows and toolbars.

Figure 5.1 View Menu

If any of the Toolbar options or the DataBlock List Window or the Properties
Window or the Output Window or the Marks Counter Window is ticked, that item
will be displayed when the application is open.

If any of the Toolbar options or the DataBlock List Window or the Properties
Window or the Output Window or the Marks Counter Window is not ticked, that
item will be displayed when the application is open.

5.2 Laser Parameter Recipes

Selection of this item displays the Laser Parameter Recipe Setup dialog (Figure 5.2).

Figure 5.2 Laser Parameter Recipe Setup

60 Document No: QP00033 Issue: H

 Scrîba 3 Software Programming Manual Issue H

From the Laser Parameter Recipe Setup dialog it is possible to add and remove
recipes, import and export the recipe files, and alter existing recipes.

To add a laser parameter recipe click the Add button after which a name must be
provided. This is the name you will see in the list of recipes and in the Laser
Parameter Recipe toolbar drop down list. Set the parameter values as required and
then click the Apply button. This actually saves the parameters against the given
name.

To apply a recipe to the currently selected blocks, use the Fill Recipes drop down

selection box on the main toolbar (Figure 5.3) and click the button.

Figure 5.3 Fill Recipes Selection Toolbar

Applying a laser parameter recipe to a data block causes that data block’s Laser
Parameter Recipe property on the laser tab to change to reflect the recipe applied to
it. (Figure 5.4)

Figure 5.4 Laser Parameter Recipe

5.3 Full Screen Simulation

Selection of this item allows the Simulation Window to cover the full screen (ticked)
or not (un-ticked).

5.4 View Font

This allows the selection of a font for simulation purposes. When selected a
standard File Open dialog box will appear from which can be selected the font to use
for simulation. This is useful when no marker is connected for font downloading.

61 Document No: QP00033 Issue: H

 Scrîba 3 Software Programming Manual Issue H

6
Section 6: Data Block Menu
In this section:

6.1 Add
6.1.1 Logo Block
6.1.2 Text Line Block
6.1.3 Text Ring Block
6.1.4 3-DI Block
6.1.5 Bar Code Block
6.1.6 Data Matrix Block
6.1.7 RSS-14 Block
6.1.8 Picture Block
6.1.9 XYZ Axes Absolute Motion Control Block
6.1.10 XY Axes Increment Motion Control Block
6.1.11 Step XY Axes Motion Control Block
6.1.12 Rotary Movement Control Block
6.1.13 On-The-Fly Trigger
6.1.14 Step Rep Block
6.1.15 Step End Block
6.1.16 Direct Command Block
6.1.17 Comments Block
6.2 Insert
6.3 Data Block Toolbar
6.4 Delete
6.5 Rename
6.6 Grouping
6.6.1 Group
6.6.2 Ungroup
6.6.3 Dynamic Group Menu
6.6.4 Data Block Selection
6.7 Create Multiple

62 Document No: QP00033 Issue: H

 Scrîba 3 Software Programming Manual Issue H

Data Block Menu

The Data Block menu is used to select the type of data blocks within a part program
and to position those data blocks relative to the others within the part program
(Figure 6.1).

Figure 6.1 Data Block Menu

6.1 Add

The Add command is used to create and add a data block to the part program. The
new data block is added to the bottom of the data block list. When Add is selected a
sub menu appears allowing you to choose the type of data block to add to the part
program (Figure 6.2). This new data block is added after the last data block with the
next consecutive integer number irrespective of which data block is highlighted.
The new data block is updated with the properties from the previous data block if
Carry Forward is set to Previous, or from the currently selected data block if Carry
Forward is set to Selected Block in the Preferences Window. If no previous data
block exists a new data block is created starting at number one.

Figure 6.2 Data Block Add Sub-Menu

63 Document No: QP00033 Issue: H

 Scrîba 3 Software Programming Manual Issue H

6.1.1 Logo Block

This selection adds a Logo to the current part file. A Logo is a vector image usually
imported as a PLT, AI or DXF file from a third party drawing package (see Section
14 - Vector Graphics Programming).

6.1.2 Text Line Block

This selection adds a Text Line to the current part file (see section 12 Text
Programming).

6.1.3 Text Ring Block

This selection adds a Text Ring to the current part file (see Section 12 Text
Programming). This allows the text to be of circular form.

6.1.4 3-DI Block

This selection adds a 3-DI block to the current part file. This is a circular 2D
barcode.

6.1.5 Bar Code Block

This selection adds a bar code to the current part file. A number of different types
are available (see Section 17 – 1D and 2D Codes Programming).

6.1.6 Data Matrix Block

This selection adds a Data Matrix to the current part file. This is a type of 2D
barcode.

6.1.7 RSS-14 Block

This selection adds an RSS-14 data block to the current part file. This is a type of
2D barcode. It is a mix of a one dimensional bar code and a Micro PDF417.

6.1.8 Picture Block

This selection adds a picture data block to the current part file. A picture is a raster
scan image usually imported as a TIFF, JPEG or BMP file from a third party
graphics package.

6.1.9 XYZ Axes Absolute Motion Control Block

This selection adds an absolute motion control data block for any or all of the X, Y
and Z axes to the current part file.

6.1.10 XY Axes Increment Motion Control Block

This selection adds an incremental motion control data block for either the X or Y
axes or both to the current part file.
64 Document No: QP00033 Issue: H
 Scrîba 3 Software Programming Manual Issue H
6.1.11 Step XY Axes Motion Control Block

This selection adds a step and repeat (X and Y) motion control data block to the
current part file. Note that no STEP END data block is required for motion step and
repeat.

6.1.12 Rotary Movement Control Block

This selection adds a rotary movement control data block to the current part file.

6.1.13 On-The-Fly Trigger

This selection adds an on-the-fly trigger block to the current part file. See section 24
for on-the-fly marking and setup.

6.1.14 Step Rep Block

This selection adds a step and repeat data block to the current part file. The data
blocks between the Step Rep and the Step End commands will be repeated the
specified number of times.

6.1.15 Step End Block

This selection adds a step and repeat end data block to the current part file. For
every Step Rep command there must be a corresponding Step End command.

6.1.16 Direct Command Block

This selection adds a Direct command data block to the current part file. This is
used for a series of direct commands to the marker for more advance functionality.

6.1.17 Comments Block

This selection adds a Comments data block to the current part file. This allows user
comments to be added to the part file without affecting anything within the part file.
These comment blocks consist of just a text area, they do not cause any change in
the simulation or sending of the part file.

65 Document No: QP00033 Issue: H

 Scrîba 3 Software Programming Manual Issue H

6.2 Insert

This selection is identical to the Add menu item selection except that the new data
block is inserted immediately before the currently selected data block (in the Data
Block list).

Figure 6.3 Data Block Insert Sub-Menu

66 Document No: QP00033 Issue: H

 Scrîba 3 Software Programming Manual Issue H

6.3 Data Block Toolbar

Drag and drop tool

Zoom tool
Add Logo Block

Add Text Line Block

Add Text Ring Block

Add 3DI Block

Add Bar Code Block

Add Data Matrix Block

Add RSS14 Code Block

Add Picture Block

Add Motion – Absolute Move Block

Add Motion – Relative Move Block
Add Motion – Step XY Block

Add Step and Repeat Block

Add Step End Block

Add Direct Command Block

Add Comments Block

Add Rotary Move

Figure 6.4 Data Block Toolbar

Each type of data block can also be added from the toolbar situated to the left of the main
window. Selected the required Data Block button and then in the Simulation Window click
the left mouse button and drag the rubber band box to the required size and release the left
mouse button. This box when released will be the outline size of the added data block.

Selecting the Drag and Drop tool will then allow you to select any data block in the
Simulation Window and drag it to the exact place required.

67 Document No: QP00033 Issue: H

 Scrîba 3 Software Programming Manual Issue H

Figure 6.5 Selected Data Block

Figure 6.5.1 shows a data block that has been placed in the Simulation window and the
Drag and Drop toll selected. In this mode when you run the mouse over the data block a
popup appears giving the name of the data block and its X and Y position. The cursor in
this mode will be a hand symbol. Holding down the left mouse button will allow you to
drag this data block to anywhere within the Simulation Window. The X and Y positions
will change accordingly.

6.4 Delete
The Delete command deletes the highlighted data block and advances to the next
block of the part program. If the last data block of the program is deleted, the
previous data block is highlighted.

6.5 Rename
The Rename command opens a dialog window, which allows the changing of the
name of the selected data block.

Figure 6.6 Change Data Block Name

6.6 Grouping
The Grouping menu selection allows the grouping and ungrouping of selected data
blocks.

Grouping 6.7 Grouping

68 Document No: QP00033 Issue: H

 Scrîba 3 Software Programming Manual Issue H

The grouping menu can be accessed by selecting the DataBlock menu, then
Grouping. (Figure 6.7)

6.6.1 Group

When group is selected from the grouping menu (or Ctrl+G is pressed), then all
currently selected data blocks in the simulation window will be grouped. This will
result in the blocks being assigned a group number, which will be displayed at the
bottom right of each data block in the group (Figure 6.8).

Figure 6.8 Grouping

When a block in a group is selected, all other data blocks in the group will also be
selected (see section 6.6.5 for more information). If data blocks from more than one
group are selected when the group command is used, then all selected blocks will be
reassigned to the lowest available group number.
NOTE: There are a maximum number of eight (8) groups available for use.

6.6.2 Ungroup

To use the ungroup menu item, one or more data blocks that are part of a group must
be selected. When this command is executed, all selected data blocks will cease to
be a member of any group. If no more data blocks are resident within a group, then
that group will be deleted.

6.6.3 Dynamic Group Menu

Figure 6.9 Dynamic Grouping

69 Document No: QP00033 Issue: H

 Scrîba 3 Software Programming Manual Issue H

This menu displays a list of all currently valid groups (Figure 6.9). Groups can be
selected from this menu by clicking on them. Any newly created groups will be
added to this list, and any groups that no longer contain any data blocks will be
removed from the list.

6.6.4 Data Block Selection

To select data blocks, the software must be in drag and drop mode.
To select a single data block, click on it in the simulate window.
To select multiple data blocks, drag a bounding rectangle to completely encompass
all data blocks that are to be selected. (For more information on how to drag a
bounding box see section 2.5)
To select a group, either click on a single data block in the group on the simulate
window, or select it from the dynamic group menu (Section 6.6.3)
To select a single data block that is part of a group, hold the Ctrl key and click on the
data block in the simulate window.
To add a data block to an already created group, hold the Ctrl key and click on the
data block in the simulate window then select Group from the Grouping menu.
To exclude a data block from a group that is currently selected, hold the Ctrl key and
click on that data block in the simulate window.
To select a data block that is obscured by other larger data blocks, hold the Ctrl key
and click on that data block. The selection will cycle round all the data blocks on
each mouse click. When the required data block is selected move as required.

6.7 Create Multiple

When this menu item is ticked this allows the repeated creation of data blocks from
the Data Block Toolbar in the simulation window every time the left mouse button is
clicked and released. When it is not ticked only one data block will be created in the
simulation window and the Data Block Toolbar reverts to the Drag and Drop Tool.

70 Document No: QP00033 Issue: H

 Scrîba 3 Software Programming Manual Issue H

7
Section 7: Marker Menu

In this section:
7.1 Marker Info
7.2 Loaded Programs
7.3 Loaded Fonts
7.4 Loaded Variable Text Fields
7.5 DSP Parameters
7.5.1 Quality Settings Editor
7.5.1.1 The File Menu
7.5.2 Send Quality Settings
7.6 System Rollback
7.7 Erase Programs
7.8 Erase Fonts
7.9 Execute
7.9.1 Mark Time
7.9.2 Rate Adjust
7.9.3 Repeat
7.9.4 Start Mark
7.9.5 Stop Mark
7.9.6 Ignore Machine Status
7.9.7 Close
7.10 Lens Setup
7.10.1 Adding a Lens
7.10.1.1 Adding Lens Set-up Data
7.10.2 Removing a Lens
7.10.3 Editing a lens Working Distance and Field Diameter
7.10.4 Restore Default Lens Setups
7.10.5 Saving Lens Changes
7.10.6 Read Marker
7.10.7 Update Marker
7.10.8 Trapezoid Compensation (non-DSP markers)
7.10.9 Trapezoid Compensation (DSP markers)
7.10.10 Alternative DSP Trapezoid Setup
7.10.11 Advanced Set-up
7.10.12 Duo Machine
7.10.12.1 Head 2 X and Y Displacement
7.10.12.2 Head Separation
7.10.13 Trapezoid Test Programs Setup
7.11 Mirror Mode
7.12 Measure Power
7.12.1 Measure
7.12.2 Compare
7.12.3 Change
7.12.4 Reset
7.13 Motion Control
7.13.1 Rotary Setup

71 Document No: QP00033 Issue: H

 Scrîba 3 Software Programming Manual Issue H
7.13.1.1 Steps per Revolution
7.13.1.2 Maximum Velocity
7.13.1.3 Acceleration Time
7.13.1.4 Pause Time
7.13.1.5 Anti-backlash Count
7.13.1.6 Enable Motion
7.13.1.7 Reverse Motor Direction
7.13.1.8 Drive IM483 Step/Direction Format
7.13.1.9 Use Calibrate Switch and Calibrate
7.13.2 X and Y Axes Setup
7.13.2.1 Steps per mm (inch)
7.13.2.2 Maximum Velocity
7.13.2.3 Acceleration Time
7.13.2.4 Pause Time
7.13.2.5 Maximum Axis Travel
7.13.2.6 Calibrate Position Offset
7.13.2.7 Reverse calibration direction
7.13.2.8 Reverse motor direction and limit switches
7.13.2.9 Reverse limit switches
7.13.3 Y Axis Setup
7.13.4 Z Axis Setup
7.13.5 Loading Motion Parameters
7.13.6 Saving Motion Parameters
7.13.7 Disable All
7.13.8 Send All
7.13.9 Close
7.14 Calibrate All Axes
7.15 Pump Source Hours

72 Document No: QP00033 Issue: H

 Scrîba 3 Software Programming Manual Issue H

Marker Menu
The Marker menu is used to set and monitor system default selections and to execute
and erase part programs and fonts using the host computer (Figure 7.1).

Figure 7.1 Marker Menu

7.1 Marker Info

Selecting the Marker Info command displays some configuration information about
the marker connected.

The Marker Version describes the type of machine that is connected including which
galvanometers are fitted and whether it is a Duo machine or not.

The ROM version is the firmware version of the CPU board’s firmware.
Additionally for a marker fitted with DSP galvanometers the DSP eprom version is
displayed.

Various other memory configurations are shown together with the open
communications channel, the available Data Matrix version(s) and the USB eprom
program version.

73 Document No: QP00033 Issue: H

 Scrîba 3 Software Programming Manual Issue H

.
Figure 7.2 Marker Configuration Window

7.2 Loaded Programs

Selecting the Loaded Programs option displays the programs that have been
downloaded to the marker (Figure 7.3). This is only available with firmware G8D
series or later.

Figure 7.3 Loaded Programs Display

This display lists all the downloaded programs with the number of bytes of storage
used in the marker.

To delete a program check the checkbox next to it and press the Delete button.
Alternatively to select all programs press the Select All button.

74 Document No: QP00033 Issue: H

 Scrîba 3 Software Programming Manual Issue H

7.3 Loaded Fonts

Selecting the Loaded Fonts option displays the fonts that have been downloaded to
the marker (Figure 7.4). This is only available with firmware G4N series or later.

Figure 7.4 Loaded Fonts Display

This display lists all the fonts currently resident in the marker together with the
number of bytes of storage used. This includes the embedded fonts Font1 and
Font2. Where a font has a name this is shown. There is the ability to have up to 20
fonts resident (this was increased from 10 with firmware G7T series). Where there
is no font resident the position is shown as empty.

To delete a font check the checkbox next to it and press the Delete button.
Alternatively to select all fonts press the Select All button. Note that this will not
select the embedded fonts 1 and 2 in the list.

For each font it is possible to view the characters that are available within that font.
This is done by clicking the right mouse button on the required font. A further
window is displayed showing the characters available (Figure 7.5).

Figure 7.5 Font Details of Selected Font

75 Document No: QP00033 Issue: H

 Scrîba 3 Software Programming Manual Issue H

7.4 Loaded Variable Text Fields

Selecting the Loaded Variable Text Fields option displays the contents of the
variable text fields that are occupied (Figure 7.6). This is only available with
firmware G8E series or later.

Figure 7.6 Loaded Variable Text Fields

This display lists the contents of the variable text fields in use. It also shows the
contents of the serial number buffer in the bottom window. Note that this buffer
data is for information only and cannot be changed here.

To delete the contents of all the variable text fields press the Delete All Fields
button.
To update the variable text for a field Right Click that field. The Update Text
window (Figure 7.7) is displayed. Enter the new text and press the Update button.

Figure 7.7 Variable Text Field Update

76 Document No: QP00033 Issue: H

 Scrîba 3 Software Programming Manual Issue H

7.5 DSP Parameters

If a DSP machine is connected its set-up parameters can be displayed, a shown in

Figure 7.8.

Figure 7.8 DSP Parameters

If a duo marker is connected then there will be an additional option for Head 2.
Clicking on either of these options will display the Direct parameter entry screen
shown in Figure 7.9.

77 Document No: QP00033 Issue: H

 Scrîba 3 Software Programming Manual Issue H

Figure 7.9 Head 1 DSP Parameters

Using this screen it is possible to read the current DSP settings and to directly alter
them.
The first column is the DSP parameter number.
The second column is the name of the parameter.
The third and fourth columns are the minimum and maximum values allowed for
that parameter.
The fifth column is the current value of the parameter read back from the marker.
The sixth column is the last value sent to the marker (This was also saved at the
same time).
The last column is the value that will be sent to the marker when the Update Marker
and Save button is clicked. When the window is initially displayed these values will
be those read back from the marker.

The Quality Settings track bar is used to adjust the marking quality between the most
accurate and the fastest. This is achieved by dragging and dropping the track bar
slider to one of the five different mark quality settings and then clicking the Send
Quality Settings button. The New Value edit boxes of Param 18 (Slew Speed), 19
(Peak Current) and 202 (Slew Error) are altered by the corresponding predefined
values. The Post Slew Delay is also altered, but as it is not a DSP parameter, the
change is not shown on this screen.

78 Document No: QP00033 Issue: H

 Scrîba 3 Software Programming Manual Issue H
When the Copy Read Back Values button is clicked the Read Back column of values
are placed into the New Value column. The Update Marker and Save button must
still be clicked to send these values to the marker (they will be saved at the same
time).

When the Copy Saved Values button is clicked the Last Saved column of values are
placed into the New Value column. The Update Marker and Save button must still
be clicked to send these values to the marker (they will be saved at the same time).

Clicking the Refresh Read Back Values button reads the DSP parameters again and
refreshes the display.

Clicking the Close button exits the window.

Note that there is no minimum and maximum checking in the software. This
checking and limiting is done in the marker itself

NOTE
Param 0 is the same as X Compensation, Param 1 is the same as Y Compensation
and Param 3 is the same as XY Angle Comp. Changing any of these three
parameters will therefore alter the corresponding compensation values in the lens
set-up dialog and vice versa.

7.5.1 Quality Settings Editor

The Quality Settings Editor is an application used to edit the DSP parameters set
when the quality settings slider bar is used. It is an advanced feature and should
only be used if confident in the use of both the quality slider, and the DSP
parameters. Click the Run Quality Settings Editor button to launch the Quality
Settings Editor. Note that the Quality Settings Editor is a separate application from
the main Scriba 3 software, and the new settings will not be applied to the main
application until the editor has been closed and the Send Quality Settings button has
been clicked. While the editor is active, Scriba is disabled.

7.5.1.1 The File Menu

The File Menu contains three options: Open, Save and Exit. The Exit option will
quit the application and apply any changes that have been made, the open option
allows a quality settings data file to be opened and the save option allows an opened
quality settings file to be saved.

Figure 7.10 shows the Quality Settings editor as it looks when it is first run with the
parameters table empty.

79 Document No: QP00033 Issue: H

 Scrîba 3 Software Programming Manual Issue H

Figure 7.10 Quality Settings Editor

To begin editing a quality settings file, use the open option in the file menu and
select a quality settings file. There will be one quality settings file for each type of
galvanometer currently available. These files reside in the directory where Scriba
was installed.

Once a file has been opened, the parameters table will be filled with the information
from that file (Figure 7.11).

Figure 7.11 Quality Settings Editor

The values in the table can be edited by double clicking the appropriate box and
entering the new value. If a mistake is made then the appropriate load defaults
button can be clicked to return all values to their factory defaults.

Once all changes have been made, then the save option in the file menu can be used
to replace the quality settings file that was originally imported.

80 Document No: QP00033 Issue: H

 Scrîba 3 Software Programming Manual Issue H
The slider bar on this screen can be used to highlight the setting to which the table
position refers.

7.5.2 Send Quality Settings

Clicking this button sends the currently set settings to the marker.

7.6 System Rollback

Selecting this option displays the System Rollback window (Figure 7.12). This
provides the capability to roll back to a previous set of system settings. This option
is only be available if a marker is currently connected.

Figure 7.12 System Rollback Window

To roll back the system settings, select the appropriate DSP profile from the Profile
drop down list. A list of backups with their respective dates and times are now
displayed in the Backups list box. Selecting one of these backups, displays the saved
DSP values in the Values grid.

To send the selected backup file of DSP Parameters to the marker, click the Send
DSP Parameters button.

To send the last sent lens settings, click the Send Lens Amp button.

To send the last sent motion control settings, click the Send Motion Settings button.

The Send All button will send the DSP Parameters, Lens Settings and Motion
Settings to the marker.

81 Document No: QP00033 Issue: H

 Scrîba 3 Software Programming Manual Issue H

7.7 Erase Programs

Figure 7.12 Erase Programs Selection

Two options are available here; Erase All Programs and Erase Selected Programs.
Selection of Erase All Programs option is used to erase all downloaded part
programs from the marker. When this command is selected a dialog box appears on
the screen to ensure that all the programs are not accidentally erased (Figure 7.13).

Figure 7.13 Erase Programs Window

Selection of Erase Selected Programs option displays the same window as shown in
Figure 7.3 from where the required programs can be selected and deleted.

82 Document No: QP00033 Issue: H

 Scrîba 3 Software Programming Manual Issue H

7.8 Erase Fonts

Figure 7.14 Erase Fonts Selection

Two options are available here; Erase All Fonts and Erase Selected Fonts. The
Erase Fonts option will erase all the downloaded fonts from the marker. Only fonts
1 and 2 will remain resident. When this command is selected a dialog box appears
on the screen to ensure that all the fonts are not accidentally erased (Figure 7.15).

Figure 7.15 Erase Fonts Window

Selection of Erase Selected Fonts option displays the same window as shown in
Figure 7.4 from where the required fonts can be selected and deleted.

83 Document No: QP00033 Issue: H

 Scrîba 3 Software Programming Manual Issue H

7.9 Execute

The Execute command allows modification of some program parameters without the
need to download the part program again and allows execution of the part program
without pressing the Start button on the operator control panel. The Execute window
also displays the mark time in seconds when the Start Mark button is pressed.

Figure 7.16 Execute Window

When the Execute command is selected, a window appears on the screen containing
the parameters which are available for modification (Figure 7.16). After the
parameters are modified, the Start Mark button in the window must be pressed in
order for the parameters to be effective. The part program is executed immediately
when the Start Mark button is pressed (assuming the laser is on and the shutter is
enabled). When the Close button is pressed after the program has been executed, the
values in the Execute window are retained in the application until changed. In the
case of a long duration mark this can be terminated by pressing the Stop Mark button.

7.9.1 Mark Time

The Mark Time is displayed in the Execute window when the Start Mark button is
pressed. As the mark is performed the display shows the second count in green.
(Colours will depend on how Windows is set up on your computer).

Figure 7.17 Execute Window

84 Document No: QP00033 Issue: H

 Scrîba 3 Software Programming Manual Issue H
Note that the timer is only accurate to ± 0.66 seconds, so for very fast marks it is
better to use the Repeat command in the Execute window and then divide the mark
time by the number of repeats plus the initial mark (See Section 4.4.3).

7.9.2 Rate Adjust

The Rate Adjust parameter adjusts the marking rate in each data block of the part
program by the specified percentage.

7.9.3 Repeat

The Repeat parameter repeats the entire part program the specified number of times
with no offsets. The Repeat value represents the number of repeats not including the
initial mark. i.e. A Repeat value of 9 will result in 10 marks.

7.9.4 Start Mark

The Start Mark button sends the modified information to the marker and executes
the part program with the new parameters.

7.9.5 Stop Mark

The Stop Mark button terminates the current execution of the part program if the
program was started using the Start Mark button. This button will not terminate the
program if the program was started by pressing the Start button on the control
console.

7.9.6 Ignore Machine Status

It is occasionally useful to determine mark times without doing the actual mark.
This can be achieved by checking the Ignore Machine Status check box. This allows
the marker to run without checking that the lamp is on and the shutter is open. If left
unchecked the marker must be in a position ready to mark otherwise no mark will be
executed.

7.9.7 Close

The Close button closes the Execute window. If the part program has been marked
using the modified information, the new parameters are retained after quitting the
window for the duration of the application or until changed.

85 Document No: QP00033 Issue: H

 Scrîba 3 Software Programming Manual Issue H

7.10 Lens Setup

Figure 7.18 Lens Setup Menu Item Selection

The Lens Setup menu item provides two further selections: Lens Setup which is
described below and Trapezoid Test Programs Setup which is described in Section
7.10.11.

The Lens Setup Window is used to enter the F-Theta objective (scan lens)
compensation values (Figure 7.11). These values should NOT be altered unless
instructed by Electrox trained personnel.
If a different focal length F-Theta objective is used then the relevant lens name should
be chosen from the Lens Name window. This will automatically change the lens
compensation values to the correct settings for that lens. The Update Marker button
must then be pressed for the parameters to take effect.
The working distance value is for reference only and has no effect on the lens
compensation. The field diameter value is also for reference and is used to calculate
the marking area of the Simulation Window.

The main lens settings are Lens Amp, X Compensation, Y Compensation, XY Angle
Compensation and Rotation.

The Lens Amp defines the amplitude of the mark.

The X Compensation and the Y compensation define the corrections required to compensate
for pincushion and barrel distortion in the corresponding axes.

The XY Angle Compensation defines the correction required to compensate for shear
distortion (also known as parallelograming or lozenging).

The rotation allows the whole marking field to be rotated by a maximum of 5

degrees. This is used primarily for field alignment on the Scrîba Duo laser to
compensate for any mechanical tolerances between the two heads.

For a Duo machine the Head 2 part of the Lens Set-up Window becomes available
when the Double head selection is made within the File Preferences. The procedures
for head 2 are identical to head 1. Additional parameters also become available for
Head 2 and these are described in Section 7.6.10 Duo Machine.

Note that the button Advanced Set-up is only available when a DSP machine is
connected.

86 Document No: QP00033 Issue: H

 Scrîba 3 Software Programming Manual Issue H

Figure 7.19 Lens Setup

7.10.1 Adding a Lens

Figure 7.20 Adding a Lens

87 Document No: QP00033 Issue: H

 Scrîba 3 Software Programming Manual Issue H
7.10.1.1 Adding Lens Set-up Data

To add a lens set-up click on the Lens Set-ups combo box and select <Add> Lens
Set-up… at the bottom of the list.
This opens the New Lens Setup dialog box as shown in Figure 7.21.

Figure 7.21 New Lens Setup

Enter the new lens name, its working distance and field diameter. The field diameter
must be entered or the simulation screen will not show the correct marking area.
This new information of new lens is saved into the Marker.ini file when the OK
button is pressed and its name is added in the Lens Set-ups Combo Box.
Clicking the Cancel button cancels this operation without change.

7.10.2 Removing a Lens

First select from the Lens Set-ups combo box the required lens set-up to remove.
Then click the Remove Lens Set-ups button, just to the right of Lens Set-ups Combo
Box.
A warning message box appears as shown in Figure 7.22.
If the Yes button is pressed, the current lens will be removed, otherwise the
operation is cancelled.

Figure 7.22 Removing a Lens Warning Message

The Removed Lens Set-up button only works when there are more than one lens set-
up in the Lens Set-ups Combo Box.

88 Document No: QP00033 Issue: H

 Scrîba 3 Software Programming Manual Issue H

7.10.3 Editing a lens Working Distance and Field Diameter

If the working distance or the field diameter of a lens needs to be changed then this
can be accomplished by pressing the Edit button to the right of these fields.

Figure 7.23 Editing Lens Information

Pressing the Edit button displays the following edit dialog:

Figure 7.24 Lens Information Edit Dialog

In most cases these values do not need to be changed but if on-the-fly marking is
required then the field diameter must be correct.

7.10.4 Restore Default Lens Setups

Clicking the Restore Default button restores all the factory default lens set-ups to
Scriba 3. All customer lens set-ups will be discarded by this operation.
A warning message appears as shown in Figure 7.23. If the Yes button is pressed,
the restoration is implemented, otherwise the operation is cancelled.

Figure 7.25 Restoring Lens Defaults Warning Message

There are six factory preset lens set-ups; they are R100, R160, R254, S163, S254
and S410.

89 Document No: QP00033 Issue: H

 Scrîba 3 Software Programming Manual Issue H

7.10.5 Saving Lens Changes

To save the currently displayed set of lens parameters into the currently displayed
Lens Set-up, click on the Save Changes button.

7.10.6 Read Marker

This button only becomes available when there is a marker connected.

Clicking this button reads the relevant lens set-up data from the marker if it is
connected and displays these values.

7.10.7 Update Marker

Clicking this button sends the lens set-up data to the marker. A message box
appears asking if the current DSP profile is to be changed. If Yes is clicked, then the
Choose DSP Profile screen is displayed, from which an existing DSP profile may be
created, or an existing one chosen from a list. This also sends the trapezoid data and
if the connected marker is a DSP machine then the DSP parameters will also be sent.
For more detailed information about DSP profiles see Section 23 – Laser Marker
Profiles.

7.10.8 Trapezoid Compensation (non-DSP markers)

Trapezoid compensation is only available when connected to a marker.

Click the Trapezoid button opens the trapezoidal Lens Compensation window as
shown in Figure 7.26. This window is used to correct errors caused when the work-
piece is tilted at an angle relative to the laser head.

Figure 7.26 Trapezoidal Compensation Window

90 Document No: QP00033 Issue: H

 Scrîba 3 Software Programming Manual Issue H
When the Mark Reference button is pressed the marker will mark a 60 mm X 60 mm
square on the work-piece, assuming the shutter is open and the laser is set at a
sufficient power level (Figure 7.25). The dimensions specified on the mark should
then be measured and entered into the relevant boxes in the window. This must be
carried out as accurately as possible to ensure high quality marking. It is
recommended that you use Vernier Callipers to measure these dimensions.

Clicking the Update Marker button downloads the new entered values to the marker.
The Mark Reference button should then be pressed again and the resultant mark
measured to check the mark dimensions are now correct.

If the resultant mark is not correct then you must reset to the default settings and
update the marker again. If this is not done errors will occur in subsequent marking.

A E B

O
H F

D G C
Figure 7.27 Trapezoid Reference Mark

7.10.9 Trapezoid Compensation (DSP markers)

When the Trapezoid button is clicked in the lens set-up dialog, and a DSP machine
is connected to the computer, the following warning message will be displayed.

Figure 7.28 Trapezoid Files Marking Warning Message

91 Document No: QP00033 Issue: H

 Scrîba 3 Software Programming Manual Issue H

Before clicking the Yes button it is important to have followed all of the procedures
in this window. If No is clicked at this point, then the DSP Trapezoid set-up
procedure is cancelled.

Ensure that the laser is on

Ensure that the shutter is enabled
Lens amp value must already have been set up
X comp and Y comp must already have been set up
X and Y straightness must have been set using offset potentiometers

WARNING! The laser will mark when Yes is clicked.

If Yes is clicked then the marker will initiate a test mark. Once this mark is finished,
the following screen is displayed.

Figure 7.29 Entry of Mark Measurements – Test1

The respective lengths on the marked image should be measured, and their values
entered into the appropriate edit box. The Repeat mark button will repeat the test

92 Document No: QP00033 Issue: H

 Scrîba 3 Software Programming Manual Issue H
mark if necessary. If Cancel is clicked at this point then the user will be prompted to
confirm cancelling the DSP Trapezoid set-up procedure.
When OK is clicked, a second mark will be performed and the following screen is
displayed (Figure 7.30):

Figure 7.30 Entry of Mark Measurements – Test2

The appropriate values should be measured and entered in the same way as in the
previous screen. If Cancel is clicked at this point then the user will be prompted to
confirm cancelling the DSP Trapezoid set-up procedure.

If OK is clicked then a mark will be performed and the following screen is

displayed:

Figure 7.31 Completion of Trapezoid Marks

At this point, clicking No will result in the DSP trapezoid set-up for the current head
being repeated.
Clicking Yes will confirm that the DSP Trapezoid set-up for this head has been
completed successfully.

93 Document No: QP00033 Issue: H

 Scrîba 3 Software Programming Manual Issue H

7.10.10 Alternative DSP Trapezoid Setup

This is an alternative user interface for trapezoid setup for DSP lasers. The same
procedures need to executed but this interface allows a little more freedom to the
user in the sequencing of these.

Once clicked, a warning will be displayed detailing the steps that should be taken
prior to a trapezoid setup taking place.

Figure 7.32 Trapezoid Setup Warning

Once Yes has been clicked, the alternative DSP trapezoid interface is displayed.

Figure 7.33 Trapezoid Setup

The trapezoid setup procedure from this screen is as follows:

1.) Click the Do Mark 1 button. (Note that whenever a Do Mark button is clicked,
then a warning will be displayed prior to marking - Figure 7.34)
2.) Enter the measured values into the Mark 1 Values section of the screen.
3.) Click the Update Mark 1 button to update the appropriate DSP parameters.
4.) Click the Do Mark 2 button.
5.) Enter the measured values into the Mark 2 Values section of the screen.
6.) Click the Update Mark 2 button to update the appropriate DSP parameters.

Figure 7.34 Laser Will Start Marking Warning

94 Document No: QP00033 Issue: H

 Scrîba 3 Software Programming Manual Issue H
Values that are entered into the Mark 1 Values and Mark 2 Values sections will be
retained until altered, even across different sessions of the software.

7.10.11 Advanced Set-up

The Advanced Set-up is only available when connected to a DSP marker.

Clicking the Advanced set-up button displays the following screen (Figure 7.35).
This is used for fine manipulation once the main trapezoid set-up has been
completed.

Figure 7.35 Advanced Field Distortion Manipulation

The buttons surrounding the grid are used to select how you wish to affect the
marking area; the images next to the buttons indicate the effect. To change one of
these values, the appropriate button is clicked and the value in the edit box altered.
When the “send xx parameter” button is clicked a number of the DSP parameters are
altered according to internal calculations based on the effect required, and then sent
to the marker. Param 3 may be changed in a number of these calculations and is
therefore reflected in the value of XY Angle Compensation in the standard lens set-
up dialog.
The X and Y parameters allow fine manipulation of the effect shown in the adjacent
pictures. They allow correction of the straightness of the centre axis, which would
otherwise require adjustment of the X and Y offset potentiometers on the DSP galvo
board.
The actual zero position remains static. The X compensation and Y compensation
values must have already been set.
The L and R buttons manipulate Param 10 (X Amp) and the T and B buttons
manipulate Param 11(Y Amp). They allow correction of the X and Y amplitude
which would otherwise require adjustment of the X and Y gain potentiometers on
the DSP Galvo board.

95 Document No: QP00033 Issue: H

 Scrîba 3 Software Programming Manual Issue H
It is important to note that the galvanometer axes shown in this window correspond
to normal mirror mode
The additional parameters, X and Y, work in the same way.
To finish altering parameters, click the Close button.

7.10.12 Duo Machine

This section is only relevant to the Duo marker. The two heads are referred to as
Head 1 (Master) and Head 2 (Slave). As each head has an individual scan lens, two
sets of lens set-up parameters are required. The head 2 lens set-up is available when
the Double head selection has been made in the File Preferences otherwise they are
greyed out.

Figure 7.36 Duo Heads Lens Set-up Window

7.10.12.1 Head 2 X and Y Displacement

To obtain the correct spacing and alignment of the marks between Head 1 and Head
2 it may be necessary to move the origin position of head 2 relative to head 1. This is
done by supplying an X and Y displacement.
They are entered into the relevant boxes of the Head 2 lens set-up window and are
downloaded to the marker by clicking the Update Marker button. These parameters
are then stored in the marker memory and are active for each part program marked.
These displacements do not affect the simulation, only the mark.

It is possible to use immediate X and Y displacements which are only active during
the relevant part programs. This is useful if you are marking a number of different

96 Document No: QP00033 Issue: H

 Scrîba 3 Software Programming Manual Issue H
part programs which require different displacement values. Refer to Section 19.4 on
Commands for more information.

7.10.12.2 Head Separation

The Head Separation window allows you to enter the physical distance between the
centres of head 1 and head 2. The range is 125 mm to 225 mm in 25 mm
increments. This value is used for simulation purposes only and has no effect on the
mark.

7.10.13 Trapezoid Test Programs Setup

This allows the association of the test files to be used in the trapezoid lens correction
procedure. This must be setup before any trapezoid work is done. This displays the
DSP Trapezoid Test Programs Setup dialog shown below.

Figure 7.37 Trapezoid Test Programs Setup Dialog

This dialog displays a list of all lenses in the left hand portion of the window.
Selecting one of these lenses will change the text box to display the current file
name of the associated test program number 1, in this case TEST1_254.elc. To
change the filename simply change the text in this edit box. This file name will then
apply to both test programs, such that test program 1 will become TEST1_254.elc
and test program 2 will be TEST2_254.elc. This procedure needs to be accomplished
prior to execution of any trapezoid compensation procedure.

Note that for the lenses to appear in the list in the left hand side this dialog, the lens
must have been added to the lens list from within the Lens Setup dialog.

97 Document No: QP00033 Issue: H

 Scrîba 3 Software Programming Manual Issue H

7.11 Mirror Mode

The Mirror Mode command is used to set the orientation of the mark in the X and Y
axis. The preview of the mark on the Simulation Window remains unchanged. For a
single headed marker the standard setting is X+Y+ (NORM) and for a double headed
marker it is SX+Y-. Select the mirror mode required from the set of radio buttons on
the left. For each selection the picture on the right will give a visual representation of
mark orientation. Click the Set button to send the new Mirror Mode to the marker.
For more information on Mirror Mode refer to the Marker System Manual.

When this window is opened the marker, if connected, is interrogated to determine

which mirror mode it is in.

Figure 7.38 Mirror Mode Window

For the Application Preference Mirror Mode Correction to be acted upon the mirror
mode must be set from here and not just on the control console.

98 Document No: QP00033 Issue: H

 Scrîba 3 Software Programming Manual Issue H

7.12 Measure Power

The Measure Power command is used to check the ageing of the marker flash lamp
over the operating lifetime (Scriba markers only). Each time a measurement is taken
a log file is created together with a graph showing the output power versus the current
demand. As the lamp ages the current demand can be adjusted accordingly to
maintain a consistent mark quality. The Measure Power window contains five buttons
and a blank graph screen as shown below:

Figure7.39 Measure Power Window

7.12.1 Measure

Clicking on the Measure button will initiate the measure power function assuming
that the marker is on and the shutter is enabled. A dialogue box will appear to
remind you.

It is extremely important that a suitable beam dump (a piece of metal) is positioned

in the centre of the marking field and away from the focus position to dissipate the
laser beam. If the laser is not in a Class 1 enclosure then suitable eye protection
must be worn.

The complete power measurement procedure takes 3.5 minutes. As the power
measurements are taken the bar at the bottom of the screen fills up. If Sound is
turned on in the Preferences window (Section 3), the computer will also give an
audible beep as a reminder that power measurements are being taken. When the
measurements are complete a graph is generated and plotted in red on the graph
screen.

99 Document No: QP00033 Issue: H

 Scrîba 3 Software Programming Manual Issue H
When the measurement is complete the information gleaned from the marker is
saved in a power log file. This information is saved along with the date and time for
future reference. If no file exists then the software will create one starting with
Powerlog.000.

Figure 7.40 Measure Power Graph Screen Window

7.12.2 Compare

Clicking the Compare button opens a list window from which you can choose a
previously saved set of values. Normally you would choose the first set of values
(the oldest) so these are highlighted automatically. It is possible to select any set of
values for comparison. Clicking on your chosen set of values and selecting Apply
causes the list window to disappear and displays the old values in a different colour,
alongside the measurements just taken.

Figure 7.41 Compare List Window

Clicking the Log File button allows a different log file to be compared against if
required.

100 Document No: QP00033 Issue: H

 Scrîba 3 Software Programming Manual Issue H
Generally it will only be necessary to do comparisons within the current log file.
The option to compare with other log files allows comparisons between lamps.

Figure 7.42 Power Log Files for Comparison

7.12.3 Change

Clicking on the Change button will alter the Power % properties in each data block
of a part program as it is sent to the marker, leaving the data blocks and part
program unchanged. The amount of change is calculated from the difference
between the two sets of values on the graph screen. These values are stored in the
Windows Registry so each downloaded program is automatically adjusted. The
Power % setting shown on the operator control panel will be the programmed setting
plus or minus the incremental change.

7.12.4 Reset

Clicking on the Reset button starts a new Powerlog file and sets the incremental
power change back to zero. If the old file was Powerlog.000 then the new file will
be Powerlog.001 etc. The old Powerlog file is not deleted but is stored for reference
purposes. This command is normally used when a new flash lamp is fitted to the
marker. The Windows Registry automatically keeps a record of which Powerlog
file is in use and whether a power change is required or not. It is strongly
recommended that a new power log file is used for every new lamp fitted.

101 Document No: QP00033 Issue: H

 Scrîba 3 Software Programming Manual Issue H

7.13 Motion Control

The Motion Control menu items are used to set-up the respective motion axes that
can be connected to the Scrîba marker. Four external stepper motor drivers can be
connected to the marker, one for each of the following axes: Rotary, X axis, Y axis
and Z axis. Each axis will need to be set-up and it is only necessary to do this set-up
once. If the EPROM or ZRAM is changed at any time then the set-up will have to
be repeated.

7.13.1 Rotary Setup

Figure 7.43 Rotary Set-up Dialog

This dialog allows you to set-up the properties for the rotary system connected in the
prescribed way to the marker.

7.13.1.1 Steps per Revolution

This is the number of motor driver steps required to turn the rotary axis through
360. This value is dependent upon the type of driver used, the number of micro
steps the driver is set-up for and any gearing that may be in use. For example a
system using a 1.8 driver (i.e. 200 steps per rev) with a direct drive and with 1/8th
micro stepping gives a final steps per revolution of 1600.

7.13.1.2 Maximum Velocity

This is the maximum velocity that the motor will move at. This allows the motor to
be slowed down for moving heavier loads. The maximum is 100%.

7.13.1.3 Acceleration Time

This is the time allowed for the motor to achieve the desired speed. With a heavier
load this may need to be increased.

102 Document No: QP00033 Issue: H

 Scrîba 3 Software Programming Manual Issue H
7.13.1.4 Pause Time

This is the time for which the marker waits after a move before executing the next
part of the mark.

7.13.1.5 Anti-backlash Count

This is the number of stepper counts to move beyond the required position and then
back up to eliminate any possible backlash in a geared drive. This is not needed in a
direct drive system

7.13.1.6 Enable Motion

If checked this enables the rotary axis when the Send All button is pressed. If not
checked the rotary axis is disabled.

7.13.1.7 Reverse Motor Direction

This makes the motor move in the opposite direction. The availability of this option
is dependent upon the EPROM fitted to the marker.

7.13.1.8 Drive IM483 Step/Direction Format

There are currently two types of motor driver available. The first uses two step
signals and the second (IM483) uses one step signal and a direction signal. This
option is only available in the Y series EPROMS and late Z series EPROMS in the
marker. The X series only use the first type and the Z series EPROMS up to and
including Z19 only use the second type.

7.13.1.9 Use Calibrate Switch and Calibrate

This option allows a switch to be used as a reference home position indicator. When
the calibration is initiated from the control console the motor will rotate until the
switch is reached and then backs off a small number of stepper counts. This position
is the reference home position.

103 Document No: QP00033 Issue: H

 Scrîba 3 Software Programming Manual Issue H

7.13.2 X and Y Axes Setup

Figure 7.44 X Axis Set-up Dialog

This dialog allows you to set-up the properties for the X axis system connected in
the prescribed way to the marker.

7.13.2.1 Steps per mm (inch)

This is the number of motor driver steps required to move the X axis one millimetre
(in metric mode) or one inch (in imperial mode). This value is dependent upon the
type of driver used, the number of micro steps the driver is set-up for, the pitch of
the lead screw in use and any gearing that may be in use. For example a system
using a 1.8 driver (i.e. 200 steps per rev) with a lead screw pitch of 2mm and with
1/8th micro stepping gives a final steps per mm of 800.

7.13.2.2 Maximum Velocity

This is the maximum velocity that the motor will move at. This allows the motor to
be slowed down for moving heavier loads. The maximum is 100%.

7.13.2.3 Acceleration Time

This is the time allowed for the motor to achieve the desired speed. With a heavier
load this may need to be increased. The minimum is 100ms.

7.13.2.4 Pause Time

This is the time for which the marker waits after a move before executing the next
part of the mark.

104 Document No: QP00033 Issue: H

 Scrîba 3 Software Programming Manual Issue H

7.13.2.5 Maximum Axis Travel

This is the maximum distance that the X axis is to be allowed to travel from the zero
reference point. If this distance is smaller than the distance between the micro
switches at the ends of the X axis then these microswitches will never be reached.
Always ensure, if the microswitches are to be acted upon, that the X axis is allowed
to cover the required distance.

7.13.2.6 Calibrate Position Offset

This value is the absolute position offset from the calibration position. For instance
with the calibrate position set at zero the zero reference position for the X axis is to
the extreme left. If your maximum travel has been set at 1000mm then by setting
this value to 500 would place the zero reference point in the centre of travel.

7.13.2.7 Reverse calibration direction

This option causes the selected axes to calibrate to the opposite end as would
normally be expected. The ‘normal end’ calibration point is the zero point. The
’reversed direction’ calibration point is that value specified by Max Axis Travel.

7.13.2.8 Reverse motor direction and limit switches

This option causes the motor direction and the limit switches to be reversed. This
allows the zero point for the particular axis to be transferred to the opposite end of
that axis.

7.13.2.9 Reverse limit switches

This option causes the limit switches only to be reversed. This is useful if the limit
switches’ wiring has been swapped.

105 Document No: QP00033 Issue: H

 Scrîba 3 Software Programming Manual Issue H

7.13.3 Y Axis Setup

Figure 7.45 Y Axis Set-up Dialog

This dialog allows you to set-up the properties for the Y axis system connected in
the prescribed way to the marker. The set-up value descriptions are the same as
those for the X axis as stated above.

7.13.4 Z Axis Setup

Figure 7.46 Z Axis Set-up Dialog

This dialog allows you to set-up the properties for the Z axis system connected in the
prescribed way to the marker. The set-up value descriptions are the same as those
for the X axis as stated above.

106 Document No: QP00033 Issue: H

 Scrîba 3 Software Programming Manual Issue H

7.13.5 Loading Motion Parameters

The Load button is used to load a previously created set of motion set-up
parameters. A dialog will appear allowing the selection a named set of motion set-
up parameters. Select the named settings and then click the Select button to select.
Clicking on the Cancel button ignores the operation. The Delete button can be used
to delete the selected motion set-up parameters.

Figure 7.47 Select Motion Settings Window

7.13.6 Saving Motion Parameters

The Save button is used to save the current motion parameters into a named set for
easy retrieval. A dialog will appear asking for the name. This is the name that will
appear in the Select Motion Settings window.

Figure 7.48 Save Motion Settings Window

7.13.7 Disable All

The Disable All button is used to disable all motion axes.

7.13.8 Send All

The Send All button is used to send all motion axes set-up data that are enabled, to
the laser marker.

7.13.9 Close

The Close button saves the current parameters and then exits the window. This is a
current storage area and not one of the named settings created with the Save button.

107 Document No: QP00033 Issue: H

 Scrîba 3 Software Programming Manual Issue H

7.14 Calibrate All Axes

Selection of this item initiates a calibration sequence for all motion axes that are
connected to the marker.

7.15 Pump Source Hours

Figure 7.49 Pump Source Hours Warning

The Pump Source Hours dialog is used to set up a warning system for when the lamp
is nearing the end of its lifetime. Figure 7.42 shows a sample of what the pump
source hours screen may look like, note that depending upon the current state of the
lamp hours warning system, the appearance of this dialog will change.

If the pump source hours warning system has not been set up, then the Change Pump
Source Hours Warning option will be available, this sets the initial number of hours
until the laser is reset to allow the pump source to be changed. Setting this value to
zero will disable the pump source hours warning feature.

The Laser Shutdown Warning time is the number of hours before the pump source
hours warning value is reached, at which point a message will appear indicating that
laser shutdown is imminent. Also at this point, the Extend pump source hours
warning section will become available. This allows up to a 24 hour extension to be
applied to the pump source hours warning value. The purpose of this is to allow the
current marks or batch of marks to be completed before the laser shuts down.

The Check Pump Source Hours Value Every box contains the number of marks
completed before the pump source hours value is checked. Please note that this does
require a small amount of communication time between marks, so if throughput is a
high priority, it is suggested that a high value be used here (100 for example).

The Reset Pump Source Hours button is to be used when the pump source has been
replaced, it will set all pump source hours information in the laser to zero, but leave
the warning value unchanged.

108 Document No: QP00033 Issue: H

 Scrîba 3 Software Programming Manual Issue H

8
Section 8: Send Menu
In this section:
8.1 Entire Program
8.1.1 Bounding Box
8.2 Parameters Only
8.3 Variables Only
8.4 Download and Mark
8.5 Compiled Files
8.6 Font
8.7 Compile to Disk
8.8 Compile to Font
8.9 Use Compression
8.10 Report Time
8.11 The Batching System
8.11.1 The Batching Screen
8.11.1.1 Compiled Files Directory Edit
8.11.1.2 Current Batch File Edit and Browse Button
8.11.1.3 Force Download Check Box
8.11.1.4 Check For Full Memory Check Box
8.11.1.5 Batching Grid
8.11.1.6 Download Progress Bar
8.11.1.7 Start Button
8.11.1.8 Previous Button
8.11.1.9 Stop Button
8.11.1.10 Next Button
8.11.1.11 Close Button
8.11.2 The Batch File
8.12 Dry Run Mode

109 Document No: QP00033 Issue: H

 Scrîba 3 Software Programming Manual Issue H

Send Menu
The Send menu command allows you to download part programs, compiled files and
fonts to the marker. It also allows you to compile part programs which can save
download time and prevents unauthorised modification of the program in the Scrîba
software (Figure 8.1).

Figure 8.1 Send Menu Window

The Entire Program item is only enabled when the software has contact with the
marker.
The Parameters Only item is only enabled when a part program has been sent to the
marker at least once using the Entire Program selection.
The Variables Only item is only enabled when a part program has been sent to the
marker at least once using the Entire Program selection.
The Download and Mark item is enabled when a part program has been sent to the
marker at least once using the Entire Program selection.
The Compiled Files item is only enabled when the software has contact with the
marker.
The Font item is only enabled when the software has contact with the marker.
The Compile to Disk item is only enabled when a part program has been opened or
created.
The Compile to Font item is only enabled when a Logo data block has been used to
create a character for insertion into a font.

110 Document No: QP00033 Issue: H

 Scrîba 3 Software Programming Manual Issue H
Send Toolbar

Send Entire File Send Parameters Only Display Execute Window

Cancel Sending Start Dry Run Mode

Stop the Box Command

Send Font Send Compiled Files
Run the Box Command

Figure 8.2 Send Toolbar

The actions of the various toolbar buttons are as follows:

Send Entire File button - this is the same as the Entire Program menu selection
(Section 8.1).
Send Font button – this is the same as Font menu selection (Section 8.6).
Send Parameters Only button – this is the same as the Parameters Only menu
selection (Section 8.2).
Send Compiled Files button – this is the same as the Compiled Files selection
(Section 8.5).
Cancel Sending button – this terminates immediately the sending of a part file, a
font file or a compiled file that is currently in progress.
Run the Box Command button – this initiates the Box command for the program
currently selected within the marker. The Box command causes the visible diode
to show the extremities of the currently selected mark with a correctly sized and
shaped continuously running rectangle.
Stop the Box Command button – this stops the Box command.
Display Execute Window button – this is the same as the Execute menu selection
from the Marker menu (Section 7.9).
Start Dry Run Mode button – this initiates the Dry Run mode (Section 8.12)

111 Document No: QP00033 Issue: H

 Scrîba 3 Software Programming Manual Issue H

8.1 Entire Program

The Entire Program command downloads the current part program file to the
marker. While the program is being downloaded it is not possible to mark with the
laser. The Stop button on the operator control panel will illuminate to indicate when
a program has finished downloading and the laser is ready to mark. Whenever a
program has been modified, the new program must be sent to the marker before
marking. If the new program has not been downloaded, the old program will still be
resident in the marker and will be marked if the Start button on the operator control
panel is pressed.

If the file being sent is large the following window is displayed. This would be most
noticeable when tiling is in use.

Figure 8.3 Preparing File for Sending

8.1.1 Bounding Box

When the program is downloaded additional information is sent to the marker which
allows a bounding box to be ‘drawn’ with the visible laser. The bounding box is that
box that surrounds the whole of the mark. This is useful for positioning of individual
parts within the marking field. To use this facility select the built in program BOX
on the control console.

If there are any Back-Drop Data Blocks, the bounding box will give a rectangle that
contains all Back-Drop Data Blocks; otherwise the bounding box will give a
rectangle containing all Data Blocks on the current Simulation Screen.

Note: the bounding box selected in the control console contains the bounding box
corresponding to the last downloaded program only.

Note: all possible Data Block size changes caused by Serialisation or Motion
Control are not included.

8.2 Parameters Only

The Parameters Only command sends the Frequency, Rate and Power properties to
the marker for all data blocks. No other part of the program in the marker is affected
other than updating these properties and you must already have sent a valid program
to the marker.
*Note that this function relies on the marker having at least version X76 of the
EPROM. If a lesser version EPROM is installed this menu option will be disabled.

112 Document No: QP00033 Issue: H

 Scrîba 3 Software Programming Manual Issue H

8.3 Variables Only

This is used when a file that contains any serialisation, file input or variable text
fields that has been downloaded and the Text Substitution screen has been closed.
Subsequent selection of the Variables Only item re-opens the Text Substitution
screen and then resends the variable information (serial numbers, file input and
variable text fields) to the marker without resending the whole file.

8.4 Download and Mark

When clicked, a confirmation dialog will be displayed, if yes is clicked then the
current part program will be downloaded and marking will begin as soon as the
download has finished.

8.5 Compiled Files

The Compiled File command is used to download a compiled file to the marker.
When the Compiled File command is selected a window appears that allows a list of
compiled files to be selected and sent to the marker. Compiled files can be added to
or removed from the list (Figure 8.4). Compiled files are given the extension *.elc.
For more information on compiled files see section 5.5.

Figure 8.4 Send Compiled Files Window

 Adding a compiled file

To add a compiled file to the download list press, the Add button. This opens a
standard Windows File Open dialog box, from which an ELC file can be selected.
When the Open button is pressed in the File Open dialog box, the selected ELC file
will be added into the download list as shown in Figure 8.3.

 Deleting a compiled file

To remove a compiled file from the download list, press the Remove button. This
removes the currently selected file from the download list.

113 Document No: QP00033 Issue: H

 Scrîba 3 Software Programming Manual Issue H
 Downloading compiled files
To download the compiled files in the download list to the Marker press the
Download button. If the download list contains a single file and this file contains
serialisation or file input information, this is detected and operates as normal.
However if the download list contains more than one file and one or more of these
files contain serialisation or file input information then this information is ignored
(Figure 8.5).

Figure 8.5 Compile File Download Notification

 Changing compiled files download order

When one or more compiled files are in the download list, the download sequence is
as shown by the file position in the download list.
To change the download sequence, use the Up and Down arrow buttons to the right
to move the selected compiled file up or down the download list.

Checking the Clear list on download checkbox clears the download list when the
download is complete. Uncheck this if the list is to be present every time the Send
Compiled File menu selection is made.

Checking the Ignore Auto Serialisation checkbox ignores any serialisation (normal
or auto) that may exist in the compiled file. If this checkbox is left unchecked then
the Test Substitution screen will appear when normal serialisation is detected in the
file or the Autoserialisation screen will appear when autoserialisation is detected in
the file. By default the serialisation is ignored. It is only worth not ignoring the
serialisation in the case of one file only being sent to the marker.

The Close button is used to close the window once the required action has been
completed.

114 Document No: QP00033 Issue: H

 Scrîba 3 Software Programming Manual Issue H

8.6 Font
The Font command is used to download Scrîba fonts, other than font 1 and 2, to the
marker. When the Font command is selected a window appears listing the fonts
available (Figure 8.6). All marker fonts are given the file extension *.elf and only
this font type can be marked with the laser.

Figure 8.6 Font List Window

If you wish to use other fonts you must firstly convert them to an Electrox marker
*.elf fonts. Using the Electrox FontMaker software it is possible to convert any non-
Unicode TrueType™ into an Electrox marker *.elf font. Using the Electrox Unicode
FontMaker it is possible to convert a Unicode font TrueType™ into an Electrox
marker *.elf font. You can even create your own font from individual PLT files.

8.7 Compile to Disk

When a part program is downloaded to the marker via the Entire Program command,
the program is compiled to remove any data that the marker does not need. The
Compile To Disk command compiles the part program so that it does not need to go
through the compiler when downloading, thus saving memory space and
downloading time. A compiled file cannot be modified in the Scrîba 3 software.
When the Compile To Disk command is selected, a window appears to give the part
program a name with the extension .elc (Figure 8.7). If the file has previously been
stored using the Save command, both the un-compiled and compiled files can be
saved as each has a different extension. If the same name is given to two compiled
files, then the existing file is replaced.

Figure 8.7 Save Compiled File Window

115 Document No: QP00033 Issue: H

 Scrîba 3 Software Programming Manual Issue H

When a large file is being compiled to disk the following window is displayed. This
would be most noticeable when tiling is in use.

Figure 8.8 Compiling in Progress

8.8 Compile to Font

When a Logo data block has been used to create a character (see Section 14.6 Font
Character Generation), this character can be used to create a new font or be added to
an already existing font.

Figure 8.9 Compile to Font – Add to an Existing Font

The Compile to Font window has two tabs: Add to an Existing Font as shown in
Figure 8.9 and Create a New Font as show in Figure 8.10.

Figure 8.10 Compile to Font – Create a New Font

The Add to an Existing Font selection is used to add the selected logo data block as
a font character to the end of the specified font file. Click the … button to browse to
the required directory and select the required font file (.elf). When the selected font
file is recognized by the software as a Scriba Font file, its internal font name and

116 Document No: QP00033 Issue: H

 Scrîba 3 Software Programming Manual Issue H
font number will be displayed in the Font name and Font number text box; otherwise
an error message will be given as shown below.

Figure 8.11 Font Error Message

The OK button is enabled when an appropriate font file is specified in the Select a
Font file text box. Press the OK button to add the selected logo data block as a font
character to the end of the selected font file.

The Create a New Font selection is also used to convert the selected logo data block
into a Scriba font character and create a new font file with the specified font name
and font number. Click the … button to browse to the required directory and select
the required font file (.elf). Enter a font name (maximum 31 characters) in the Font
name edit box. Specify a font number from 3 to 19 (20 is reserved for another use) in
the Font Number edit box.

The OK button is enabled when an appropriate font file is specified in the Save Font
file as edit box. When the OK button is pressed the software checks the input to
make sure everything meets the font requirements before it creates the new font file.

If no font name is specified in the Font Name box when the OK button is pressed, an
error message box is displayed as shown below.

Figure 8.12 Font Name Message

If the specified font file already exists, a warning message as shown in Figure 8.12 is
displayed when the OK button is pressed. Select Yes to overwrite or select No to go
back to the Compile To Font window.

Figure 8.13 Overwrite Existing Font Message

When all conditions are checked and met by the software, the following message as
shown in Figure 8.14 is given. Select Yes to continue or select No to go back to the
Compile To Font window for further changes.

117 Document No: QP00033 Issue: H

 Scrîba 3 Software Programming Manual Issue H

Figure 8.14 Create New Font Message

When the process is complete the following information message is displayed. Press
OK to finish. Note that one character or more can be added to the font at any one
time.

Figure 8.15 Font Character Generated Message

8.9 Use Compression

The Use Compression command is used to switch on or off the software’s ability to
compress the data sent from the ‘Send Entire Program’, ‘Send Compiled File’ and
‘Send Font’ menu commands. This command will have a tick mark next to it on the
menu to show whether it is currently enabled or not. When enabled the download
time will be reduced for part programs, compiled files and fonts.

*Note that this function relies on having at least a version X77 or Z86 EPROM fitted
in the marker. If an earlier or Y series EPROM is installed the Use Compression
menu option will be disabled.

8.10 Report Time

The Report Time command enables or disables the timing of the send-to-marker
functions. When used in conjunction with compression it also reports the level of
compression used.

118 Document No: QP00033 Issue: H

 Scrîba 3 Software Programming Manual Issue H

8.11 The Batching System

Selecting the Batching menu item will display the batching screen (Figure 8.16).
This allows some simple batching of mark files to be achieved. A batch file is
created with a list of files to be marked. Each file is then downloaded automatically
in the order in which they exist in the batch file. Pressing the start button on the
control console will mark the latest file in the batch.

8.11.1 The Batching Screen

Figure 8.16 The Batching Screen

The Batching screen consists of several controls, which are detailed below:

8.11.1.1 Compiled Files Directory Edit

This contains the directory where the compiled files to be marked are located.

8.11.1.2 Current Batch File Edit and Browse Button

Use the browse button to choose a text file, this text file should contain a list of the
filename of Electrox compiled files to be marked.

8.11.1.3 Force Download Check Box

When this is checked, programs will always be downloaded, if it is unchecked then

the program will only be downloaded if a program of that name does not already
exist in the marker.

119 Document No: QP00033 Issue: H

 Scrîba 3 Software Programming Manual Issue H
8.11.1.4 Check For Full Memory Check Box

When this is checked, the amount of memory the program will occupy in the marker
will be calculated and compared to the available memory in the machine, if there is
not enough memory available, then all programs in the marker will be erased. If this
option is not checked, then no memory checking will occur. In this case if there is
insufficient memory the file will not be downloaded.

8.11.1.5 Batching Grid

This contains a list of compiled files to be marked, the number to mark, the number
that have been marked, and whether or not the files have been located.

8.11.1.6 Download Progress Bar

This displays the percentage of the current program that has been downloaded.

8.11.1.7 Start Button

Once a batch file has been loaded, this will start the batching procedure.

8.11.1.8 Previous Button

Only available when the stop button is clicked, this will move back one file in the
batching sequence.

8.11.1.9 Stop Button

This will halt the batching procedure, and enable the back and next buttons.

8.11.1.10 Next Button

Only available when the stop button is clicked, this will move forward one file in the
batching sequence.

8.11.1.11 Close Button

This closes the batching screen.

120 Document No: QP00033 Issue: H

 Scrîba 3 Software Programming Manual Issue H
Below is a sample batching screen with a valid batch file selected.

Figure 8.17 Batching

8.11.2 The Batch File

The Batch file used by the batching screen contains a list of Electrox compiled files,
followed by the number of times to mark that compiled file (see example below).

File1.elc,4
Fred.elc,2
Normal.elc
TestFile.elc,3

In this example, the file “File1.elc” will be marked four times, “Fred.elc” will be
marked twice, “Normal.elc” will be marked once and “TestFile.elc” will be marked
three times.

121 Document No: QP00033 Issue: H

 Scrîba 3 Software Programming Manual Issue H

8.12 Dry Run Mode

The capability to dry run the program has been added to eproms from the G10F
series onwards. Scriba 3, on connection to the marker detects if this functionality is
available and enables the Dry Run toolbar button if this is the case (Figure 8.2). If
the marker is in Dry Run mode, then the Dry Run dialog is displayed (Figure 8.18).
This dialog remains visible until Dry Run mode is cancelled, however it is still
possible to use the software as normal while this screen is active, it is purely visible
as a reminder that the marker is in Dry Run mode. Clicking on the Dry Run toolbar
button enables Dry Run mode.

Figure 8.18

122 Document No: QP00033 Issue: H

 Scrîba 3 Software Programming Manual Issue H

9
Section 9: Vision Menu
In this section:
9.1 Enable Vision
9.2 Vision Setup
9.3 Capture Image
9.4 Enable Live Mode
9.5 Disable Live Mode
9.6 Vision Calibration
9.6.1 Vision Calibration Procedure
9.7 Use of the Vision System

123 Document No: QP00033 Issue: H

 Scrîba 3 Software Programming Manual Issue H

Vision System
The vision consists of a camera mounted off axis to the laser. This system allows
the capture of live or still images to be used as a backdrop to the Scriba 3 simulation
display.

The Vision Menu allows you to setup and use the vision system. Note that to use the
vision system the respective drivers for the camera must have been installed.

Figure 9.1 Vision Menu

9.1 Enable Vision

The Enable Vision command initiates connection to the camera as well as checking
for the existence of the relevant vision library files. A window appears with the
message “Enabling Vision, Please Wait” which can be displayed for a few tens of
seconds. After this time either a message “Vision Enabled” for a successful
connection and “Vision Disabled” for an unsuccessful connection.

If unsuccessful check the connections to the camera and that the respective drivers
have been installed.

Note: The vision system MUST be calibrated as per Section 9.6.1 before being
enabled in Scriba 3.

9.2 Vision Setup

The Vision Setup command displays the following dialog box.

Figure 9.2 Vision Setup Dialog

This allows the selection of another colour with which to display any valid data
blocks except pictures. Pictures remain black. A valid data block is one which is
normally simulated black. Those that were coloured red (error in data block), green
(simulation only) and blue (backdrops) remain as such.

124 Document No: QP00033 Issue: H

 Scrîba 3 Software Programming Manual Issue H

9.3 Capture Image

The Capture Image command is used to capture an image from the camera which is
then placed onto the Simulation screen in the correct position at the correct size.

9.4 Enable Live Mode

The Enable Live Mode turns on the vision live mode. This means that the image is
constantly being updated as fast as is possible. This update rate will slow down as
the number of data blocks being simulated increases.

9.5 Disable Live Mode

The Disable Live Mode command turns off the vision live mode. It is useful to
disable the live mode when many data blocks are contained within the design.

9.6 Vision Calibration

The vision calibration is a one-off calibration procedure and involves both marking
and image capture to match the image field with the marking field.
The vision calibration is executed through an external application called Electrox
Capture. This application contains the menu system shown below.

Figure 9.3 Electrox Capture Application Menu

 Run Uncalibrated
This is used to show an uncalibrated image which is useful only in the first instance
of setup.

 Start Calibration
This is used to inform the application that the calibration process is to begin.
Various internal settings are initialised in preparation for this.

 Capture Master Image

This is used to capture the master image for the calibration process. This is usually
the chequerboard pattern that is marked perfectly central in the marking field. The
centre of this chequerboard is at the origin (0,0) of the marking field.

 Capture Subsequent Image

This is used to capture subsequent images during the calibration process. Generally
four additional mages are captured to complete the process. This is a minimum
requirement.

125 Document No: QP00033 Issue: H

 Scrîba 3 Software Programming Manual Issue H

 Finish Calibration
This is used to inform the application that the calibration process is complete. At
this point, various calibration files are produced which are subsequently used by
Scriba 3.

9.6.1 Vision Calibration Procedure

The vision calibration is a one-off calibration procedure and involves both marking
and image capture to match the image filed with the marking field. It is imperative
that the laser has been set up perfectly (ie in focus and all lens corrections complete)
and the camera has been set up perfectly (ie in focus) prior to any calibration. Also
ensure that there is even lighting across the marking field; any shadows can cause
the vision calibration to fail.

The following is a step-by-step procedure to calibrate the vision system.

1. Open the calibration.xml using Notepad or another editor. This file can be
found in the Scriba 3 install directory. By default the entry Quadrant is set
to zero. If the camera requires a 180° rotation this can be done by setting the
Quadrant to two (2) and saving the modified file. The calibration process is
capable of determining the X and Y axes of the system.

2. Ensure that the camera is setup pointing at the marking area and that the
focus is set correctly. The Electrox Capture application can be used to help
do this.

3. Open Scriba 3. Mark the chequerboard pattern. This comes in the form of a
compiled file which resides in the Scriba 3 install directory. The file to
select is dependent on the marking area. The pattern is a 9x7 chequerboard.
Currently there are two files: S163_Vision.elc and S254_Vision.elc for use
with the S163 and S254 lenses respectively. Download and mark the
respective file. See Section 8.5 to download the compiled files.

4. Close Scriba 3.

5. Open the Electrox Capture application.

6. Select Calibration->Start Calibration.

7. Select Calibration->Capture Master Image.

8. Move the marked chequerboard into each of the four corners

(approximately) of the camera image area. The edges and corner of the
chequerboard may spill over out of the image area. this is not important as
long as all the chequerboard intersection points are within the image area.
After each repositioning select Calibration->Subsequent Image to capture
that image.

9. Select Calibration->Finish Calibration.

126 Document No: QP00033 Issue: H

 Scrîba 3 Software Programming Manual Issue H

10. Exit the Electrox Capture application. Calibration of the vision system is
now complete. If the required accuracy has not been achieved then the
vision calibration can be re-run.

9.7 Use of the Vision System

Firstly the vision system must be enabled by selecting from the Vision menu, Enable
Vision.

Capturing a still image can be achieved in any of three ways: selecting Capture
Image from the Vision menu or pressing the F5 key or clicking on the Camera
button in its toolbar.

Figure 9.4 Camera Button (Toolbar)

The image captured by the camera is then displayed at the correct size and position
in the Simulation screen. The data block in the design file will be simulated on top
of this captured image.

For a live image select Enable Live Mode from the Vision menu and the captured
image will be continually updated. The update will slow down as the number of
data blocks being simulated increase.

127 Document No: QP00033 Issue: H

 Scrîba 3 Software Programming Manual Issue H

10
Section 10: Tools Menu
In this section:
10.1 Font Maker
10.1.1 To Create an Electrox marker Font from a True Type Font
10.1.2 To Look at a Previously Converted Font or Change the Number Allocated to a
Font
10.1.3 To Adjust a Font for Overlapping Lines
10.1.4 To Create an Electrox marker Font from Individual .plt Files
10.1.5 The Toolbar
10.1.6 To Add a Border to the Font’s Characters
10.2 Unicode Font Maker
10.3 Laser Parameters Calculator
10.3.1 Lens Information
10.4 Marker Comms
10.4.1 The Main Toolbar
10.4.2 The Configurable Buttons
10.5 Part File Converter
10.5.1 File Conversion Sequence
10.6 UID Creator
10.6.1 UID Creation Sequence
10.7 Logo Line Reducer Preview
10.8 View Comms Buffer
10.9 Reset Registry Entries
10.11 Edit Programs.ini
10.12 Reload Programs.ini

128 Document No: QP00033 Issue: H

 Scrîba 3 Software Programming Manual Issue H

Tools Menu
The Tools menu command allows you to run the internal Font Editor and launch
other useful tools for use with the open Scrîba 3 program (Figure 10.1).

Figure 10.1 Tools Menu

10.1 Font Maker

Selecting the Font Maker launches the Font-Maker program. The Font Maker is a
program that allows the conversion of fonts and individual characters into an
Electrox marker type font for use with the marker. Note that the True TypeTM fonts
used in this application are non-Unicode fonts only. For Unicode fonts conversion
see section 10.2.

Figure 10.2 FontMaker Main Window

The program accepts one of three input types:

 A True Type font

 A vector (line) font e.g. the standard Windows font, MODERN.FON

129 Document No: QP00033 Issue: H

 Scrîba 3 Software Programming Manual Issue H

 A series of individual files representing each character to be compiled into a font.

There is a single output format - a Electrox marker type font which can then be
downloaded directly to the marker with the main marker software.

Note: It is up to the user to ascertain his legal obligation as regards the ownership of
the fonts he wishes to convert. Electrox cannot and does not grant the authority to
use specific fonts.

10.1.1 To Create an Electrox marker Font from a True Type Font

 From the Tools menu select Import True Type Font. A font selection dialogue
box will appear from which you can select the required True Type font.

 Select the font which you want to convert and click OK.

 A second window will open to display the font you have selected.

 From the File menu select Edit Font Details. This allows you to specify which
font number you allocate to this new font. The default number is 3. The font
number is in the range 1 to 20. Font 20 is reserved for the RSS-14 font.

Figure 10.3 Edit Font Details

 From the File menu select Save As which will then display the standard
dialog box for file naming. It is advisable to include in the file name the name of the
font you converted and the number you allocated to it. For example if you converted
the Arial font to font 4 call the new file arial4.elf. All Scrîba fonts have the
extension .elf. Select OK and the Scrîba font will be written.

130 Document No: QP00033 Issue: H

 Scrîba 3 Software Programming Manual Issue H

10.1.2 To Look at a Previously Converted Font or Change the Number Allocated to a

Font

 From the File menu select Open. The standard file dialog box appears from
which you can select which Scriba font you wish to examine.
 Select the font you are interested in and click OK.

 A window will then display the selected font.

 If you now wish to change the font number select Edit Font Details from the
File menu and alter the number to your requirements.

 If you have changed the font number select Save As from the File menu to
save the new font as a separate file or Save to save it with the same name. Selection
of Save will destroy the old copy and could lead to confusion with the font number.

10.1.3 To Adjust a Font for Overlapping Lines

This is used to prevent deeper marks where crossovers occur in characters such as
the centre of the "X".

 Open a font as described in the above section.

 From the Tools menu select Adjust Overlapping Lines. From the dialog box
that has appeared select the target font size and the line marking width you expect to
use. The three options define what to do for coincident points on the character, i)
whether to always adjust for the line width, or ii) never adjust for the line width, or
iii) only adjust where the lines meet at a certain angle. A coincident point would be
the corner of the character "L" where the two lines meet. The options affect what
happens here.

 Note: The information entered in this dialog box will be purely dependent
upon the application required. You may have to try a variety of options to get the
required result.

 When the processing is complete select Save As from the File menu to save
your newly created font.

131 Document No: QP00033 Issue: H

 Scrîba 3 Software Programming Manual Issue H

10.1.4 To Create an Electrox marker Font from Individual .plt Files

This option is used when you have created each character you wish to use as an
individual file using a third party drawing package. Ensure that the files are created
as .plt files (HPGL). Most packages including AutoCad will do this.

 From the Tools menu select Import HPGL files as font. A standard dialog
for directory selection will appear to allow you to select a series of files.
Click OK when you see the files you wish to compile into an Electrox marker
font.

Figure 10.4 Plot File to Font Assignment Dialog

 A second dialog box then appears which allows you assign the individual .plt
files to the characters with which they will be called up.
 This assignment can be done in two ways:

 Character by character

 Automatic.
 Where the .plt files have the same name as the characters required Auto
Assign can be used. For instance if your .plt files are called 1.plt; 2.plt;
3.plt etc. these can be auto assigned to the characters 1, 2 and 3
respectively. Even with auto assign there may be one or two characters
left which will have to be done manually. To assign these manually select
a file from the right hand list and a character from the left-hand list - the
Assign button will then be highlighted. Select the Assign button and the
operation is completed. If a mistake is made during the assignment and
you wish to unassign an item then select the character you wish to remove
the assignment from. The Unassign button will be highlighted. Select this
Unassign button and the file which was assigned to that character will
now appear back in the right hand list in preparation for re-assignment if
required. If you wish to begin again then select the Clear All button.
When the assignment is as required click OK.

132 Document No: QP00033 Issue: H

 Scrîba 3 Software Programming Manual Issue H
 The new font is now displayed.

 Change the font number as required - see above sections.

 Save your new font as described earlier.

10.1.5 The Toolbar

Import True Type font

Open *.elf file Edit font parameters

Edit beam settings

Save *.elf font file Create a font from PLT files

10.1.6 To Add a Border to the Font’s Characters

Figure 10.5 Edit Font Details

1. Draw Border – When checked, a border is drawn at the specified distance from the
original character in the font when the font is saved.

2. Border Width – Specifies the distance of the border from the original character.

NOTE: In general most characters fit within a 480 x 480 square.

3. Maintain Original Character Position – When checked, the border is placed around
the original character (see figures 10.6 to 10.8).

133 Document No: QP00033 Issue: H

 Scrîba 3 Software Programming Manual Issue H
Character Position

Figure 10.6 shows the character A positioned at 0, 0 without a border (original

position).

Figure 10.6 Original Character Position Without Border

Figure 10.7 shows the character A with a border and the border containing the
character positioned at 0, 0.

Figure 10.7 Character Moved to Centre of Border

Figure 10.8 shows the character A with a border and the character positioned at 0,
0 (original character position maintained).

Figure 10.8 Original Character Position Maintained With Border

NOTE: The font border will only be applied to the following characters: +, /, -, 0 to
9 and A to Z.

134 Document No: QP00033 Issue: H

 Scrîba 3 Software Programming Manual Issue H

10.2 Unicode Font Maker

Selecting this item launches the Scrîba Unicode FontMaker program. This program
is used to convert Unicode TrueTypeTM fonts. The Unicode Font Maker main
window appears after the Font Maker loading screen which is displayed for a few
seconds.

Figure 10.9 Loading Screen

Figure 10.10 Main Window

To convert a Unicode True TypeTM font first select from the Tools menu Import
True Type Font. The font selection window appears from which the Unicode font
can be selected. For example, select something like @Arial Unicode MS.

Then select the Font Style – this will normally be Regular;

Then select the Font Size – this will normally be 36;
Then select the Script – for example, CHINESE_GB2312, if simplified Chinese
characters are required.
Then select other effects as required and click OK.

135 Document No: QP00033 Issue: H

 Scrîba 3 Software Programming Manual Issue H

Figure 10.11 Select True TypeTM Unicode Font

Once the font has been selected, it then has to be prepared for the marker. From the
Tools menu select Edit Font Details.

Figure 10.12 Unicode Edit Font Details

Select the character set required within this font, e.g. Chinese Simplified
(GB2312). Do not change the Font Name.
Select the font number that will be used within Scriba 3 and click OK.

136 Document No: QP00033 Issue: H

 Scrîba 3 Software Programming Manual Issue H

Figure 10.13 Typical Unicode Character Display

Once the conversion is complete all the characters are shown in a display similar to
that above.

Then from the File menu select Save As…; provide a suitable filename such as
ChineseSimplified9 in this case and save in an appropriate directory for later
retrieval.

Figure 10.14 Unicode Font Saving

Note that if the font contains many characters, as in the above example, the save
process can take several minutes to complete.

Figure 10.15 Character Unicode Value

Hover the mouse over any character and the Unicode value for that character is displayed.

137 Document No: QP00033 Issue: H

 Scrîba 3 Software Programming Manual Issue H

10.3 Laser Parameters Calculator

Selecting this item launches the Scrîba Laser Parameters Calculator program. This
program is useful in determining specific laser parameters for the marker for a
specified set of input criteria. This provides only a rough guide for those parameters
specified.

Figure 10.16 Laser Parameters Calculator Main Window

A set of input parameters are entered into the left hand column of edit boxes and the
power of the laser is selected. When the Calculate button is clicked the right hand
column of display boxes is filled with the calculated parameters as shown. This
program is particularly useful for determining the spot size of the laser beam for a
specified set of input criteria. The spot size will usually be required when specifying
fill parameters.

10.3.1 Lens Information

Selecting this menu displays some basic information such as the working distance
and the field diameter of each of the lenses used by Electrox markers (Figure
10.14).

Figure 10.17 Lens Information

138 Document No: QP00033 Issue: H

 Scrîba 3 Software Programming Manual Issue H

10.4 Marker Comms

The Marker Communicator (MarkerComms) is a small communication application

that allows direct communication with the connected marker. Direct commands are
entered via the Send Data window and the responses, if any, are displayed in the
Received Data window. This application is mainly used for diagnostics purposes.

Connect/Disconnect button Comms channel selection IP Address and

Port Selection

Send Data Window Received Data Window Close button

Figure 10.18 MarkerComms Main Window

The Connect/Disconnect button is used to make a connection to the marker. If

coloured red there is no connection and the caption reads ‘Connect’. On launching
the application it automatically tries to establish connection with the marker. If
successful this button becomes blue and the caption reads ‘Disconnect – comms
port’. The comms port is the comms port through which the connection was
established.

When the application is disconnected the Comms Channel Selection drop down list
becomes available. This allows the selection of the correct comms channel for
communication with the marker (Ethernet, USB or an RS232 COM port). The COM
ports displayed will only be those that are available on the PC. When the Ethernet is
selected, the IP Address and the Port number become available – these will need to
be set.

139 Document No: QP00033 Issue: H

 Scrîba 3 Software Programming Manual Issue H
The Close button closes the application.

10.4.1 The Main Toolbar

Clear the contents of the windows Send a file

Send the memread command Send the memread command 16 times

Figure 10.19 Main Toolbar

Clicking on the Clear button clears the contents of both the Send Data window and
the Received Data window.

The two memory read buttons are used for diagnostics purposes only and return
internal memory data. This data will only be of use to Electrox personnel.

The Send File button opens a standard Open File dialog which allows a compiled
file (*.elc) or an Electrox font file (*.elf) to be selected and sent to the marker.

10.4.2 The Configurable Buttons

Figure 10.20 Configurable Buttons

A left mouse click on the button sends the specified command to the marker. In the
case of Figure 9.13, the first button will send the ROMVER command and the
second button will send the >STAT command to the marker. Note that the other two
buttons are showing empty. This means that they have net yet been configured.

A right mouse click on the button allows the button to be configured by displaying
the dialog shown below. Enter the required command and click OK. Clicking
Cancel, cancels the configuration.

Figure 10.21 Configure the Button

140 Document No: QP00033 Issue: H

 Scrîba 3 Software Programming Manual Issue H

10.5 Part File Converter

The File Converter is a utility that allows the conversion of Scriba 1 and Scriba 2
part files to version three part files.

Figure 10.22 File Converter Window

10.5.1 File Conversion Sequence

 Click the Import Files button.

 A dialog box appears with the question “Do you wish to use a marker.ini
file?”. This is used to determine whether the preferences stored in the Scriba
1 or Scriba 2 software marker.ini file pertaining to the part files are to be
used. If yes is selected these part file preferences are used, otherwise the
defaults set within Scriba 3 software will be used.

 A second dialog box appears with the question “Do you wish to import
global preferences?”. This is used to determine whether the global
preferences stored in the Scriba 1 or Scriba 2 software marker.ini file are to
be used. If yes is selected these global preferences are used with the part file,
otherwise the defaults within Scriba 3 software will be used.

 A File Open dialog appears which is used to select one or more *.PRT files.
Select the required files to convert.

141 Document No: QP00033 Issue: H

 Scrîba 3 Software Programming Manual Issue H

Figure 10.23 File Converter – Imported Files

The imported files are displayed in the right hand window.

Use the check boxes against each file to export the required files.
Either click the Export All Files button or the Export Checked Files button.

The converted files are written back to the same directory from which the original
imported files come from. Note that if the files being converted contain fills then
the Edit Menu item ‘Re-apply all Fills’ must be selected. This ensures continuity of
the fill information from the *.PRT format to the *.BPT format (see Section 4.4 –
Re-apply all Fills).
Click the Exit button to close the application.

142 Document No: QP00033 Issue: H

 Scrîba 3 Software Programming Manual Issue H

10.6 UID Creator

Selecting this item launches the UIDCreator. This is an application that allows the
creation of UID information for insertion into Data Matrix 2D codes.

Figure 10.24 UID Creator

For further information regarding UID see the following documents:

1. DoD Guide to Uniquely Identifying Items v1.6
2. MIL-STD-130N

There are three basic UID formats:

1. ANS Data Identifiers (06)
2. GS1 Application Identifiers (05)
3. Text Element Identifiers (12)

Within each format there are Construct 1 and Construct 2 with Stand-Alone Part
Numbers for the 06 and 12 formats.

10.6.1 UID Creation Sequence

1. Enter a name – this will be the name which will be used when calling up the
particular UID encoding. This is the name that is shown in the Choose Program
dialog when \p is entered in the data block text area.
2. Select the appropriate format.
3. Select the required construct.
4. Select the issuing agency as required and then enter the fixed data as required –
this usually includes the Enterprise Identifier together with certain additional
information. Some of this information is company and facility dependent.

143 Document No: QP00033 Issue: H

 Scrîba 3 Software Programming Manual Issue H
5. Click the Save button. The resultant string is shown at the bottom of the screen
and is also saved to the Programs.ini file with the given name.

Figure 10.25 UID Creator -Resultant String

The resultant string consists of all the UID conformance characters in a form that is
understood by the Scriba 3 plus ‘param1’. This ‘param1’ is where the serial number
will be inserted once this program is called up within the Scriba 3. Serialisation is
expected to be used for UID.

See Section 22 for use of the Programs.ini scripting.

10.7 Logo Line Reducer Preview

Selecting this item displays the Logo Line Reducer Preview tool (Figure 10.18).

Figure 10.26

To add a tolerance value to be previewed, type the value into the Logo Line Reducer
Tolerances edit, and click the Add Value Button. The value will be added to the
Values to Preview list.

To remove a value, select the value in the list and click the Remove Value button.

To start previewing, click the Preview button. This will display the Logo Line
Reducer Preview Screen (Figure 10.20).

144 Document No: QP00033 Issue: H

 Scrîba 3 Software Programming Manual Issue H

Figure 10.27

To preview a tolerance value, use the Logo Line Reducer Values drop down list box.

Drag a rectangle on the preview area and then the Lines in Selected Region edit box
will display the number of lines that fall within the selected rectangle.

At the bottom of this screen are the slow draw mode controls.

The Shape edit box displays the index of the shape that marks the upper limit of that
which is currently drawn on the preview screen. i.e. If this number is 50/100 then
only the first 50 shapes are being drawn.

The Slow Draw check box enables and disables the slow draw functionality. If this
is not checked then regardless of the number in the Shape edit, the whole image will
be drawn. The last primitive to be drawn will be at double width and green to
distinguish it from those primitives already drawn.

The +1, -1, +10, -10, +100 and -100 buttons change the value in the Shape edit box
by the number on the button.

The Play button causes the entire image to be drawn in relative slow motion,
allowing the mark order to be more clearly determined.

10.8 View Comms Buffer

This item is only available if the Comms Logging application preference has been
set to Yes (see section 3.11.1.28). This should only be used for diagnostics
purposes. Selection of this item, displays a dialog to view all incoming and outgoing
communications between the computer and marker.
Note that turning on Comms Logging will affect download speeds, and should
therefore generally remain off unless it is specifically necessary. While Comms
Logging is turned on, all communications to and from the marker will be logged,
even if the Communications logging dialog is not visible.
145 Document No: QP00033 Issue: H
 Scrîba 3 Software Programming Manual Issue H
The communications logging dialog (Figure 9.21) displays each sent or received
packet of information on a separate line of the display and will show the
communications format (either COM or USB) and whether the information was sent
(TX) or received (RX) and finally the actual information.
Note that any characters between hex 01 and hex 09 will display as <0x0#> where #
is the number, and that a carriage return character will display as <CR>.

Figure 10.28 Communication Logging View Window

The Clear button clears all displayed and logged data.

The Save button displays a standard File Save dialog to allow all information in the
dialog to be saved to a text file.

10.9 Reset Registry Entries

This should only be used if exceptions or access violations are occurring repeatedly
in one specific part of the application. Using this function will cause all Scriba 3
related entries in the registry to be erased, thereby fixing any corruptions that may
have occurred. This will result in all preferences and motion settings being set to
their default values.
IMPORTANT: Note down your preferences and motion settings before resetting the
registry.

10.11 Edit Programs.ini

Selecting this item launches Windows Notepad and opens the programs.ini file for
editing. The programs.ini file contains information regarding the date coding, shift
coding and check digit creation. For further detailed information about the data
contained in this file see the section Programming Language. If the programs.ini file
is changed it must be reloaded so that the changes can take effect.

10.12 Reload Programs.ini

Selecting this item forces the Scrîba 3 program to reload the programs.ini file. The
programs.ini file must be reloaded if it has been edited and those changes are to take
effect.

146 Document No: QP00033 Issue: H

 Scrîba 3 Software Programming Manual Issue H

11
Section 11: Window and Help Menus
In this section:

11.1 Window Menu

11.2 Help Menu
11.2.1 Send Support Email

147 Document No: QP00033 Issue: H

 Scrîba 3 Software Programming Manual Issue H

11.1 Window Menu

The Window menu command displays a list of the part programs that are currently
open. The ticked item is the part file currently active. Making a selection on one of
the other files makes that file active (in use).

Figure 11.1 Window Menu

11.2 Help Menu

The Help menu command allows the display of the About dialog box. This has two
tabbed pages the first of which is a copyright display and the second displays file
version information.

Figure 11.2 Help Menu

Figure 11.3 About Dialog

148 Document No: QP00033 Issue: H

 Scrîba 3 Software Programming Manual Issue H

11.2.1 Send Support Email

The marker must be connected to use this option. Clicking this causes the software
to request a variety of information from the marker for diagnostics purposes, and
will then send this information, along with the current part file and all ancillary files
to the default email client.

This allows information to be emailed to Electrox for diagnostics purposes.

149 Document No: QP00033 Issue: H

 Scrîba 3 Software Programming Manual Issue H

12
Section 12: Data Block Properties
In this section:
12.1 Data Block Properties Window
12.1.1 Positional Tab
12.1.2 Laser Tab
12.1.3 Control Tab
12.1.4 Special Tab
12.1.5 Tiling Tab
12.1.6 All Tab
12.2 Positional Properties
12.2.1 X Position
12.2.2 Y Position
12.2.3 X Centre
12.2.4 Y Centre
12.2.5 X End
12.2.6 Y End
12.2.7 X Offset
12.2.8 Y Offset
12.2.9 X Repeat
12.2.10 Y Repeat
12.2.11 X Rotational Centre
12.2.12 Y Rotational Centre
12.2.13 Angle
12.2.14 Angle Repeat
12.2.15 Rotation Radius
12.3 Laser Properties
12.3.1 Power
12.3.2 Frequency
12.3.3 Rate
12.3.4 Aperture
12.3.5 Zoom Beam Expander
12.3.6 Laser Pulse Width
12.3.7 Laser Parameter Recipe
12.3.8 Wobble Width
12.3.9 Wobble Frequency
12.4 Control Properties
12.4.1 Enable Send
12.4.2 Enable Simulate
12.4.3 Pause Command
12.4.4 Backdrop
12.4.5 Lock Position
12.4.6 Include in Box
12.5 Special-to-Type Properties
12.5.1 Repeat (all data blocks)
12.5.2 Scale (Text, Picture, Logo and Barcode data blocks)
12.5.3 Scale Repeat
12.5.4 X Slant

150 Document No: QP00033 Issue: H

 Scrîba 3 Software Programming Manual Issue H
12.6 All Properties
12.7 Edit Window
12.8 Global Change
12.8.1 Implementing Global Change

151 Document No: QP00033 Issue: H

 Scrîba 3 Software Programming Manual Issue H

Data Block Properties

12.1 Data Block Properties Window

Each data block has a number of properties split into four groups – Positional,
Control, Laser and Special. Each group is described below

Changing the values of the properties is accomplished just by typing over the value
displayed and then pressing the Enter key or selecting another property.

When switching from one data block to another, the last selected tab will be the one
that remains in focus. This tab is the one also used as the default tab selection when
a new data block is added.

Figure 12.1 Data Block Properties Window

12.1.1 Positional Tab

Selection of the Positional tab displays all the positional properties for the selected
data block. This information varies between data block types.

12.1.2 Laser Tab

Selection of the Laser tab displays all the laser properties information for the
selected data block. These properties are the power, frequency, rate, wobble width
and wobble frequency. This information varies between data block types.

12.1.3 Control Tab

Selection of the Control tab displays all the control properties for the selected data
block. The control information is that information that relates to the control of the

152 Document No: QP00033 Issue: H

 Scrîba 3 Software Programming Manual Issue H
selected data block such as whether the data block is to be sent or not. This
information varies between data block types.

12.1.4 Special Tab

Selection of the Special tab displays all the special-to-type properties for the selected
data block. This information varies between data block types. For example this
information includes font details for text data blocks and barcode type for barcode
data blocks etc.

12.1.5 Tiling Tab

This tab is only visible for Logo data blocks. Selection of the Tiling tab displays all
the properties required for the tiling and subsequent marking of the tiled image.
This allows images larger than the marking field to be split into segments that would
fit within the marking field. There are three types of tiling; rotary, linear and on-the-
fly. For further information see Section 14.8.3 On-The-Fly Tiling and Section 24
On-The-Fly Marking.

12.1.6 All Tab

Selection of the All tab displays all the information (positional, control, laser and
special) for the selected data block. This information varies between data block
types.

12.2 Positional Properties

Figure 12.2 Typical Positional Properties

The positional properties in each data block are relative to the centre of the marking
field, and are based on the Cartesian co-ordinate system where the centre is
designated as 0,0 (Figure 12.3) in the selected units. Some positional properties are
only available in certain data blocks types. Properties are only active when the
respective edit field is not greyed out.

153 Document No: QP00033 Issue: H

 Scrîba 3 Software Programming Manual Issue H

Figure 12.3 Marking Field (Normal Mirror Mode)

The following sub-sections describe each positional property together with the
default value. Note that the availability of some of these properties are dependent
upon the type of the currently selected data block.

12.2.1 X Position

The X Pos property is the position on the X axis of the marking field at which the
mark originates. The default value is 0.000, at the centre of the marking field.

12.2.2 Y Position

The Y Pos property is the position on the Y axis of the marking field at which the
mark originates. The default value is 0.000, at the centre of the marking field.

12.2.3 X Centre

This property is only available for a Text Ring data block. This property defines the
X co-ordinate of the centre of the text ring. The default value is 0.000.

12.2.4 Y Centre

This property is only available for a Text Ring data block. This property defines the
Y co-ordinate of the centre of the text ring. The default value is 0.000.

12.2.5 X End

This property is available for a Text Line, Text Ring or Picture data block. When the
Sized option is selected for the justification, the X End property field becomes
active. This property defines the X co-ordinate of the end point for the text.

154 Document No: QP00033 Issue: H

 Scrîba 3 Software Programming Manual Issue H

12.2.6 Y End

This property is available for a Text Line, Text Ring or Picture data block. When the
Sized option is selected for the justification, the Y End property field becomes
active. This property defines the Y co-ordinate of the end point for the text.

12.2.7 X Offset

There are two functions for the X Offset properties:

1) When a value is programmed in the X Repeat window, then the X Offset property
becomes the offset distance between each repeat of the data block.

2) When the Repeat function is not in use, the X Offset property is used to offset the
X Pos property in the data block window. This property defaults to 0.000.

12.2.8 Y Offset

There are two functions for the Y Offset property:

1) When a value is programmed in the Y Repeat window, then the Y Offset property
is the offset distance between each repeat of the data block.

2) When the Repeat function is not in use, the Y Offset property is added to the Y
Pos property in the data block window to provide an offset. This property defaults
to 0.000.

12.2.9 X Repeat

This property repeats the marking pattern defined in the data block in the X direction
a specified number of times. The amount of offset is specified in the X Offset field
of the data block window. If a value of 0.000 is entered in the X Offset field, the
mark is repeated on itself with no offset. The X Repeat value is the number of times
the pattern is repeated, excluding the initial mark. The default value is 0.

12.2.10 Y Repeat

This property repeats the marking pattern defined in the data block in the Y direction
a specified number of times. The amount of offset is specified in the Y Offset field
of the data block window. If a value of 0.000 is entered in the Y Offset field, the
mark is repeated on itself with no offset. The Y Repeat value is the number of times
the pattern is repeated, excluding the initial mark. The default value is 0.

12.2.11 X Rotational Centre

This property is only available for a Logo data block. This property defines the X
coordinate of the point about which the rotation will occur. The default value is
0.000.

155 Document No: QP00033 Issue: H

 Scrîba 3 Software Programming Manual Issue H
12.2.12 Y Rotational Centre
This property is only available for a Logo data block. This property defines the Y
coordinate of the point about which the rotation will occur. The default value is
0.000.

12.2.13 Angle
The Angle property allows rotation of the information in the data block around a
specified centre.

 A positive angle produces counter clockwise rotation

 A negative angle produces clockwise rotation

When used in conjunction with the Angle Repeat window, the Angle value begins at
0.00° and is then repeated at the specified value. The default value for the Angle
property is 0.00°. Note that this property is disabled in a Logo data block where on-
the-fly tiling is turned on.

12.2.14 Angle Repeat

This property repeats the marking pattern defined in the data block at a given angle a
given number of times. The angle is specified in the Angle field of the data block
window. If a value of 0.000 is entered in the Angle field, the mark is repeated on
itself without an angular offset. The Angle Repeat value is the number of times the
pattern is repeated, excluding the initial mark. The default value is 0.

12.2.15 Rotation Radius

This property is only available for text lines. It allows the position of a text line to
be moved away form the specified X and Y Position (along a radial) such that when
the Angle and Angle Repeat are used radial text lines can be produced as shown in
Figure 12.4 (Angle of 15 degrees, Angle Repeat of 23 and Rotation Radius of
15mm).

Figure 12.4 A Repeat using Rotation Radius

156 Document No: QP00033 Issue: H

 Scrîba 3 Software Programming Manual Issue H
The example in Figure 12.5 was created with an Angle of 30 degrees, an Angle
repeat of 3 and a Rotation radius of 20mm.

Figure 12.5 A Repeat using Rotation Radius

12.3 Laser Properties

Figure 12.6 Laser Properties

12.3.1 Power

The laser power is programmed in this property field. The value range is 40% to
100%, with 100% representing maximum laser power. The software default value is
60%. This property is overridden when the operator control panel is in manual
current mode or the marker is configured to use the Powerlog function (Section
7.12).

12.3.2 Frequency

The Q-switch frequency, or laser pulse frequency, is programmed in this field. The
range is 0 to 500 kHz. Continuous wave (CW) marking is achieved by setting the
frequency to 0. Pulsed marking is achieved by entering a value between 1 and 500
in the field (Non-integer values are allowed). The value needed is dependent upon
the material being marked and the appearance required of the mark. The default
value is 4kHz.

157 Document No: QP00033 Issue: H

 Scrîba 3 Software Programming Manual Issue H

12.3.3 Rate

The marking rate is the linear speed at which the laser beam travels at the work
piece. The range is 0.15 to 10160mm/s (.005 to 400 inches/sec), with the default
value at 200mm/s (8.0 inches/sec). The rate is dependent upon the application.
Both the material and the type of mark desired must be considered when setting the
rate.

12.3.4 Aperture

This property is only available when the Variable Aperture has been enabled in the
File Preferences. This allows the aperture to be set to the specified diameter in
millimetres for the particular data block. The range is 1.3mm to 3.1mm and 5.3mm.
The default is 2.0mm. A variable aperture must be fitted for this to be effective.

12.3.5 Zoom Beam Expander

This property is only available when the Zoom Beam Expander is enabled in the File
Preferences. This allows the zoom magnification to be set for the particular data
block. The range is 1x to 8x with the default at 4x. A zoom beam expander must be
fitted for this to be effective.

12.3.6 Laser Pulse Width

This property is only valid for the Scorpion Rapide laser. This property has four
settings and increases or decreases the pulse width of the laser beam depending on
the setting. A value of two is the shortest pulse and four is the longest pulse; the
default being four. The actual resulting pulse widths are determined during
manufacture of the laser. A value of one is never used and hence not selectable.

12.3.7 Laser Parameter Recipe

This property reflects the name of the recipe that has been selected and applied to
the current data block. This property is for information only. See Section 5.2 for
further details.

12.3.8 Wobble Width

The Wobble Width property specifies a line width for the mark. When a value other
than 0.000 is programmed in this field, the marking system is in "wobble" mode.
The specified line width is achieved by wobbling the laser beam in a circular pattern
along the mark path using the scanning mirrors. When the wobble mode is used, the
marking rate should be relatively slow (10 to 25 mm/sec, in most cases); otherwise,
a spiral pattern results. This property is used in conjunction with the Wobble
Frequency property (Section 12.3.9).

158 Document No: QP00033 Issue: H

 Scrîba 3 Software Programming Manual Issue H

12.3.9 Wobble Frequency

The Wobble Frequency property is used in conjunction with the Wobble Width
property (Section 12.3.8). The Wobble Frequency is the frequency at which the
beam rotates around the wobble circle. This is a relative value from 1 to 5, and is
proportional to the marking rate. In general, a rate of 5 produces the best results.
The default value is 2.

12.4 Control Properties

Figure 12.7 Control Properties

12.4.1 Enable Send

This allows enabling or disabling of the sending of the data block. For test
purposes, particularly in large part programs, individual data blocks can be disabled
for the mark. In these cases it is important to remember to enable the send again
once the test is complete.

12.4.2 Enable Simulate

This allows enabling or disabling of the simulating of the data block. For test
purposes, particularly in large part programs, individual data blocks can be disabled
for the simulation to provide an uncluttered display. This is useful when using
double head markers.

12.4.3 Pause Command

This allows the sending of a pause command at the end of the selected data block.
The pause command halts the program and the Start button on the control console
flashes. Marking continues when the operator presses the Start button again. The
introduction of the pause command allows possible operator intervention in the
middle of the marking of a part program.

12.4.4 Backdrop

This allows the selected data block to act as a backdrop. The backdrop is used for
positioning the data blocks with respect to a possible representation of the
workpiece. The backdrop appears in blue in the simulation window. The backdrop
is not marked, it is for simulation only. When this option is selected the Enable
Send is automatically disabled.

159 Document No: QP00033 Issue: H

 Scrîba 3 Software Programming Manual Issue H
12.4.5 Lock Position

This allows the particular data block to be locked in position. This is useful so that
the data block cannot be moved inadvertently whilst dragging and dropping other
data blocks in the Simulation Window.

12.4.6 Include in Box

This feature is only available the following data blocks: Text line, Text Ring, Logo,
3DI, Data Matrix, Barcode, RSS-14 and Picture. This is used to include or exclude
the block when generating the coordinates for the box program. The default is set to
Yes.

12.5 Special-to-Type Properties

Figure 12.8 Text Line Special Properties

One or two examples of special-to-type properties are shown below. More detailed
information on these properties are described in the relevant sections.

12.5.1 Repeat (all data blocks)

This property repeats the marking pattern defined in the data block the specified
number of times. The default value is 0.

160 Document No: QP00033 Issue: H

 Scrîba 3 Software Programming Manual Issue H
12.5.2 Scale (Text, Picture, Logo and Barcode data blocks)

The Scale property is a scale factor for the contents of the data block which enlarges
or reduces the size of the marked information. At a scale factor of 1.000 (default
value), the part program is marked at a 1:1 ratio. At a scale factor of 0.500, the
marked image is half the size of the programmed image. If the scale factor is 2.000,
the marked image is twice the original size.

12.5.3 Scale Repeat

Figure 12.9 Scale Repeat Property

The scale repeat property (Figure 12.9) functions much the same as the X repeat, Y
repeat and Angle repeat properties. When a scale repeat value of one or more is
entered, the logo image will repeat itself, each repeat being scaled by the value within
the Scale property. The values in Figure 12.9 were applied to a 25mm square, the
results are shown in Figure 12.10

Figure 12.10 Scale Repeats

161 Document No: QP00033 Issue: H

 Scrîba 3 Software Programming Manual Issue H
12.5.4 X Slant

The Slant property defines the amount of slant in degrees that the text or logo will
have. A positive angle produces a slant to the right and a negative angle produces a
slant to the left. The range for the Slant property is -60° to 60°, with the default value
of zero. In the logo data block the precision is to one decimal place eg. 22.5.

12.6 All Properties

Figure 12.11 All Properties

In this mode all the properties are shown in a single window and can be accessed
using the scroll bar. The order of the properties is Positional, Control, Laser and
Special-to-Type.

162 Document No: QP00033 Issue: H

 Scrîba 3 Software Programming Manual Issue H

12.7 Edit Window

Edit Window
Figure 12.12 Edit Window

The Edit Window is used to enter the textual information for each data block. This
area exists for all data blocks except for Picture, Motion, Step Repeat and Step End
data blocks. Type in the text as required. The normal Windows cut and paste
functionality is available in this Edit window.

163 Document No: QP00033 Issue: H

 Scrîba 3 Software Programming Manual Issue H

12.8 Global Change

12.8.1 Implementing Global Change

This is used to change selected properties across many data blocks. For instance you
may wish to increase the power for all data blocks because there has been a drop off
in power of the laser due to ageing.

If multiple data blocks are selected, the Global Properties Tab will be enabled in the
Properties Window instead of the Block Properties.

Figure 12.13 Implementing global changes

Only the properties in common with the selected data blocks are listed in the Global
Properties Tab.

Any property change in Global Properties Tab will affect all the selected data
blocks.

164 Document No: QP00033 Issue: H

 Scrîba 3 Software Programming Manual Issue H

13
Section 13: Text Programming
In this section:
13.1 Text Line Properties
13.1.1 Justification
13.1.2 Vertical Justification
13.1.3 Slant
13.1.4 Aspect Ratio
13.1.5 Font
13.1.6 Unicode
13.1.7 Text Input Language
13.1.8 Filled Font
13.1.9 No Outline
13.1.10 Height
13.1.11 Line Separation
13.1.12 Character Separation
13.1.13 Part Radius or Part Diameter (Rotary)
13.1.14 Reset Zero Degrees (Rotary)
13.1.15 Start Angle (Rotary)
13.1.16 Optimise (Rotary)
13.1.17 Use Largest Character Size
13.1.18 Send Rotary Commands
13.1.19 Y Slant
13.2 Text Ring Additional Properties
13.2.1 Direction
13.2.2 Justification
13.2.3 Vertical Justification
13.3 Text Justification
13.3.1 Left Justified (Counter Clockwise Justified)
13.3.2 Right Justified (Clockwise Justified)
13.3.3 Centre Justified
13.3.4 Text Fills
13.3.4.1 Text Fills Additional Properties
13.4 Text Line Programming
13.4.1 Text Line Example 1
13.4.2 Text Line Example 2
13.5 Marking Rotary Text
13.5.1 Optimise
13.6 Text Ring Programming
13.6.1 Text Ring Example
13.7 Special Character Marking
13.7.1 Special Character Marking – {}[]~
13.8 Pen Set-up
13.9 File Input
13.10 Serialisation
13.11 Variable Text Fields
13.12 Date and Time Using the On Board Real Time Clock

165 Document No: QP00033 Issue: H

 Scrîba 3 Software Programming Manual Issue H

Text Programming
The Electrox laser marker can mark alphanumeric characters along a straight line
or around an arc. This section explains the selections that are unique to Text
Line and Text Ring programming and provides instructions and examples of
each.

*Note that the number of characters per line is limited to a maximum of 190.

13.1 Text Line Properties

Figure 13.1 Text Line Special Properties

13.1.1 Justification

This sets the horizontal justification of the text within the data block relative to the X
Position programmed in the data block.
For the Text Line data blocks these properties are left, centred, right and text fills.
For the Text Ring data blocks these properties are clockwise, centre, counter
clockwise and text fills.

166 Document No: QP00033 Issue: H

 Scrîba 3 Software Programming Manual Issue H

13.1.2 Vertical Justification

This sets the vertical justification of the text within the data block relative to the Y
Position programmed in the data block. Figure 13.2 demonstrates all of the settings
for vertical justification in a text line data block.

Figure 13.2 Vertical Justification

The crosshair axis drawn with each text line data block shows that data blocks X and
Y positions as set via the property inspector.

The possible settings for vertical justification are as follows:

Normal: The bottom of the first line of text in the data block will be positioned
at the Y position specified (fourth column in Figure 13.2).

Top: The top of the first line of text in the data block will be positioned at
the Y position specified (first column in Figure 13.2).

Centre: The centre point of all lines of text combined will be positioned at the
Y position specified (second column in Figure 13.2).

Bottom: The bottom of the last line of text in the data block will be positioned
at the Y position specified (third column in Figure 13.2).

167 Document No: QP00033 Issue: H

 Scrîba 3 Software Programming Manual Issue H

13.1.3 Slant

The Slant is the angular slant of the text. The range of the slant value is -60 to +60
and this specifies the slant in degrees. A positive slant, slants to the right and a
negative slant, slants to the left.

Figure 13.3 Slanted Text

13.1.4 Aspect Ratio

The Aspect Ratio is the ratio of character height to character width. An aspect ratio
of 1.000 (default value) indicates that the width of the widest letter is equal to the
programmed height of the letter. A value smaller than 1.000 produces narrower
characters and a value larger than 1.000 produces wider characters.

13.1.5 Font

The Font property specifies a font by the number assigned to it. There are 20 valid
font numbers. Fonts 1 and 2 are the standard Scrîba fonts which reside in the marker
software. Font 1 is variously known as Helvetica or OCR-B and Font 2 is OCR-A
(Optical Character Recognition, a machine-readable / human-readable font). The
remaining eighteen fonts, font 3 to font 19, are undefined and may be used in
conjunction with character definitions (Section 14.6) or with optionally available
fonts (Section 6.8). Font 20 is reserved for RSS-14 encoding. The default value for
this property is font 1.

13.1.6 Unicode

Set the Unicode property to Yes if the font to be used is a Unicode font. Note that
Unicode is implemented for text lines only.

13.1.7 Text Input Language

Use this property to select the language in which the text is to be entered. If Unicode
is set to Yes and a Unicode font is selected then other languages may well be
available; for example Simplified Chinese (GB2312). The text can be entered in
any of three ways. Firstly, the text is entered in the normal way if the keyboard is
capable of that script. Secondly, the text can be pasted into the text area from an
application like Notepad or Wordpad. Thirdly the text can be entered by using the
Unicode character value if known. This can be found from within the Unicode Font

168 Document No: QP00033 Issue: H

 Scrîba 3 Software Programming Manual Issue H
Maker – see section 10.2. If the Unicode decimal number for the required character is
known it can be entered on any keyboard by holding down the Alt key whilst the
character’s number is typed. For example, hold down the Alt key whilst typing 22333
on the numeric keypad produces the character .

13.1.8 Filled Font

When an optional outline font is used (font 3-20) clicking this button automatically
fills the text in that data block when marked, using default properties. The font fill
properties can be adjusted in a Direct Command data block by using the Penset
command.

13.1.9 No Outline

This property is only enabled when the Filled Font property is set to Yes. When this
property is set to Yes, the font outline is disabled allowing only the fill lines to be
marked.

13.1.10 Height

The Height of the text or the bar code is programmed in this field. The range is
0.254 mm to 76 mm (.010" to 3.000") with the default value at 2 mm (.075").

13.1.11 Line Separation

The Line Separation property sets the vertical spacing between lines of text. Line
spacing is expressed as a percentage of character height. Changes in the character
height produce corresponding changes in the vertical spacing without modification
of the Line Separation value. The range for this property is 0% to 1000%, with 50%
as the default value.

13.1.12 Character Separation

The Character Separation property sets the horizontal spacing (leading) between
characters. Horizontal spacing is a percentage of the character width. Changes in
the character height or the aspect ratio produce corresponding changes in the
horizontal spacing without modification of the Character Separation value. The
default value is 25%, with a range of +/- 100% available. If a value of 0% is
entered, the software assumes a ‘mono-spacing’ mode, where each character and the
space after it take the same amount of space, regardless of the width of the character.

Take care when using large negative values of Character Separation, if the Character
Separation modification takes the start of the current character past the start of the
previous character then errors will occur.

169 Document No: QP00033 Issue: H

 Scrîba 3 Software Programming Manual Issue H

13.1.13 Part Radius or Part Diameter (Rotary)

This sets the radius or diameter of the part to be marked in millimetres or inches
depending on the units selected in the preferences. If the radius or diameter is
given as zero no rotary actions are performed. The maximum value is 132mm or 5.2
inches. When the Part Radius or Part Diameter is set to zero the other rotary
functions are disabled. Whether this property is called Part Radius or Part Diameter
depends on the status of the file preference Use Part Radius.

13.1.14 Reset Zero Degrees (Rotary)

Reset Zero Degrees resets the current position of the rotary axis to be zero degrees.
This is used mainly when the home switch is not in use with the rotary axis. This is
not available if the Part Radius is set to zero.

13.1.15 Start Angle (Rotary)

Start Angle is the angle of the rotary axis at which the marking is going to begin.
This is not available if the Part Radius is set to zero. Values between +/-360 are
valid.

13.1.16 Optimise (Rotary)

This is used when marking text around a cylinder to optimise the rotary axis
movements between the characters being marked. This is not available if the Part
Radius is set to zero.

13.1.17 Use Largest Character Size

This property causes the text to resize itself so that the largest character is exactly
the height specified by the height property of the data block, it causes the text to be
offset so that none of the characters extend beyond the specified boundaries implied
by the X, Y and Justification properties. (see the example without this property
applied in Figure 13.3 and with this property applied in Figure 13.4).

Figure 13.3 Property Not Applied

Figure 13.4 Property Applied

170 Document No: QP00033 Issue: H

 Scrîba 3 Software Programming Manual Issue H
This property is useful where a font contains characters that go beyond the standard
bounding box for a character in a font.

NOTE: This property will not work with Text Fills justification.

13.1.18 Send Rotary Commands

This property allows the rotary commands to be sent automatically or not. By

default these commands are sent. In some circumstances where this could interfere
with other rotary commands these can be turned off.

13.1.19 Y Slant

This property slants the individual characters or vector files in the Y direction in a
similar manner as the existing slant property does in the X direction.

Figure 13.5 Y Slant

171 Document No: QP00033 Issue: H

 Scrîba 3 Software Programming Manual Issue H

13.2 Text Ring Additional Properties

Figure 13.6 Text Ring Special Properties

13.2.1 Direction

The Direction of the Text Ring can be specified as clockwise or counter clockwise.
If clockwise is specified then the bottom of the text is nearer the centre of the ring –
the bottom left corner of the first line of text is at the X and Y coordinates specified
by the X Position and Y Position. If counter clockwise is specified then the bottom
of the text is furthest away from the centre of the ring – the top left corner of the
first line of text is at the X and Y coordinates specified by the X Position and Y
Position.

13.2.2 Justification

The justification can be specified as counter clockwise, centre, clockwise or sized.

172 Document No: QP00033 Issue: H

 Scrîba 3 Software Programming Manual Issue H

13.2.3 Vertical Justification

Vertical Justification is used to alter the position of the text in the data block relative
to the Y Position programmed in the data block. Figure 13.7 demonstrates all of the
settings for vertical justification in a text ring data block.

Figure 13.7 Vertical Justification

The crosshair axis drawn with each text ring data block shows that data blocks X
and Y positions as set via the property inspector.

The possible settings for vertical justification are as follows:

Normal: The bottom of the first line of text in the data block will be positioned at
the Y position specified (fourth column in Figure 13.7).

Top: The top of the first line of text in the data block will be positioned at the Y
position specified (first column in Figure 13.7).

Centre: The centre point of all lines of text combined will be positioned at the Y
position specified (second column in Figure 13.7).

Bottom: The bottom of the last line of text in the data block will be positioned
at the Y position specified (third column in Figure 13.7).

173 Document No: QP00033 Issue: H

 Scrîba 3 Software Programming Manual Issue H

13.3 Text Justification

13.3.1 Left Justified (Counter Clockwise Justified)

When the Left Justify button is pressed in a Text Line data block, the text line is
positioned with the lower left edge of the first line of text at the X, Y coordinates
specified in the data block window. When programming a Text Ring data block,
selecting the counter clockwise Justification button positions the lower edge of
the first line of text in a counter clockwise direction at the X, Y coordinates
specified in the data block window.

Figure 13.8 Text Line, Figure 13.9 Text Ring,

Left Justified Counter Clockwise Justified

13.3.2 Right Justified (Clockwise Justified)

When the Right Justify button is pressed in a Text Line data block, the text line
is positioned with the lower right edge of the first line of text at the X, Y co-
ordinates specified in the data block window.When programming a Text Ring
data block, selecting the clockwise Justification positions the lower edge of the
first line of text in a clockwise direction at the X, Y co-ordinates specified in the
data block window.

Figure 13.10 Text Line, Figure 13.11 Text Ring,

Right Justified Clockwise Justified

174 Document No: QP00033 Issue: H

 Scrîba 3 Software Programming Manual Issue H

13.3.3 Centre Justified

When Centre Justified is selected in a Text Line or Text Ring data block the
lower edge of the first line of text is centred around the X, Y coordinates
specified in the data block properties window.

Figure 13.12 Text Line, Figure 13.13 Text Ring,

Centre Justified Centre Justified

13.3.4 Text Fills

When the Text Fills justification option is selected, the lower edge of the first
character of the text line or ring is positioned at the X, Y coordinates
programmed into the X Position and Y Position properties. The last character of
the text line or ring is positioned at the X, Y coordinates programmed into the X
End and Y End properties.

If more than one line of text is entered each line will be marked the same length.
The aspect ratio of the characters in the text line is determined in the software
when the Fills option is used, therefore the Aspect Ratio property is not available
for modification. The Fills option is available in both Text Line and Text Ring
data blocks.

Figure 13.14 Text Line - Text Fills

175 Document No: QP00033 Issue: H

 Scrîba 3 Software Programming Manual Issue H

13.3.4.1 Text Fills Additional Properties

When Text Fills justification is selected two additional properties are enabled:
Expand Text to Fill and Text Fills Justification.
If the Expand to Fill property is set to No, then any text that will naturally fit into the
area specified by the X End and Y End properties will not be stretched to fill the
area. If the Expand to Fill property is set to Yes, then any text will be stretched or
shrunk to fit the area specified by the X End and Y End properties.
The Text Fill Justification property is enabled only when the Expand to Fill property
is set to No. This property allows the justification of the unchanged text within the
area specified by the X End and Y End properties.

Figure 13.15 Text Fills Justification

The results of the examples given below are shown in Figure 13.1:
Example 1:
Expand Text to Fill set to No.
Example 2:
Expand Text to Fill is set to Yes.
Text Fills Justification is set to Left.
Example 3:
Expand Text to Fill is set to Yes.
Text Fills Justification is set to Centre.
Example 4:
Expand Text to Fill is set to Yes.
Text Fills Justification is set to Right.

176 Document No: QP00033 Issue: H

 Scrîba 3 Software Programming Manual Issue H

13.4 Text Line Programming

The following is a step-by-step procedure for programming Text Lines.

1. Select Text Line from the Data Block menu or toolbar.

2. Select the justification in the data block window. Remember that the
positioning of the text is from the lower edge of the first line.

3. Enter the X Position and Y Position coordinates for the location of the first
line of text in the data block properties window. If the Fills option is
selected, enter the X End and Y End coordinates.

4. Also available in the data block window are the X Offset, Y Offset, Scale,
Angle, properties.

5. Set the laser beam properties in the data block properties window.

6. Set the character formatting (e.g. line and character separation) in the data
block properties window.

7. Enter the text information to be marked in the Edit window.

8. After about two seconds the text will begin to appear in the simulation
window. If any one the characters does not exist in the selected font the text
will be coloured red. If the font selected has not been loaded for simulation
or downloaded to the marker then no text will appear in the simulation
window at all.

9. If the Text Line simulates as expected, the file can then be downloaded to
the marker and executed or saved to disk.

177 Document No: QP00033 Issue: H

 Scrîba 3 Software Programming Manual Issue H

13.4.1 Text Line Example 1

Example 1: Left justified text line data block, positioned at X -20.000,Y -10.000

Figure 13.16 Text Line Left Justified at 0°

13.4.2 Text Line Example 2

Example 2: Centre justified text line located at X 0.000,Y 0.000 with an angle of 45°

Figure 13.17 Text Line Centre Justified at 45°

178 Document No: QP00033 Issue: H

 Scrîba 3 Software Programming Manual Issue H

13.5 Marking Rotary Text

You can use the rotary feature of Scriba 3 Software for marking text along or around a
curved surface. In order to be able to access the rotary feature the ‘Rotary Enable’
option must be turned in the Application Preferences.
The properties which control rotary marking are detailed earlier in Section 13.1.
These are Part Radius, Reset Zero Degrees, Start Angle and Optimise.

When marking along the axis of a cylinder set the Angle value in the data block to
zero. The marker will then mark the first line then rotate the cylinder by the correct
angle bringing the new position to the top and mark the second line and so on. Note
that the marking is only executed whilst the cylinder is stationary. No marking is
done whilst the axis is moving.

When marking around the axis of a cylinder set the Angle value in the data block to
90. Again the motor will step round for each letter in turn. Marking is only executed
whilst the cylinder is stationary.

For a helical mark around the cylinder choose an angle value between zero and 90
degrees.

Note: For the rotary to operate correctly the marker must already have been set up
using the ‘Rotary Set-up’ command, see Section 7.13.

13.5.1 Optimise

Hello
World

Figure 13.18 Rotary Text

Figure 13.17 shows a representation of a pen with two lines of text marked around it.
When marking this text without optimisation, ‘Hello’ is marked first with the pen
rotating followed by ‘World’. When optimisation is switched on the order of marking
is changed. Optimising tries to minimise the amount of rotation that is needed in
order the mark the given words. It does this by calculating which letter on each line is
closest to the current marking position. The majority of fonts are proportional, that is
the size of each letter in the font can vary.

Hello
World
179 Document No: QP00033 Issue: H
 Scrîba 3 Software Programming Manual Issue H
You can see from the above text that not each of the five letters in the first word
corresponds to the position of the equivalent letter in the second. Therefore the order
of the mark will be defined by which letters are closest to the start point for the mark,
in this example the order would be:

H e ll o
W o r ld

If serialisation is to be used with this property turned on, monospaced characters

must be used (horizontal separation set to zero).

13.6 Text Ring Programming

The following is a step-by-step procedure for programming Text Rings.

1. Select Text Ring the Data Block menu or toolbar.

2. Select the justification in the data block window. Remember that the
positioning of the text is from the lower edge of the first line.

3. Enter the X Position and Y Position coordinates for the location of the first
line of text in the data block window. If the Text Fills option is selected,
enter the X End and Y End coordinates.

4. Enter the X Centre and Y Centre coordinates for the centre of the arc of the
text. The radius of the arc is the difference between the X/Y Position and
the X/Y Centre coordinates.

5. Also available in the data block window are the X Offset, Y Offset, Scale,
Angle, properties.

6. Set the laser beam properties in the data block properties window.

7. Set the character formatting (eg line and character separation) in the data
block properties window.

8. Enter the text information that is to be marked in the Edit window.

9. After about two seconds the text will begin to appear in the simulation
window. If any one the characters does not exist in the selected font the text
will be coloured red. If the font selected has not been loaded for simulation
or downloaded to the marker then no text will appear in the simulation
window at all.

10. If the Text Line simulates as expected, the file can then be downloaded to
the marker and executed or saved to disk.

180 Document No: QP00033 Issue: H

 Scrîba 3 Software Programming Manual Issue H
13.6.1 Text Ring Example

Example:A CW Text Ring, centre justified at X 0.000, Y 0.000 with the centre at X
0.000, Y -20.000 (20 mm radius).

Figure 13.19 Clockwise Text Ring – Centre Justified

181 Document No: QP00033 Issue: H

 Scrîba 3 Software Programming Manual Issue H

13.7 Special Character Marking

13.7.1 Special Character Marking – {}[]~

The above characters are used by the Scriba3 software as control characters for
serialisation and file input. If you wish to actually mark these then the following
special procedure will be needed.

To mark these special bracket characters in a text data block precede them with a ‘\’
character.

 So if you wished to mark the following text:-

Hello {World}

The text in the Text data block would be as follows

Hello \{World\}

 Auto Serialisation requires you to insert the following text

{\A\}

If you wanted to mark the literal ‘{\A\}’ you would use

\{\\A\\\}

NOTE: For this function to work correctly, the appropriate bracket characters must
be available in the specified font.

The tilde character ‘~’ is a reserved character that is used during the serialisation
process. If you wish to mark this character you can do this by placing it inside the
square brackets thus [~]. When the file is sent to the marker the Text Substitution
screen will appear as for serialisation (see Section 18.1 for further details) and the
tilde will be marked as long as it exists in the font that is in use. The tilde does not
exist in font2.

182 Document No: QP00033 Issue: H

 Scrîba 3 Software Programming Manual Issue H

13.8 Pen Set-up

Figure 13.20 Pen Set-up

Use Block Pen Set-up: Set this to “Yes” to enable the other three properties, there
is a reason to keep this switched to “No” which will be
explained later.

Distance from Edge: This is the distance from the edge of the filled shape at
which fill lines will start to be drawn.

Fill Increment: This is the distance between fill lines.

Fill Direction: This is the direction in which the fill is processed, either
Vertical or Horizontal.

NOTE: These properties are special in that they will not only apply to the data block
they belong to, but also to any subsequent data blocks too! The best practice to
avoid this is to set the next text data blocks fill properties back to the default. (Figure
13.19)

13.9 File Input

Alphanumeric lists may be imported into a Text Line or Text Ring data block. This
is usually known as mail merge. Refer to Section 18.3 on File input programming
for more information.

13.10 Serialisation
Text Line and Text Ring data blocks can be serialised using the Scrîba 3 software.
Refer to Sections 18.1 and 18.2 for more information on serialisation.

13.11 Variable Text Fields

Text Line and Text Ring data blocks can use variable text fields. Refer to Section
18.4 for more information on variable text fields.

183 Document No: QP00033 Issue: H

 Scrîba 3 Software Programming Manual Issue H

13.12 Date and Time Using the On Board Real Time Clock
The date and time can be used from the marker’s own real time clock which must
have been set up first (see the relevant system manual for how this is done).
The following table shows the various options that are available:

Code Option
D Day 01 to 31
H Hours 00 to 23
h Hours 01 to 12
I Minutes 00 to 59
B Abbreviated month name JAN, FEB to DEC
b Month 01 to 12
Q AM or PM
S Seconds 00 to 59
T Hours, minutes and seconds in the format HH:MM:SS
Y Full year (4 digits) eg 2010
y Short year (2 digits) eg 10
V Week number 01 to 53 (ISO version) – 2 digits
v Week number 1 to 53 (ISO version) - 1 or 2 digits
U Week number 01 to 53 (UK/US version) – 2 digits
u Week number 1 to 53 (UK/US version) - 1 or 2 digits
K Day of the week MONDAY, TUESDAY to SUNDAY
k Abbreviated day of the week MON, TUE to SUN
J Day of the year 001 to 365 – 3 digits
j Day of the year 1 to 365 – 1, 2 or 3 digits

To use the above they must be entered in the following format within the text area of
the text line data block: for example if the day number is to be marked enter \\D\\.
For day, month and year this will be \\D\\\\b\\\\y\\.

Note that use of the above will not show the expected information in the simulation
window. This is because the interpretation is done directly at the marker and not by
Scriba 3.

184 Document No: QP00033 Issue: H

 Scrîba 3 Software Programming Manual Issue H

14
Section 14: Vector Graphics Programming

In this section:
14.1 Adding a Logo Data Block
14.2 Vector File Generation
14.2.1 Plot Files (PLT Files)
14.2.2 Adobe™ Illustrator PostScript Files (AI Files)
14.2.3 Important Note on .PLT and .AI files
14.2.4 DXF Files
14.2.5 PNL Files
14.3 Logo Properties
14.3.1 Justification
14.3.2 File Name
14.3.3 Fill
14.3.4 Size
14.3.5 File Clipping
14.3.5.1 Relative Clipping
14.3.5.2 Absolute Clipping
14.3.6 Outline Only Repeat
14.3.7 Advanced Repeat
14.3.8 Maintain Fill Parameters
14.3.9 Reset Part Radius
14.3.10 Mirror and Flip
14.3.11 Maintain Aspect Behaviour
14.3.12 Auto Centre Imported Logos
14.3.13 DXF Layers
14.4 Point to Point Logo Programming (PNLs – Points’n’Lines)
14.4.1 P Command
14.4.2 L Command
14.4.3 R Command
14.4.4 CW and CCW Commands
14.4.5 BZV Command
14.4.6 Pause Command
14.4.7 Simple Logo Examples
14.4.8 Comments
14.4.9 PNL Syntax Error detection
14.4.10 Point to Point Programming Procedure
14.5 ScribaDraw
14.5.1 Main Window
14.5.2 Main Menus
14.5.2.1 File Menu
14.5.2.2 Edit Menu
14.5.2.3 Units Menu
14.5.2.4 Options Menu
14.5.3 Drawing Shapes
14.5.3.1 Line
14.5.3.2 Rectangle
14.5.3.3 Circle

185 Document No: QP00033 Issue: H

 Scrîba 3 Software Programming Manual Issue H
14.5.3.4 Arc
14.5.3.5 Bezier Curve
14.6 Font Character Generation
14.7 Bitmap to Vector Conversion
14.8 Tiling a Logo
14.8.1 Rotary Tiling
14.8.2 Linear Tiling
14.8.3 On-The-Fly Tiling
14.8.4 Linear Tiling – User Defined

186 Document No: QP00033 Issue: H

 Scrîba 3 Software Programming Manual Issue H

Vector Graphics Programming

The Electrox laser marker is capable of reproducing virtually any point-to-point
(vector) graphics created by several commercially available graphics software
packages, including AutoCAD, CorelDRAW and Adobe™ Illustrator.

The Scriba3 software can directly import vector graphics files in either of three
popular formats. These are EPS, Encapsulated Post Script which is a subset of Post
Script (used by Adobe™ Illustrator) (*.AI), a subset of HPGL2, Hewlett-Packard
Graphics Language (used by any CAD package that has a plotter output capability)
(*.PLT) and a subset of the Data Interchange Format (exported by most CAD
packages) (*.DXF).

All types of files contain ASCII character commands followed by a pair of numbers
to indicate the positions of the beginning and ending points (coordinates) of the
segment being defined. A series of these character commands and number pairs
create a logo, text or other graphic.

Simple logos may be programmed via the keyboard using the P, L, CW, CCW and
BZV commands in a Logo data block. However, most logos and text graphics are
too complicated to achieve good programming results from manually entering the
co-ordinates of each line or arc segment. Even simple graphics can be time-
consuming to determine the correct co-ordinates. Graphics can be created very
simply and in a relatively small amount of time by using software specifically made
for graphics generation and importing the resulting file into the part program.

The Scriba 3 software converts the EPS, HPGL or DXF ASCII commands to the
Logo commands (P x, y and L x, y) that are used in manually programming a vector
graphic with the software.

Knowledge of the use of graphics generation packages such as Adobe™ Illustrator,

CorelDRAW or AutoCAD is assumed. Refer to the manuals accompanying these
software packages for complete information on the use of those programs.

187 Document No: QP00033 Issue: H

 Scrîba 3 Software Programming Manual Issue H

14.1 Adding a Logo Data Block

Select Logo Block from the DataBlock – Add menu or the DataBlock toolbar. A
standard FileOpen dialog box will appear from which can be selected the file (*.AI,
*.PLT, *.PNL, *.DXF) to import. If no file is to be used then click the Cancel
button. This is useful when a simple manual logo is to be entered (see Section 14.4
– Point to Point Logo Programming (PNLs)).

Figure 14.1 Logo Data Block Special Properties

14.2 Vector File Generation

When a file is imported into the Scriba 3 part program, the file itself does not
become part of the program; the location, or path name, of the file becomes part of
the program.
In order to use the file in the Scrîba 3 part program, it must be accessible by the
Scrîba 3 software. The file must reside at the location defined in the part program.
If the location changes (i.e., the file is copied to a different disk or the file name,
folder name or disk name is changed) the location defined in the part program must
be changed accordingly.

188 Document No: QP00033 Issue: H

 Scrîba 3 Software Programming Manual Issue H

14.2.1 Plot Files (PLT Files)

AutoCAD is one of the most popular vector graphics generation programs for the
PC. Refer to the user's manual supplied with the software for information on using
AutoCAD to generate graphics.

There are a few considerations which must be met in order to correctly export from
AutoCAD to the Scrîba software, namely the type of file and the desired fill pattern.
The artwork must be saved as a PLOT file, usually designated by the extension *.plt.

Other formats will not be read by the Scrîba 3 software. If a file is supplied in
another format, there are commercially available software programs which can
convert it to a plot file, or it can be converted by opening the file in AutoCAD and
re-saving as a plot file.

If the marked image is to be filled, this may be accomplished in the AutoCAD file
by hatching, as would normally be done when plotting the file on a plotter.
However, the size of the marked graphics, the width of the laser beam and the
material being marked must be considered so the fill lines can be properly spaced. It
is usually better to leave the AutoCAD graphic unfilled and use the Scrîba 3
software commands to fill the graphic. In this case, it is important to make sure that
the beginning and end points of an image are connected (i.e., a closed shape) so that
the Fill program in the Scrîba 3 software recognises a fillable area.

Once the AutoCAD file has been saved as a plot file, the file is ready to be used in a
Scrîba 3 part program.

14.2.2 Adobe™ Illustrator PostScript Files (AI Files)

Adobe™ Illustrator is a very popular graphics generation program for PCs.

Although the software is very complex and can employ a wide range of graphics
capability, complete knowledge of the software is not required to create most
graphics used with the Scrîba software. Illustrator can be used by itself to create
‘freehand’ drawings of the desired logo, or used in conjunction with a page scanner,
which provides a dot matrix template, or pattern, from which to create the vector
graphics. If using a late version of Adobe Illustrator then the file must be saved as a
legacy file at release eight.

If a page scanner is used, the original artwork that is scanned should be as high in
quality as possible. Camera-ready artwork is ideal; however, good scans can be
made from lesser-quality artwork. Many scanner software packages (usually sold
with the scanner) have built-in compensation for poor quality original artwork.
There are many page scanners available: A high resolution (600 dpi or better) grey
scale scanner that can save to a TIF file format is ideal for creating graphics for laser
marking (see Section 16 – Raster Graphics).

After scanning the artwork to a TIF file, Adobe™ Illustrator may be opened and the
file can be used as a template. The graphics are then outlined using the tools
provided on the Illustrator screen. Note that any shading or fill patterns that are used

189 Document No: QP00033 Issue: H

 Scrîba 3 Software Programming Manual Issue H
in the Illustrator file will be ignored by the Scrîba software. If the graphics are to be
filled when marked, this is best done in the Scrîba software, not in the Illustrator
program. It is important to make sure that beginning and end points of an image
actually meet and are grouped properly when the Fill Editor is used in the Scrîba
software.

When using text in the Adobe™ Illustrator file, the standard text will not import
properly to the Scrîba 3 part program. The text must be converted to outline form in
the Illustrator file before importing to the Scrîba software. This is done under the
Text menu in Illustrator by selecting the "Create Outlines" command.

After generating the graphics, the file is saved as an .AI file and is then ready to be
imported into the Scriba 3 part program.

14.2.3 Important Note on .PLT and .AI files

It is important for the user to be aware of some of the inaccuracies of various files
produced by third parties. The Scriba 3 software believes the information it is
given.

PLT files produced by AutoCAD versions 12, 13 and 14 are 1.5% larger than
expected.

PLT files produced by Corel Draw version 4 are 1.6% smaller than expected.

AI files produced by Adobe Illustrator version 4.1 come out smaller by two to three
points as Illustrator always defines its bounding box bigger by this amount, this
bounding box is used by the Scriba 3 software. It is also for this reason that the
same graphic drawn in Corel Draw and Adobe Illustrator, the resulting mark from
the imported AI file will always be smaller than that produced from the PLT file.

14.2.4 DXF Files

Images created as DXFs should be created at AutoCad release 12. When a DXF file
is imported two additional properties are enabled: Font and Character Separation.
When DXF files are created with text inserted, this text can be exported as a graphic
or as text. If it has been exported as text the Scriba 3 software defaults to using Font
1 for the exported text. Another font can be selected using this property. The
Character Separation property acts in the same way as it does for text line data
blocks on any text that is embedded within the imported DXF file.

Note: The font must be converted to the Electrox proprietary format (*.elf) before it
will be displayed or marked (see section 10.1 for font conversion).

When a DXF file is selected for a Logo data block two additional dialogs appear first
in sequence. The first allows the user to select which layers within the DXF file are
to be imported (Figure 14.2). All layers selected are then shown in the Logo data
block Special properties – DXF Layers. Only those selected will be shown. By
default all layers are selected. The second allows the user to select in which units

190 Document No: QP00033 Issue: H

 Scrîba 3 Software Programming Manual Issue H
the DXF file is to be interpreted. This is because most DXF files are created without
the units defined within the file (Figure 14.3).

Figure 14.2 Layer Selection for Imported DXF Files

Figure 14.3 Display Units for Imported DXF Files

The commands supported in the DXF file format are listed in Appendix A.

14.2.5 PNL Files

The PNL file format is an Electrox proprietary format based upon the HPGL format
above. This is a text file containing vector information which can be created by
hand (see Section 14.4 - Point-to-Point Logo Programming for more detailed
information).

191 Document No: QP00033 Issue: H

 Scrîba 3 Software Programming Manual Issue H

14.3 Logo Properties

14.3.1 Justification

The Logo image can be justified both vertically and horizontally as shown in Figure
14.4. Each image is justified to each of the nine crosses giving top-left, top-centre,
top-right, centre-left, centre-centre, centre-right, bottom-left, bottom-centre and
bottom-right positions.

Left Centre Right

Top

Centre

Bottom

Figure 14.4 Logo Data Block Justification

14.3.2 File Name

This is the file name that was loaded when the data block was created. This can be
changed at any time. Be aware that if a new file is imported any fill data for the
current data block will be lost.

14.3.3 Fill

Select this option to open the Fill Editor which provides a series of fills and editing
capabilities for the imported image (see Section 15 for more details).

192 Document No: QP00033 Issue: H

 Scrîba 3 Software Programming Manual Issue H

14.3.4 Size

The Size command allows the resizing of the original artwork file when it is
imported (before using the Scale property on the software screen), as well as the
position of the logo within the marking field. If the Size command is not used, the
initial size of an imported file is shown at the size it was created at originally in the
CAD application.
When the Size command is selected from the Data Block Properties window the
dialog window is displayed (Figure 14.5). If the Clear button is clicked the imported
image is loaded without any size adjustment whatsoever.

Figure 14.5 Size Dialog Window

When a Logo data block is created in the Simulation Window using the selection
from the Data Block Toolbar (drag and drop operation), the Mark Size Dialog can be
enabled to popup automatically or not after the file name has been selected (see
section 3.11.2.25).
When Enabled the Mark Size dialog pops up automatically as soon as the mouse left
button is released during the drag and drop operation. The new Width and Height
values to specify the Data Block size can then be entered explicitly.
If disabled the Logo Data Block is created as normal without the Mark Size dialog
appearing.
Enter the required width and height and click OK.

The Maintain Aspect command can now come into play. This can provide two
differing results on the original imported image as shown below in Figures 14.6 and
14.7.

Figure 14.6 Maintain Aspect Ratio set to Yes

193 Document No: QP00033 Issue: H

 Scrîba 3 Software Programming Manual Issue H
The aspect ratio of the imported file is maintained. The shortest edge of the
rectangular shape is set to the 25mm (from the above example) and the longer edge
is lengthened or shortened to maintain the aspect ratio.

Figure 14.7 Maintain Aspect Ratio set to No

Here the aspect ratio of the imported file is not maintained and here the graphic is
shrunk or stretched to fit the 25mm size constraints.

*Note that in Adobe™ Illustrator to smooth arcs in the marked image, the Size
command may be used to enlarge the original file, thus creating additional line
segments in the original arcs. The Scale, X and Y properties in the data block
window are then used to scale and position the logo. The number of line segments
in the arcs is increased in the scaled logo, thus making the arc appear smoother.

14.3.5 File Clipping

Once a file has been imported it can be clipped to the required size. This can be
done by selecting the File Clipping property which displays the File Clipping Dialog
as shown in Figure 14.8. Enter the clipping coordinates as required and select
relative or absolute. Relative is the most common.

Figure 14.8 File Clipping Dialog

194 Document No: QP00033 Issue: H

 Scrîba 3 Software Programming Manual Issue H
Any invalid input data will cause the following warning dialog box to appear as
shown in Figure 14.9. Invalid data is when the bottom is above the top or when the
right parameter is to the left of the left parameter or all properties are left at zero.

Figure 14.9 Invalid Clip

Note that if the clipping rectangle totally encompasses the logo then no clipping will
appear to take place and the resulting logo will be unchanged.
If the clipping rectangle is entirely outside the imported image then all the image is
clipped and no image is displayed.

14.3.5.1 Relative Clipping

When using relative coordinates the clip remains the same irrespective of where the
imported image is placed within the marking field. For example, if we start with the
imported image as shown in Figure 14.10, centred in the marking field, and apply
the relative coordinates (in mm): left: 0, right: 100, top: 30 and bottom:0: the result
is as shown in Figure 14.11.

Figure 14.10 Original Image

Figure 14.11 Relative Clipping

If the imported image is now placed elsewhere within the marking field we maintain
the same clipped image as shown in Figure 14.12.

195 Document No: QP00033 Issue: H

 Scrîba 3 Software Programming Manual Issue H

Figure 14.12 Relative Clipping

14.3.5.2 Absolute Clipping

When using absolute coordinates the clip remains area remains in the same place and
placing the clipped image in a different place within the marking field will give
different results. For example, if we start with the imported image as shown in
Figure 14.13, centred in the marking field, and apply the absolute coordinates (in
mm): left: 0, right: 60, top: 30 and bottom:0: the result is as shown in Figure 14.14.

Figure 14.13 Original Image

Figure 14.14 Absolute Clipping

If the image is now moved within the marking field the clipping window remains in
the same position giving a different clipped image as shown in Figures 14.15 and
14.16.

Figure 14.15 Absolute Clipping

196 Document No: QP00033 Issue: H

 Scrîba 3 Software Programming Manual Issue H

Figure 14.16 Absolute Clipping

14.3.6 Outline Only Repeat

Outline only repeat works in a similar manner to the regular repeat property, in that
if it is set to zero then it will have no effect. If a value other than zero is set, then the
outline portion of the logo block will be marked that number of times over and
above the original mark. The fill (if applied) will not be repeated by this property.
The additional outlines will be done in the same order as specified by the outline
order set in the fill editor, i.e. if Outline last is set, then the additional outlines will
be done after the fill is marked, otherwise the additional outlines will be marked
before the fill.
Note: Outlines will not be repeated if outline – none is selected in the fill editor.

14.3.7 Advanced Repeat

Advanced repeat is a more comprehensive repeat than either the normal repeat or
outline only repeat, it allows the fill and/or outline to be repeated with different
power, frequency and rate values for each repeat. Advanced repeat will react
differently if other repeats are applied, if a normal repeat is set then the advanced
repeats specified will themselves be repeated the appropriate number of times,
however if an outline only repeat is selected then the outlines in the advanced fill
will not be repeated according to this value. To access advanced repeats, select the
button at the end of the Advanced Repeat property and the Advanced Repeats Setup
dialog will be displayed as below.

Figure 14.17 Advanced Repeats Setup

197 Document No: QP00033 Issue: H

 Scrîba 3 Software Programming Manual Issue H

This displays the Advanced Repeat Set-up screen. The “+” and “-“ buttons are used
to add and remove repeats from the list, the “-“ button should only be clicked when a
repeat is highlighted in the list, the selected repeat will be removed and the others
will be renumbered.

If you click on a repeat in the list, its repeat properties will be displayed, and can be
edited. To register the changes you must click the Set For This Repeat button. If this
button is not clicked then the settings for the repeat will revert to their previous
values when another repeat is selected or the OK button is clicked.
Once one or more advanced repeats have been set then the Advanced Repeats
property will display a string of information related to the advanced repeats that
have been set up.
The Duplicate button is used to duplicate the currently selected advanced repeat
setup which is then added to the list of repeats.

Note that the Aperture and Zoom properties will only be available if they have been
enabled in the File Preferences (see Sections 3.12.2.28 and 3.12.2.29).

14.3.8 Maintain Fill Parameters

When the Maintain Fill Parameters is set toYes, the fill parameters remain when the
logo file name is changed; otherwise, the fill parameters are reset to [None]. The
default value is No.

14.3.9 Reset Part Radius

This property is set to Yes by default. If this property is set to No then the part radius
is not set to zero at the beginning of the data block. This property will be ignored if
rotary tiling is used. Set this to ‘No’ where the cylinder being marked needs to be
rotated to a specific point on the circumference before marking begins.

14.3.10 Mirror and Flip

Figure 14.18 shows the effects of setting the mirror and flip properties.

Figure 14.18 Mirror and Flip

198 Document No: QP00033 Issue: H

 Scrîba 3 Software Programming Manual Issue H

The top left logo is the logo imported with no mirror of flip applied. The top right is
shown with the Mirror property set to Yes. The bottom left is shown with the Flip
property set to Yes. The bottom right is shown with both the Mirror and Flip
parameters set to Yes.

14.3.11 Maintain Aspect Behaviour

This property is used to change the behaviour of the mark size property when
maintain aspect is set to Yes. This allows the maintain aspect calculation to maintain
the aspect ratio with respect to either the width or height of the image, or to use the
default behaviour. The options are Size to Width, Size to Height and Default. When
set to default behaviour the logo’s aspect ratio is maintained with respect to the
largest dimension – width or height.

14.3.12 Auto Centre Imported Logos

This property is useful when a small image has been created within a large design
page. Under normal circumstances the file would be imported as created but this
could mean that the required image has been simulated outside the marking field.
To bring this image back into the marking field and so ignoring the design page set
this property to Yes. The default is Yes. Setting this to No, may simulate the image
some distance from the centre of the marking field (Figure 14.19).

Figure 14.19 Auto Centring of Imported Logos

199 Document No: QP00033 Issue: H

 Scrîba 3 Software Programming Manual Issue H
14.3.13 DXF Layers

This property is read only and displays the names of the layers of the specified DXF
file that have been imported. See section 14.2.4 for further details.

14.4 Point to Point Logo Programming (PNLs – Points’n’Lines)

Simple vector graphics can be created by hand with the following set of commands.
These commands are typed into the text area of the Logo Data Block. They can also
be typed into a text file and given the extension *.PNL for later importing.

The commands available are detailed below and are a variation of HPGL. The
coordinates are based on a Cartesian coordinate system which places 0,0 at the
centre of the marking field (Figure 14.20).

All of the commands can be entered in either upper or lower case. The units used in
all the following commands are as selected in the part file preferences. All examples
reproduced here are in metric (mm).

Figure 14.20 A Manual Logo Data Block Window

200 Document No: QP00033 Issue: H

 Scrîba 3 Software Programming Manual Issue H

14.4.1 P Command

The P command is used to Position the start point of the first line or arc segment. The
format for this command is:
P x (start), y (start)

where x, y are the coordinates at which the line or arc segment is to begin. There
should be one space between the command and the coordinates, and at least one space
after the coordinates before the next command.

14.4.2 L Command

The L command is used to mark a straight Line from the initial position, P, to an end
point. The format for this command is:
L x (end), y (end), pause

where x, y are the coordinates of the end point of the line. The pause at the end of the
command line is explained in Section 14.4.6. There should be one space between the
command and the coordinates, and at least one space after the coordinates before the
next command.

14.4.3 R Command

The R command is used to mark a Rectangle from the origination position, P, to an

end point. The format for this command is:
R x (end), y (end), pause

where x, y are the coordinates of the end point of the rectangle. The pause at the end
of the command line is explained in Section 14.4.6. There should be one space
between the command and the coordinates, and at least one space after the coordinates
before the next command. The initial point and the end point can be any one of the
four corners of the rectangle (i.e. bottom-left, bottom-right, top-left, top-right).

14.4.4 CW and CCW Commands

These commands are used to mark an arc segment from an origination point (either P
or the end point of another line or arc) to an end point in either a clockwise (CW)
direction or a counter clockwise (CCW) direction. Both commands require that the
end point and the centre point of the arc is defined. The format for these commands
is:
CW x (end), y (end), x (centre), y (centre), pause
or CCW x (end), y (end), x (centre), y (centre), pause

where x end, y end are the coordinates of the end point of the arc and x centre, y
centre are the coordinates at the centre point of the arc. The pause at the end of the
command line is explained in Section 14.4.6. There should be one space between the
command and the coordinates, and at least one space after the coordinates before the
next command.

201 Document No: QP00033 Issue: H

 Scrîba 3 Software Programming Manual Issue H
14.4.5 BZV Command

The BZV command is used to create a two-pole Bezier curve from an origination
point (either P or the end point of another line or arc) to an end point defined in the
command. The format for this command is:

BZV x (end), y (end), x (P1), y (P1), x (P2), y (P2), pause

where x end, y end are the co-ordinates of the end point of the curve, x P1, y P1 are
the coordinates of pole 1 and x P2, y P2 are the coordinates of pole 2. The pause at
the end of the command line is explained in Section 14.4.6. There should be one
space between the command and the co-ordinates, and at least one space after the
coordinates before the next command.

14.4.6 Pause Command

At high marking speeds, to ensure both sharp corners and complete arcs, it may be
necessary to pause the laser after a line or arc segment before marking the next
connecting segment. This is achieved by adding the Pause command at the end of the
line or arc segment. This command instructs the laser to pause momentarily before
the next segment is marked.

To enable the pause, enter a 1 after the coordinates in an L, CW, CCW or BZV
command. To disable the pause, enter a 0 after the coordinates. If nothing is entered
the software will default to 0.

On very sensitive materials, the pause can cause excessive burning at the pause point.

14.4.7 Simple Logo Examples

This example is a 20 mm x 20 mm square positioned in the centre of the marking

field using an X Pos of -10.000 and a Y Pos of -10.000. The PNL coordinates are:

P 0,0 L 20,0 L 20,20 L 0,20 L 0,0

Figure 14.21 Logo Square

*Note exactly the same result could have been achieved with the following
commands to draw a rectangle from (0,0) to (20,20)

P 0,0 R 20,20
202 Document No: QP00033 Issue: H
 Scrîba 3 Software Programming Manual Issue H

This example is a 40 mm diameter circle positioned in the centre of the marking

field using an X Position of 0.000 and a Y Position of 0.000. Note that the circle
end point is the same as the start point. The PNL coordinates are:

P 0,20 CW 0,20,0,0

Figure 14.22 Logo Circle

This example is a 20mm diameter circle positioned with its centre at 20,20. It is
resting on the X and Y abscissae. In this case it does not matter whether the circle is
described as CW or CCW as it is a complete circle. When drawing arcs this can be
important.

P 0,20 CW 0,20,20,20

Figure 14.23 Logo Circle

203 Document No: QP00033 Issue: H

 Scrîba 3 Software Programming Manual Issue H

This example is a ninety degree arc of radius 20mm centred on the centre of the
marking field:

P 0,20 CW 20,0,0,0

Figure 14.24 Logo Arc

This example is a 270 degree arc of radius 20mm centred on the centre of the
marking field:

P 0,20 CCW 20,0,0,0

Figure 14.25 Logo Arc

This example is a Bezier curve starting at the centre of the marking field, finishing at
50,0 with the two poles at 20,100 and 30,-100:

P 0,0 BZV 50,0,20,100,30,-100

Figure 14.26 Logo Bezier Curve

204 Document No: QP00033 Issue: H

 Scrîba 3 Software Programming Manual Issue H

14.4.8 Comments

It is possible to add comments in the Edit window of a Logo data block for noting
information such as the marker set up. These comments will not be marked by the
laser if they are prefixed with either REM and a space or an * and a space.

14.4.9 PNL Syntax Error detection

Figure 14.27 Text Area - PNL commands

When all required PNL commands have been entered into the text area, click the
green ‘tick’ button (Figure 14.20), if there are no errors in the PNL code then the
resultant image will be displayed in the Simulate Window. However if there is an
error in the PNL syntax, then an error message will be displayed (Figure 14.28), and
the first incorrect character will be highlighted.

Figure 14.28 Error in Logo Message

14.4.10 Point to Point Programming Procedure

The procedure for P and L Logo programming is as follows:

1. Select a Logo data block from the Data Block menu.

2. Enter P, L, CW and CCW commands in the Edit Window to define the lines
and arcs that comprise the logo.

3. Position the logo using the X Position, Y Position properties in the data block
properties window.

4. Click on the green tick to the right of the Edit Window. If the command
string is incomplete the graphic will not be drawn and an error displayed.

5. Download using the To Marker command in the Send menu.

205 Document No: QP00033 Issue: H

 Scrîba 3 Software Programming Manual Issue H

14.5 ScribaDraw

The point to point programming is adequate for small uncomplicated graphics.

Included in the Scriba 3 software is a simple drawing package called ScribaDraw
which has the capability to create graphics that are a little more complex than those
shown above. The ScribaDraw application is sufficient for most simple needs and
does not have the sophistication of CAD packages such as CorelDRAW and
AutoCAD.

Edit Window ScribaDraw Button

Figure 14.29 Logo Data Block – Edit Window

The ScribaDraw application is launched by clicking the ScribaDraw button shown above.
This button only appears for Logo data blocks.

206 Document No: QP00033 Issue: H

 Scrîba 3 Software Programming Manual Issue H

14.5.1 Main Window

Draw Line Draw Rectangle Draw Circle Draw Arc Draw Bezier

Main Drawing Area To Do Guide Area

Figure 14.30 ScribaDraw – Main Window

207 Document No: QP00033 Issue: H

 Scrîba 3 Software Programming Manual Issue H

14.5.2 Main Menus

14.5.2.1 File Menu

Figure 14.31 File Menu

It is possible with ScribaDraw to save *.PNL files for use by the Scriba software at a
later date. It is also possible to open previously created *.PNL files. These actions
are performed using the Save and Open selections from the ScribaDraw File Menu.
Selecting the New option clears the ScribaDraw drawing area ready to begin again.

When any shapes produced are to be returned to the Scriba 3 software, select the
Save Changes and Return to Scriba option. If the changes are to be ignored and not
returned to the Scriba 3 software select the Abandon Changes and Return to Scriba
option.

14.5.2.2 Edit Menu

Figure 14.32 Edit Menu

The Edit menu allows the usual Cut, Copy, Paste and Delete of the drawn shapes.

14.5.2.3 Units Menu

Figure 14.33 Units Menu

The Units menu allows the drawing of shapes in either metric or imperial units.

208 Document No: QP00033 Issue: H

 Scrîba 3 Software Programming Manual Issue H
14.5.2.4 Options Menu

Figure 14.34 Options Menu

The Options menu allows comments to be included or not in the resulting shapes
when they are returned to the Scriba 3 software. These comments are in the same
format as those described in Section 14.4.8.

Example:

This example shows two shapes drawn in ScribaDraw and the information passed
back to the Scriba 3 software first without comments and secondly with comments.

Figure 14.35 ScribaDraw – Two Shapes

The following two screenshots show the text entered automatically into the Scriba 3
Edit window as a result of returning the above two shapes from ScribaDraw without
and with comments. Note that the descriptions of the shapes conform to the
command descriptions in Section 14.4 - Point to Point Logo Programming (PNLs).

209 Document No: QP00033 Issue: H

 Scrîba 3 Software Programming Manual Issue H

Figure 14.36 Edit Window, No Comments

Figure 14.37 Edit Window - With Comments

14.5.3 Drawing Shapes

To generate some basic graphics select from the toolbar the required shape: line,
rectangle, circle, arc or Bezier curve. When each of the tools is selected, guidance
information appears in the To Do Guide area. For the more complex shapes follow
the instructions here.

14.5.3.1 Line

Click and hold down the left mouse button in the main drawing area where the line
is to begin and drag the pointer to the end point and release.

14.5.3.2 Rectangle

Click and hold down the left mouse button in the main drawing area where the
rectangle is to begin and drag the pointer to the diagonally opposite corner and
release.

14.5.3.3 Circle

Click and hold down the left mouse button in the main drawing area where the circle
is to be centred and drag the pointer increasing the size of the resulting circle to the
desired size and release.

14.5.3.4 Arc

Click and hold down the left mouse button in the main drawing area where the arc is
to be centred and drag the pointer increasing the size of the resulting circle to the
desired size and release. Then click on two points on the circumference of the circle
to specify the start and end points of the arc.

210 Document No: QP00033 Issue: H

 Scrîba 3 Software Programming Manual Issue H

14.5.3.5 Bezier Curve

Click and hold down the left mouse button in the main drawing area where the
Bezier curve is to begin and drag the pointer to the end point and release. Then click
somewhere within the main drawing area for each of the two control points. The
positions of these control points define the resulting Bezier curve.
Once the required shapes have been drawn select the Arrow from the toolbar and
this allows the selection of any one of the shapes placed in the main drawing area.
When a shape is selected all the control points for that shape appear. There are two
control points for the lines, rectangles and circles and four control points for the arcs
and Bezier curves.

Figure 14.38 ScribaDraw – Various Shapes

211 Document No: QP00033 Issue: H

 Scrîba 3 Software Programming Manual Issue H

14.39 ScribaDraw – Arc Selected

Figure 14.36 displays an arc selected that shows the four control points: the centre of
the circle and the circumference (defining the basic arc dimensions), the two control
points defining the start and end of the arc. To the right of the main drawing area
are a series of edit boxes that display the aforementioned control points. These
control points can be edited and any changes will be reflected in the main drawing
area.

212 Document No: QP00033 Issue: H

 Scrîba 3 Software Programming Manual Issue H

14.6 Font Character Generation

Characters for inclusion in a font can be created individually within a Logo data
block one at a time. This is done using the three properties Character definition, Full
Height and Font Character. Note that if creating a new font character, the design
program should be empty of all other data blocks.

1) Import a logo image as normal or create a PNL image directly.

2) Set the Character Definition property to Yes. This sets-up the data block for a
character and will resize it to a predetermined size designed for the Electrox font
format. It resizes itself to 3.048mm x 3.048mm in metric (or 0.12ins x 0.12ins in
imperial), resets the X Position, Y Position to 0, 0 with left-bottom justified, and
resets all Angle, Repeat, Scale related properties. Also at this point a number of
other properties will be disabled as they are not required or not valid for the
character generation.

3) Set the Full Height property as required. When the property Full Height is set to
Yes, and the property Maintain Aspect Ratio is set to Yes, the logo data block
maintains its aspect ratio while making the character the full height of the font;
otherwise, it maintains its aspect ratio by its width or its height, whichever is the
larger (this can produce different height characters).

4) Select the Font Character property and enter a character to be used to represent
the graphic just imported or created. Although it is possible to enter more than
one character, only the first character is used.

5) From the main menu select Send -> Compile To Font. From this menu a
completely new font can be created or the new character can be added to an
already existing font. See Section 8.8 for a detailed description of compiling to a
font.

213 Document No: QP00033 Issue: H

 Scrîba 3 Software Programming Manual Issue H

14.7 Bitmap to Vector Conversion

Within the Scriba 3 there is a simple bitmap to vector interpreter built in. This is
accessed by using the logo import dialog and selecting the Raster Files filter as
shown below.

Figure 14.40 Importing Bitmap Files for Conversion

This will then display the Bitmap To Vector Settings dialog, from which the
direction of the scan is specified and whether it is to be bidirectional or not. The
selected raster file will then be converted to a series of horizontal or vertical lines
dependent upon the options chosen in the Bitmap To Vector Settings dialog shown
below.

Figure 14.41

214 Document No: QP00033 Issue: H

 Scrîba 3 Software Programming Manual Issue H

14.8 Tiling a Logo

The Scriba 3 software has the ability to mark logo data blocks around a cylinder, and
across a motion table using the tiling properties from within a logo data block.
There are three options for tiling: Rotary (for use with a rotary indexer), Linear (for
XY tables), On-The-Fly (for use in on-the-fly systems) and Linear – User Defined
(for XY tables). When no tiling is required this property is set to None.
The properties shown below are enabled or disabled according to the type of tiling
selected.

Figure 14.42

14.8.1 Rotary Tiling

When Rotary tiling is selected the following properties are enabled: Number of
Tiles, Part Diameter, Tiling Direction, Tile Scale, Rotary Tiling Justification and
Flip.

The number of Tiles is the number of tiles the whole image is to be split into.

The Part Diameter or Radius is the diameter or radius of the part being marked.

The Tile Scale property determines by how much to scale each slice by. This is used
for fine adjustment to line the tiles up without gaps and without overlapping.

The Tiling Direction property defines whether to split the image horizontally or
vertically. The direction will be determined by the orientation of the rotary axis to
the marker. The size of the logo will be maintained. Together the part diameter or
radius and the number of tiles determine the correct angular rotation to maintain the
logo dimensions for the mark.

215 Document No: QP00033 Issue: H

 Scrîba 3 Software Programming Manual Issue H
The Rotary Tiling Justification property defines how the tiling occurs with respect to
the rotary axis start point. Below are illustrations of the four options, along with
descriptions. In each case the dashed line represents the starting point of the rotary
axis, and the solid blocks represent the tiles that are marked.

Normal

Figure 14.43 Normal – The Centre of the First Tile is Centred on the Axis

The first tile will be marked centered about the starting position on the rotary axis.

Centre

Figure 14.44 Centre Justification

The whole logo will be centered about the starting position on the rotary axis.

Start

Figure 14.45 Start Justification

The logo will start marking from the starting position on the rotary axis.

End

Figure 14.46 End Jusification

The logo will end marking at the starting position on the rotary axis.

The Flip property allows reverse rotational movement between tiles. This is useful
if the rotary axis has been setup such that the tiles appear to be in the wrong order.

14.8.2 Linear Tiling

When Linear tiling is selected the following properties are enabled: Tile Scale, X
Tiles, Y Tiles, Flip X, Flip Y and Tiles.

The Tile Scale property determines by how much to scale each slice by. This is used
for fine adjustment to line the tiles up without gaps and without overlapping.
The X Tiles property defines the number of slices the logo data block will be split
into on the X axis.

216 Document No: QP00033 Issue: H

 Scrîba 3 Software Programming Manual Issue H
The Y Tiles property defines the number of slices the logo data block will be split
into on the Y axis.

The Flip X property allows reverse movement in the X axis. This is useful if the X
axis has been setup such that the tiles appear to be in the wrong order.

The Flip Y property allows reverse movement in the Y axis. This is useful if the Y
axis has been setup such that the tiles appear to be in the wrong order.

14.8.3 On-The-Fly Tiling

When On-The-Fly tiling is selected the following properties are enabled: Frame
Rectangle, Tile Size and Block Type. The Angle property in the Positional tab is
disabled also.

The Frame Rectangle property is used to set the enclosed area of the mark. This
Frame Rectangle size must be greater than the actual required mark otherwise the
mark will be clipped. The Frame Rectangle has its main use with repeated marks
such that the size of the rectangle (the width) determines the pitch of the marks.
The pitch is the distance between successive starts or ends of the mark. For example
if the width of the logo to be marked is 300mm and the Frame Rectangle is 350mm
then the 300mm logo is marked every 350mm (a gap of 50mm between marked
logos).

The Tile Size property defines the size of the slices that the image will be split into
for marking. The resulting number of tiles created is an integer number that will
completely fill the Frame Rectangle. Note that the size of tile actually marked will
most likely be different to that specified – this is not an error.

The Block type property defines how this block influences marking of the whole part
file – ie how the “repeat forever” behaviour occurs.
First: The block will insert a LABEL command before itself.
Middle: The block will not insert a LABEL or GOTO command at all.
Last: The block will insert a GOTO command at the end of itself
Only: The block will insert a LABEL command before itself and a GOTO command
after itself.
Ignore: The block will not insert a LABEL or GOTO command at all.

Examples:
a) If a single data block is required for the on-the-fly tiling then set the Block Type to
Only.
b) If two data blocks are required for on-the-fly tiling then set the Block Type to First
for the first data block and set the Block Type to Last for the second data block.
c) If three data blocks are required for the on-the-fly tiling then set the Block Type to
First for the first data block, set the Block Type to Middle for the second data block
and set the Block Type to Last for the third data block.

If the LABEL and GOTO commands are to be put in manually then set the Block
Type to Ignore.

217 Document No: QP00033 Issue: H

 Scrîba 3 Software Programming Manual Issue H
For further information see Section 24 On-The-Fly Marking.

14.8.4 Linear Tiling – User Defined

When Linear – User Defined tiling is selected the following properties are enabled:
Flip X, Flip Y and Tiles.

The Flip X and FlipY properties have already been described in Section 14.8.2 –
Linear Tiling.

This form of tiling allows the user to define totally the number and size of tiles
which the image is to be broken up into. The sizes of the tiles can all be different.

To define the required tiling setup, select the ellipsis in the Tiles property. This then
displays the Tiling Setup window shown below.

Move up and Move Down buttons

Figure 14.47 Tiling Setup

This window displays two main areas: the list of tiles on the left and on the right a
basic simulation area showing the individual tiles which are being created.

List of Tiles

This displays the four coordinates of each tile that has been added in the order Left,
Top, Right, Bottom. The order the tiles appear in the list is the order in which they
will be marked. Selecting a tile from this list will display it as a red rectangle in the
Simulation area, unselected tiles are displayed in yellow.

Move up/Move down buttons

These buttons allow the marking order of the tiles to be changed by moving the
currently selected tile in the direction shown.

218 Document No: QP00033 Issue: H

 Scrîba 3 Software Programming Manual Issue H
Add Tile/Remove Tile buttons

The Add Tile button adds a new tile to the list. This tile will default to 0,0 with a
width and height of zero. The Remove Tile button deletes the currently selected tile
from the list.

Tile Coordinates and Store Values for Tile button

This is where the coordinates for the currently selected tile are displayed, and can be
edited. Once the values are as desired, click the Save Values button to store these
values into the list.

Import from Text File button

This button allows a comma delimited text file (.csv) to be selected. Coordinates will
be read in from this file and stored in the list. This file must not contain any header
information. The values must be in the order Left, Top, Right, Bottom

Simulation Area

This displays a rectangle indicating the outline of the current logo data block. Tiles
will be displayed as yellow rectangles if not selected, or red if selected.

The following image shows a data block in which three tiles have been created.

Figure 14.48 Data block with User Defined Tiles

219 Document No: QP00033 Issue: H

 Scrîba 3 Software Programming Manual Issue H

15
Section 15: Fill Editor
In this section:
15.1 Fill Editor
15.1.1 Fill Editor Toolbar
15.2 File Menu
15.2.1 Save Changes
15.2.2 Exit Editor
15.3 Edit Menu
15.3.1 Undo Last
15.3.2 Undo All
15.3.3 Select All
15.3.4 Select Outline
15.3.5 Select Fill
15.4 View Menu
15.4.1 Zoom Viewing
15.4.2 Zoom In by 2
15.2.3.3 Zoom Out by 2
15.4.4 Normal Viewing (1:1)
15.4.5 Regenerate Display
15.4.6 Centre Display
15.4.7 Outline Only
15.4.8 Fill Only
15.4.9 Show Grabbers
15.4.10 Show Directions
15.4.11 Show Coordinates
15.4.12 Show Start/End Points
15.5 Tools Menu
15.5.1 Fill
15.5.1.1 Horizontal Fill
15.5.1.2 Vertical Fill
15.5.1.3 Auto H/V Fill
15.5.1.4 Contour Fill
15.5.1.5 Spiral Fill
15.5.1.6 Angle Fill
15.5.1.7 Distance From Outline
15.5.1.8 Line Width
15.5.1.9 Maximum Contours
15.5.1.10 Line Increment
15.5.1.11 Bi-Directional Fill
15.5.1.12 Reverse Lines
15.5.1.13 Bezier Interpolation
15.5.1.14 Advanced Fill
15.5.1.15 Fill Recipes
15.5.2 Pen
15.5.3 Add
15.5.4 Delete
15.5.5 Add Pause

220 Document No: QP00033 Issue: H

 Scrîba 3 Software Programming Manual Issue H
15.5.6 Delete Pause
15.5.7 Reverse
15.5.8 Split
15.5.9 Join
15.5.10 Optimise Fill and Optimise Outline
15.5.11 Slow Draw Mode
15.5.11.1 Slow Draw Outline
15.5.11.2 Slow Draw Fill
15.5.12 Re-order Outline
15.5.13 Options
15.6 Fill Considerations

221 Document No: QP00033 Issue: H

 Scrîba 3 Software Programming Manual Issue H

Fill Editor

The Scriba 3 software allows you to fill and edit any closed vector logo outline with
a choice of horizontal, vertical, contour or spiral fills. Many of the features in the
Fill Editor are unique to the Scriba 3 software.

When the Fill selection is made in a Logo data block the Fill Editor window opens
(Figure 15.1). Note the Fill Editor will only appear if an AI, PLT , DXF or PNL file
has been imported or if a graphic has been created in the ScribaDraw application
(see section 14.5).

Fill Editor Menu Fill Editor Toolbar

Simulation Window

Figure 15.1 Fill Editor Window

222 Document No: QP00033 Issue: H

 Scrîba 3 Software Programming Manual Issue H

15.1 Fill Editor

The Fill Editor window is similar to the main program window in that it is menu-
and-mouse driven. Each menu item commands the software to perform a different
task. The Fill Editor window is organised into four separate menus.
These are:
File Edit View Tools

Some of these menu item selections cause sub-menus to appear while others cause a
dialogue box or window to appear. Each menu item is explained in detail in the
following sub-sections.

From the Fill Editor window it is possible to:

- View the image and fill lines
- Add and delete fill segments (lines or arcs)
- Reposition fill segments
- Reverse the direction of fill segments
- Fill to the centre or from the centre for spiral filling of logos
- Add or delete pause commands to the outline or fill
- Simulate and modify the mark direction and mark order
- Choose to mark the logo outline first, last or not at all
- Allocate up to 15 different sets of laser properties (pens) to different
segments of the outline or fill.
- Ability to view the order in which the fill takes place

15.1.1 Fill Editor Toolbar

Save Changes Fill Select Zoom In Reset Zoom Exit

Slow Draw Forwards

Pen Select Zoom Out Slow Draw Backwards

Options Centre Display

Figure 15.2 File Editor Toolbar

223 Document No: QP00033 Issue: H

 Scrîba 3 Software Programming Manual Issue H

15.2 File Menu

Figure 15.3 File Menu

15.2.1 Save Changes

Saves all the changes to the edited image.

15.2.2 Exit Editor

Closes the Fill Editor and returns to Scriba 3 main window. A saving prompt will
appear if there have been changes to the file. When you select Exit Editor a
dialogue box will appear asking if you want to save the changes you have made. If
you click Yes then the edited image is saved to the Logo data block. If you select
No then any changes you have made are ignored and the original unedited image is
saved to the Logo data block.

15.3 Edit Menu

Figure 15.4 Edit Menu

15.3.1 Undo Last

The Undo Last command will undo only the last edited item of the image. The image
is then redrawn as it appeared previous to the last edit. If no edits have been made
then this option is disabled.

15.3.2 Undo All

The Undo All command will undo all thes edits made to the image. The image is
then redrawn as it was originally loaded into the fill editor. If no edits have been
made then this option is disabled.

15.3.3 Select All

Selects all the segments of the logo image including the outline and the fill.

224 Document No: QP00033 Issue: H

 Scrîba 3 Software Programming Manual Issue H
15.3.4 Select Outline

Selects only the outline of the logo image. The outline refers to all the constituents
of the imported image even a fill if this was created as part of the original. The
outline cannot be changed within the Fill Editor. This must be done in the original
CAD package.

15.3.5 Select Fill

Selects all the fill segments of the logo image. The fill is the fill that is added using
the Fill Editor.

15.4 View Menu

The View Menu deals with the various viewing options that are available within the
Fill Editor for use in the Simulation Window.

Figure 15.5 View Menu

15.4.1 Zoom Viewing

This is used to determine whether a drag box created with the mouse is used for
zooming or for selection.
If the menu item Zoom Viewing is checked (a tick appears next to it in the menu),
the drag box created using the mouse encloses the area to be zoomed. Also a left
mouse click zooms in and a right mouse click zooms out

When this is not checked, (no tick appears next to Zoom Viewing menu), all fill
segments enclosed within the bounding rectangle are selected.

15.4.2 Zoom In by 2

Zooms in by a factor of two. This is the same as the Zoom In control on the toolbar.

225 Document No: QP00033 Issue: H

 Scrîba 3 Software Programming Manual Issue H
15.2.3.3 Zoom Out by 2

Zooms out by a factor of two. This is the same as the Zoom Out control on the
toolbar.

15.4.4 Normal Viewing (1:1)

Resets zoom to 100%. This is the same as the Reset Zoom control on the toolbar.

15.4.5 Regenerate Display

Regenerates the image in the Fill Editor Simulation Window without recalculating
the fill segments. This command can be used to refresh the display after each edit.

15.4.6 Centre Display

Returns the image to the centre of the Fill Editor window. This is the same as the
Centre Display control in the toolbar.

15.4.7 Outline Only

Displays only the outline segments of the image.

15.4.8 Fill Only

Displays only the fill segments of the logo, if a fill has been specified.
Note that if no fill has been specified then the display will be blank.

15.4.9 Show Grabbers

Displays a white circle or grabber at or near the centre of each outline or fill
segment. The grabber is used to select the segment for editing or to move the
position of the segment. When Show Grabbers is checked a tick appears next to it in
the View menu.
The grabber is yellow if that vector has a pause associated with it. White indicates
there is no pause.

15.4.10 Show Directions

Displays an arrow near to the centre of each outline or fill segment. The arrow is
used to show the direction in which the segment has been drawn and will therefore
be marked. When Show Directions is checked a tick appears next to it in the View
menu.

15.4.11 Show Coordinates

Displays a blue square at the start and end point of each outline and fill segment.
When Show Coordinates is checked a tick appears next to it in the View menu. (The
colours will depend on how Windows™ is set up on your computer).

226 Document No: QP00033 Issue: H

 Scrîba 3 Software Programming Manual Issue H
15.4.12 Show Start/End Points

Displays a green circle at or near the start point of each outline or fill path and a red
circle at or near the end point of each outline or fill path. When Show Start / End
Points is selected a tick appears next to it in the View menu. (The colours will
depend on how Windows is set up on your computer).

15.5 Tools Menu

The Tools menu command allows you to select the fill parameters and to add lines
or arcs to the filled image. You can also add or delete pauses to the fill, select and
apply pens and simulate and rearrange the marking order.

Figure 15.6 Tools Menu

15.5.1 Fill

The Fill command allows you to choose the fill type and direction as well as the
inset of the fill from the outline and the distance between each fill line. There are a
number of straight line fills, namely, Horizontal, Vertical, Auto H/V and Angle.
Two concentric type fills are also available, namely, Contour and Spiral (to and from
the centre). Selection of the required fill can result in some of the other options
being enabled or disabled. The Angle edit and the Cross Hatched control are only
available for the Angle fill. The Line Increment edit and the Bidirectional control
are only available for straight line fills. The Advanced option is only available for
straight line fills with a distance to outline greater than zero.

The fill required for a particular mark is entirely dependent on the effects required.
For example the spiral fill can give a speed up over a straight line fill due to a single
continuous mark line (in a simple shape) as opposed to multiple lines with fly-back
resulting in numerous stop and start operations. These fly-back times can be
reduced by making the straight line fill bi-directional but this can cause a raggedness

227 Document No: QP00033 Issue: H

 Scrîba 3 Software Programming Manual Issue H
on each side of the fill due to the calculation for the starting point for each fill line.
Turing the bi-directional filling off can get rid of this raggedness.

Note that the calculation times for the contour and spiral fills can take a while
depending on the complexity of the imported image. This calculation time has no
bearing on the actual time the fill takes when it is marked.

Figure 15.7 Fill Dialog

Note that the fill will be affected by the Scale and Aspect commands in the Logo
data block window. For example, if the logo is scaled to one-half its original size,
the fill will be twice as dense when marked. Alternatively if the logo is scaled to
twice its original size, then the fill will be half as dense when marked. To avoid this
problem, the logo should be scaled or sized using the Size command. If a filled logo
is re-sized then a dialog box will appear warning you that any fill data will be lost.
Therefore when you re-size a logo you must re-apply the fill.

Figure 15.8 Filling-in-Progress Window

While the fill is in progress the above window will be displayed. A right mouse
click in the window causes the current fill to be abandoned.

Clicking the Apply button causes the currently set fill parameters to be applied to the
current image.
Clicking the Set as Default button sets the currently set fill parameters to be used as
the default every time the fill editor is opened.

To close the Fill dialog click the kill button in the top right corner of the Fill dialog.

228 Document No: QP00033 Issue: H

 Scrîba 3 Software Programming Manual Issue H
15.5.1.1 Horizontal Fill

Figure 15.9 shows the horizontal fill of an imported image. The direction of the fill
lines can be either bi-directional or unidirectional (when the Bidirectional Filling
check box is not checked). The filling works from bottom to top. The horizontal fill
is a special case of the angle fill (zero degrees) – see Section 15.5.1.6. When cross
hatching is required use the angle fill.

Figure 15.9 Horizontal Fill

15.5.1.2 Vertical Fill

Figure 15.10 shows the horizontal fill of an imported image. The direction of the fill
lines can be either bi-directional or unidirectional (when the Bidirectional Filling
check box is not checked). The filling works from left to right. The vertical fill is a
special case of the angle fill (90 degrees) – see Section 15.5.1.6. When cross
hatching is required, use the angle fill.

Figure 15.10 Vertical Fill

229 Document No: QP00033 Issue: H

 Scrîba 3 Software Programming Manual Issue H
15.5.1.3 Auto H/V Fill

Auto H/V fill lines are either horizontal or vertical and are determined by the
software. The program scans the outline and determines which direction is the most
efficient. If the logo contains many outlines the software may fill a number
horizontally and a number vertically.

15.5.1.4 Contour Fill

Contour fill is generated as a number of fill paths, each concentric with the outline
where possible (Figure 15.11).

Figure 15.11 Contour Fill

The Maximum Contours control is enabled when a contour or spiral fill is selected
and allows the number of contour fills to be generated up to the maximum specified.
In Figure 15.10 this is specified as 50 while in Figure 15.12 this is specified as one.

Figure 15.12 Contour Fill – Maximum of One

230 Document No: QP00033 Issue: H

 Scrîba 3 Software Programming Manual Issue H
15.5.1.5 Spiral Fill

Spiral fill is a single fill path, where possible, concentric with the outline (Figure
15.13). There are two possible spiral fills, one beginning from the centre of the
graphic and one beginning from the edge (specified by the distance from the
outline). A change of the spiral direction will result in a slightly different fill.

Figure 15.13 Spiral Fill

231 Document No: QP00033 Issue: H

 Scrîba 3 Software Programming Manual Issue H

15.5.1.6 Angle Fill

Figure 15.14 shows an angle fill of 30 degrees in an imported image. When the
angle fill is selected the Angle edit box is available to specify the angle required.
Zero degrees is horizontal and 90 degrees is vertical. Also when the Angle fill is
selected the Cross Hatched check box becomes available which allows a second fill
at 90 degrees to the selected angle fill (see Figure 15.15).

Figure 15.14 Angle Fill

Figure 15.15 Two Angle Fills to Produce a Cross Hatch Fill

232 Document No: QP00033 Issue: H

 Scrîba 3 Software Programming Manual Issue H

15.5.1.7 Distance From Outline

Distance From Outline is the overall inset of the fill line or fill path from the outline.
The value required here will depend on the material being marked, the laser
properties (pen) used on both the outline and the fill, and the beam width of the laser
beam.

15.5.1.8 Line Width

Line Width is the offset between each fill line or fill path. As with the Distance
From Outline value the offset required to obtain a good fill will depend on the line
width and laser properties (pen), as well as the sensitivity of the material being
marked.

15.5.1.9 Maximum Contours

This is the maximum number of contours that are calculated for the Contour or
Spiral fills. For a complete fill this value needs to be fairly high. Reducing this
value to a small level will create a fill that does not appear to complete. Setting a
low value can have the effect of producing a thicker outline mark as the contour fill
always begins at the outside and works towards the middle.

15.5.1.10 Line Increment

To facilitate reduced localised heating on sensitive materials the Line Increment is

available. It defines the number of fill lines counted from the last fill line to the next
fill line to be marked and hence the number of passes over the entire image. This is
normally set to one and is applicable to straight line fills only – horizontal, vertical,
auto H/V and angle fills.

Example 1: if the line increment is set to two, lines 1, 3, 5, 7, 9 etc. are marked. A
second pass is done marking lines 2, 4, 6, 8, 10 etc.

Example 2: if the line increment is set to three, lines 1, 4, 7, 10, 13 etc. are marked.
A second pass is done marking lines 2, 5, 8, 11, 14 etc. followed by a third pass
marking lines 3, 6, 9, 12, 15 etc.

Example 3: if the line increment is set to ten, lines 1, 11, 21, 31, 41 etc. are marked.
A second pass is done marking lines 2, 12, 22, 32, 42 etc. followed by a third pass
marking lines 3, 13, 23, 33, 43 etc. followed by a fourth pass etc. etc.

233 Document No: QP00033 Issue: H

 Scrîba 3 Software Programming Manual Issue H

15.5.1.11 Bi-Directional Fill

This applies to straight line fills only. The following Figure shows the fill when Bi-
Directional Filling is selected and not selected.

Figure 15.16 Bi-directional and Unidirectional Filling

15.5.1.12 Reverse Lines

This option reverses all the fill lines from the original. The outline is not affected.

Figure 15.17 Normal Fill and Reversed Line Fill

15.5.1.13 Bezier Interpolation

This option specifies the degree of accuracy to which fills are applied to shapes
containing Bezier curves. The three options for interpolation are Normal, Fine and
Very Fine. Normal converts each Bezier curve into 8 lines, Fine into 80 and Very
Fine into 360 lines.

15.5.1.14 Advanced Fill

This option is available for straight line fills and only when the distance from the
outline is greater than zero. The options are High Accuracy or High Speed. The
high speed algorithm actually calculates the distance from the outline only from the
a parallel edge and not the ends of the fill line. The high accuracy algorithm
calculates the distance from the ends of the fill line also. The time taken for these
calculations to be done has no bearing on the actual mark times of the fill.
234 Document No: QP00033 Issue: H
 Scrîba 3 Software Programming Manual Issue H
Subsequent simulations are also not affected by this time difference in the fill
algorithm.

15.5.1.15 Fill Recipes

Once all the preceding parameters are used for a particular fill they may be saved as
a fill recipe for future use. These recipes can then be used to quickly set up the
desired fill parameters. All available recipes are listed in the Fill Recipes combo box
within the fill tools window shown below.

Figure 15.18 Fill Dialog Showing Pre-saved Fill Recipes Selection

To apply a recipe, select it from the drop-down list and click the Apply button. The
last selected fill recipe is shown thus.

Figure 15.19 Last Selected Fill Recipe

To save the current fill parameters as a recipe, press the Save as Recipe button and
enter a name for the recipe in the Save Fill Recipe dialog below.

Figure 15.20 Fill Recipe Name Entry

235 Document No: QP00033 Issue: H

 Scrîba 3 Software Programming Manual Issue H
To view all existing recipes, click the View Recipes button. This displays the Fill
Recipes dialog (Figure 15.21).

Figure 15.21 View Fill Recipes

To delete a previously created fill recipe, select the recipe and then click Delete
Selected Recipe button. Additionally these recipes can be exported for use on
another computer where the import function can be used. Clicking on the Export
button opens the standard File Save dialog to save the selected recipe in a text
format. Clicking on the Import button opens the standard File Open dialog from
which a previously created recipe can be imported.

15.5.2 Pen

The Pen command opens a window which shows the pen numbers 0 - 15 (Figure
15.18). These pen numbers can be allocated to the entire outline or individual
segments of an outline and to the entire fill or individual segments of the fill. Up to
15 different pens can be allocated to each data block so a single filled logo could
contain 15 different sets of laser properties.

Figure 15.22 Pen Selection

236 Document No: QP00033 Issue: H

 Scrîba 3 Software Programming Manual Issue H
To apply a set of laser properties or pen to an entire fill choose Select All Fill from
the Edit menu. The outline and fill will be displayed together with the fill anchor
points. Then select the Pen command from the Tools menu and click on the button
next to the pen number you want to allocate to the fill. Click the Apply button to
apply the pen number to the fill. Refer to Section 3.11.2.11 Laser Pens for
information on setting the pen definitions. Note that pen 0 is the set of laser
properties set in the Logo data block.

15.5.3 Add

The Add command opens a sub-menu from which you can add additional segments
to the fill. The segment types you can add are lines, Bezier curves, clockwise arcs or
anti-clockwise arcs.

Figure 15.23 Add Menu

15.5.4 Delete

The Delete command allows you to delete one, several, or all segments from your
image. To use Delete select the segment you wish to delete by clicking on the
grabber and then select Delete from the Tools menu or press the Delete key on the
keyboard.

237 Document No: QP00033 Issue: H

 Scrîba 3 Software Programming Manual Issue H

15.5.5 Add Pause

The Add pause command places a pause at the end of the selected segment or series
of segments of the image outline or the fill.

Figure 15.24 Add Pause Menu

To use the Add Pause command select the segment you wish to add the pause to by
clicking on the grabber. This will display the anchor points of the selected segment
as black squares. Then select Selected Line. The image will then be redrawn
showing a white square at the end point of the selected segment to show that a pause
has been added. The grabber is also coloured yellow to signify the pause. If you
wish to add a pause to the end of the sequence of vectors then choose End of Vector.
This puts a single pause at the end of the series of the connected vectors.

In some circumstances it is useful to add the pause only at the end of a series of
connected segments (at the end of a vector), then select End of Vector. For example
if we have an outline that consists of four segments forming a square the whole
square is a vector to which we may wish to add a pause only at the end of the last
segment. This is useful to ensure that the square completely formed with no gap
between the start and finish segments.

238 Document No: QP00033 Issue: H

 Scrîba 3 Software Programming Manual Issue H

15.5.6 Delete Pause

The Delete pause command removes the pause from the end of the selected segment
of the image outline.

Figure 15.25 Delete Pause Menu

To use the Delete Pause command select the segment you wish to delete the pause
from by clicking on the grabber. This will display the anchor points of the selected
segment as a black square and a white square. Then select Delete Pause. The image
will then be redrawn showing a black square at the end point of the selected segment
to show that a pause has been removed. If you wish to delete the pause from the end
of every segment in the outline then choose Select All and then Delete Pause from
the Outline menu.

Deleting the pause from a series of connected segments is the exact opposite of
adding a pause as described in Section 15.5.5 Add Pause. The single pause at the
end of the vector will be removed.

15.5.7 Reverse

The Reverse command reverses the marking direction of the selected segments in
the outline. To use the reverse command select the segment you want to change by
clicking on the grabber and then select Reverse from the Outline menu. The selected
segment will then be redrawn in the opposite direction. Note that the draw order
will remain the same.

239 Document No: QP00033 Issue: H

 Scrîba 3 Software Programming Manual Issue H

15.5.8 Split

The Split command splits a selected segment into two halves which can then be
treated as independent segments. To use the Split option select the segment you
wish to split by clicking on the grabber and then select Split from the Edit menu.

15.5.9 Join

The Join command allows you to join together two independent line segments. To
use this option, select the two segments you wish to join by clicking on the grabbers
while holding down the Ctrl key on the keyboard. Then select Join from the Edit
menu. A dialog window will appear asking you to select a common point which can
be either the start or end point of the line you wish to join the second line to. To
select the common point you must use the right mouse button. A dialog window
will then appear asking you to select the point you wish to join to the common point.
Again you must use the right mouse button. The two lines will then be redrawn
joined together.

15.5.10 Optimise Fill and Optimise Outline

This optimisation simply takes the first primitive (e.g line, arc or Bezier) in the
vector, and then re-orders the remaining primitives to reduce the total slew distance
of the mark. Results will vary with different outlines and fills. The following
window will be displayed while this is being processed. The same optimisation is
sued for both the fill and outline.

Figure 15.26 Optimising Fill Window

Optimisation of the outline also changes the directions of some elements within the
outline such that the resulting figure will fill – that is all the elements have directions
that provide a closed figure. Before and after displays are shown below.

Figure 15.27 Before and after optimisation

240 Document No: QP00033 Issue: H

 Scrîba 3 Software Programming Manual Issue H
15.5.11 Slow Draw Mode

Slow Draw Mode allows you to preview the order in which the filled logo will be
marked by the laser. To use the Slow Draw Mode command select either the Slow
Draw Outline or the Slow Draw Fill from the Tools menu. A tick appears next to it
to the selected item to show which is active. If the Slow Draw Outline is selected
then only the outline will be shown whilst if the Slow Draw Fill is selected only the
fill lines will be shown. In both cases the individual segments are shown in grey and
change colour as the slow draw is operated using the Slow Draw Backward and
Slow Draw Forward controls in the Fill Editor toolbar.

In slow draw mode the grabbers remain visible, but direction arrows, coordinates
and start/end points are not shown.

15.5.11.1 Slow Draw Outline

Pressing the Slow Draw Forward arrow causes each of the outline segments to
change colour in the order in which they would be marked. This sequence can be
changed.

To change the draw order, use the right mouse button to select each segment in turn.
As each segment is selected it changes colour. Continue doing this until all segments
have been selected or just press the Slow Draw Forward arrow when individual
selection is no longer required.

Figure 15.28 Slow Draw – Outline

241 Document No: QP00033 Issue: H

 Scrîba 3 Software Programming Manual Issue H

15.5.11.2 Slow Draw Fill

This shows the draw order of fill lines. The operation for this is identical to the
Slow Draw Outline described above.

Figure 15.29 Slow Draw – Fill

Note that the colour of the segments will depend on how Windows™ is set up on
your computer.

15.5.12 Re-order Outline

Selection of this causes the software to attempt to re-order and redirect primitives
within the imported outline in order for the vector file to be filled. The operation
may take some time depending upon the complexity of the imported outline, during
which the re-ordering primitives wait dialog will be displayed (Figure 15.24).

Figure 15.30

This option needs to be used when the imported image is a collection of non-
consecutive lines. The Scriba 3, in order to fill a shape, requires all the lines of an
imported figure to be both consecutive and in the same direction.

15.5.13 Options

The Options command allows you to choose when you wish to mark the logo outline
with respect to the fill lines. The options are mark the outline before the fill, after
the fill or to mark only the fill with no outline. Clicking on Options opens a dialog
from which you can select each option (Figure 15.24). To use the Options command
select the option you require and then click the Apply button. The options allows
the outline of the imported figure to be marked first last or not at all (fill only). The
image will then be redrawn as programmed. To exit the Options window click the
242 Document No: QP00033 Issue: H
 Scrîba 3 Software Programming Manual Issue H
kill button in the top right corner of the Options window. The current options can be
saved as defaults by clicking the Set as Default button.

Figure 15.31 Fill Editor Options Dialog

15.6 Fill Considerations

A number of items need to be considered when using the various fills. The major
consideration is the fill line width. Initially the required effect may have to be
produced by trial and error as the resulting mark will depend upon the material being
marked which will define the fill line width and distance from the edge. Other
considerations will include the speed of the mark for the production envisaged
which may well define the type of fill required.

For example if you are marking a character enclosed within a circle then the fill
algorithm will fill as shown in the figure below – Basic Fill.

Figure 15.32 Basic Fill

However, this fill may not have been what you wanted. This is due to the fill
algorithm which searches out closed figures and then fills alternately as it crosses
each closed figure. Maybe you wanted the central character filled. This can be
achieved in one of two ways. First you can make the circle into two concentric
circles very close together or you could put a minute break in the circle so as not to
make it a closed figure. The result is as shown in the figure below - Modified Fill.
The preferred way is to put a small break in the outline. The second circle will give
an apparently darker outline because of the two effective passes.

243 Document No: QP00033 Issue: H

Scrîba 3 Software Programming Manual Issue H

Figure 15.33 Modified Fill

244 Document No: QP00033 Issue: H

 Scrîba 3 Software Programming Manual Issue H

16
Section 16: Raster Graphics
In this section:
16.1 Importing Artwork
16.1.1 Freehand Artwork
16.1.2 Page Scanner
16.1.3 Colour Pictures
16.2 Adding a Picture Data Block
16.3 Picture Editor
16.3.1 Picture Editor Toolbar
16.3.2 Opening a Picture
16.3.3 Mirror, Flip and Invert
16.3.4 Clipping a Picture
16.3.5 Picture Simulation
16.3.6 Sizing a Picture
16.3.7 Positioning
16.3.8 Aspect Ratio
16.4 Resolution
16.4.1 Timings with DSP Lasers
16.5 Aperturing
16.6 Scan Speed (Dot Frequency)
16.6.1 Hits per Pixel
16.7 Grey Scale Images
16.8 Marking Rotary Pictures
16.7.1 Part Radius
16.7.2 Reset Zero Degrees
16.7.3 Start Angle

245 Document No: QP00033 Issue: H

 Scrîba 3 Software Programming Manual Issue H

Raster Graphics
The Electrox laser marker is capable of reproducing black and white bitmap images.
The following bitmap file types can be imported: *.TIF, *.BMP, *.PNG, *.PCX,
*.ICO, *.WMF, *.EMF. The resulting mark is a Raster scan, made up of individual
pulses, similar to a picture produced by a dot matrix printer. Raster scanned marks
are programmed in the Picture data block (Figure 16.1)

16.1 Importing Artwork

Artwork that you wish to import to the Scrîba 3 software must be in one of the
following file formats:

*.TIF, *.BMP, *.PNG, *.PCX, *.ICO, *.WMF, *.EMF

16.1.1 Freehand Artwork

Using software such as Adobe PhotoShop or Corel Photo-Paint you can create the
image to be marked. This may be preferable for some designs, especially those
which require only straight lines, geometrical shapes or text. For more complicated
pictures it is best to use a page scanner to import the image.

16.1.2 Page Scanner

A very quick and easy way to transform a hard (paper) copy of a design to a
software copy is through the use of a page scanner. Page scanning is especially
useful when a picture must be marked, or when the image must be reproduced very
closely. There are many types of scanners available commercially, the only
requirement is that the scanner's software allows you to save or export the image in
one of the above file formats. The resulting artwork can then be edited using
software such as Adobe PhotoShop or can be imported directly from the scanned file
into the Scrîba 3 software.

Note that the original artwork should be of a very high quality and high contrast
(white paper and black ink), as the marked image can never be better than the
original artwork.

Note that the mark can only be made from a monochrome picture.

16.1.3 Colour Pictures

Colour pictures first need to be turned into a grey scale images. The resulting grey
scale images then need to be turned into monochrome images. To produce a pseudo
grey scale image with the laser marker it may be advantageous to apply a dither to
that image. All these operations are usually carried out in image editing software
such as Adobe PhotoShop or Corel Photo-Paint.

246 Document No: QP00033 Issue: H

 Scrîba 3 Software Programming Manual Issue H

16.2 Adding a Picture Data Block

Once created and saved in a recognised file format, the artwork can then be imported
into the Scrîba 3 part program. This is accomplished first, by selecting Picture from
the Data Block Add menu or the Add Data Block toolbar. A standard Windows file
open dialog is then displayed, from which a valid picture file may be selected.
Clicking the Cancel button continues to add the data block but with no imported file.

When a file has been selected the Picture Editor opens. This allows some basic
picture operations (see section 16.3 for further information).

Figure 16.1 Picture Data Block Special Properties

247 Document No: QP00033 Issue: H

 Scrîba 3 Software Programming Manual Issue H

16.3 Picture Editor

To enter the Picture Editor sub system click on the property File Name. This then
opens the Picture Editor window as shown in Figure 16.2.

Picture Editor Toolbar Picture Display Area

Figure 16.2 Picture Editor Window

This option is used to refresh the image if and when it gets colour distortion as a
result of placement of windows on top of it.

16.3.1 Picture Editor Toolbar

Load Image Clear Image To Monochrome Abandon and Return

Undo Image Attributes

Save Image Revert Clear Crop Mirror Flip Invert OK and Return

Figure 16.3 Picture Editor Toolbar

248 Document No: QP00033 Issue: H

 Scrîba 3 Software Programming Manual Issue H
Load Image Button

This loads in a bitmap into the Scriba 3 software. This is done by opening a standard
Windows File Open dialog from which is selected the file to import.

Save Image Button

This saves the resulting image after editing. This is done by opening a standard
Windows File Save dialog where the file can be saved.

Clear Image Button

This clears the currently loaded image and removes it from the display area.

Revert Button

This reverts to the originally loaded image before any editing.

Clear Crop Button

This clears the cropping of the loaded image if any cropping had been applied.

Undo Button

This undoes the last editing operation

Mirror Button

This flips the loaded image left to right.

Flip Button

This flips the loaded image top to bottom.

Invert Button

This inverts the loaded image. Note that the black in the image is where the laser
beam will be switched on. So if the material is a dark colour turning into a lighter
colour then inversion is necessary.

To Monochrome Button

This converts the loaded image into a monochrome image using the Floyd Steinberg
dithering algorithm. For example if a jpeg file is imported which will be
multicoloured, it must be turned into a monochrome image to be marked by the laser.
The laser requires a monochrome image.

249 Document No: QP00033 Issue: H

 Scrîba 3 Software Programming Manual Issue H
Image Attributes Button

This shows the attributes of the loaded image as shown in Figure 16.4.

Figure 16.4 Image Attributes

This is used where the size of the imported image is to be changed. For instance the
image may have been produced very large and it may be important to reduce the size
of this image (in pixels) while maintaining the dpi.
If the picture Mark Size property is used without changing the number of pixels then
a degraded mark can result. It is important to consider the size of the marked image
both in terms of pixels and millimetres or inches (see Section 16.4 Resolution).

When Maintain Aspect Ratio is selected, changing either Width or Height will alter
the other value so as to maintain the aspect ratio of the original image.

Abandon and Return Button

This abandons any editing on the loaded image as well as removing the image from
the application.

OK and Return Button

This accepts the loaded image with any editing done and enters a Picture data block
into the Data Block list.

250 Document No: QP00033 Issue: H

 Scrîba 3 Software Programming Manual Issue H
16.3.2 Opening a Picture

Selecting Open from the toolbar or the menu opens the standard File Open dialog,
from which can be selected the required bitmap. When an image is selected a
thumbnail image appears to the right hand side of the dialog.

Figure 16.5 Picture Editor – File Open

Select the image that is required and click the Open button and the selected image
will appear in the Picture Display Area.

Figure 16.6 Picture Editor - Imported Picture

251 Document No: QP00033 Issue: H

 Scrîba 3 Software Programming Manual Issue H

16.3.3 Mirror, Flip and Invert

Once the picture is displayed then a number of operations can applied to it as

follows:

MIRROR, FLIP, INVERT

The results of each of these are shown below.

The Invert command is duplicated in the data block special properties.

Figure 16.7 Picture Editor – Mirrored Image (left to right)

252 Document No: QP00033 Issue: H

 Scrîba 3 Software Programming Manual Issue H

Figure 16.8 Picture Editor – Flipped Image (top to bottom)

Figure 16.9 Picture Editor –Inverted Image

253 Document No: QP00033 Issue: H

 Scrîba 3 Software Programming Manual Issue H

16.3.4 Clipping a Picture

With the picture to be clipped in the display area determine where the clip is to
begin (probably the top left corner). Place the mouse there and hold the left mouse
button down and drag the mouse to where the clip is to end (probably the bottom
right corner) and release the left mouse button. While the mouse is being dragged a
clip rectangle (dotted lines) will appear to help select the clip area.

When the image is clipped a set of clip coordinates appears in the Clip Size property
in the data block properties window. Clicking on this property will automatically
open the Picture Editor with the clipped image displayed.

Figure 16.3.5a Clipping Area

Figure 16.10 Clipping Area

254 Document No: QP00033 Issue: H

 Scrîba 3 Software Programming Manual Issue H

Figure 16.11 Clipped Image

16.3.5 Picture Simulation

When the Picture Editor is closed using the OK and Return button the resulting
image is displayed in the Simulation Window as shown in Figure 16.12.

Figure 16.12 Final Simulated Picture

16.3.6 Sizing a Picture

The size of the marked image may be altered by selecting Mark Size property in the
data block properties window. A dialog will then appear into which the Width and
Height of the picture can be entered (Figure 16.13 Mark Size Window).

255 Document No: QP00033 Issue: H

 Scrîba 3 Software Programming Manual Issue H

Figure 16.13 Mark Size Window

When the Mark Size is used the picture is shrunk or stretched to fit the width and
height values. Clicking the Clear button the Mark Size returns the picture to its
original imported size. Note that the OK button will only becomes available when
values are entered for the width and height and terminated by pressing the Enter key
on the computer keyboard. Click the OK button to accept the values. Clicking the
Cancel button cancels any changes and closes the Mark Size dialog.

16.3.7 Positioning

The positioning selections in the data block properties window are: Bottom Left,
Centre, Top Right, and Filled. The first three options refer to the position of the
picture relative to the X and Y locations defined in the data block window. For
example if the X Position and Y Position locations are -25.00,-25.00 and Bottom
Left is selected, the picture will be positioned with the bottom left corner at -25.00,-
25.00 in the marking field.

The Filled option is used in conjunction with, the X Position, Y Position, X End and
Y End properties in the data block properties window. Where X Position and X End
determine the width of the marked picture and Y Position and Y End determine the
height of the marked picture. The picture is shrunk or stretched to fit the specified
coordinates. The programmed width is marked, with the height being in proper
proportion to the original artwork.

The Filled selection overrides the Mark Size parameters.

16.3.8 Aspect Ratio

The Maintain Aspect Ratio property allows the picture to maintain its original aspect
ratio even when its mark size is changed.

When the Maintain Aspect Ratio is set to YES, the greater value of either the mark
size width or height will be taken and the mark size will be recalculated with the
original image aspect ratio. If set to NO, the image will be shrunk or stretched to fit
the size specified.

The Maintain Aspect Behaviour property specifies the behaviour of the Mark Size
property with respect to the imported image when the Maintain Aspect Ratio
property is set to YES.

This property allows either the width or the height of the imported image to be
maintained while maintaining its aspect ratio.

256 Document No: QP00033 Issue: H

 Scrîba 3 Software Programming Manual Issue H

16.4 Resolution
Resolution is defined as the number of dots per inch (dpi) in the marked image. The
resolution can be determined when creating the bitmapped file in the graphics
software. A high resolution is desirable to give the marked image a less grainy
appearance. With this in mind, it is easier to work backwards when possible and
determine the size of the original artwork by the size of the marked image.

When marking bitmapped images it is important to know what the final mark dpi
and the original picture dpi as these can affect both the quality of the mark and the
speed of the mark.

For example if the original picture (size 150mm x 150mm) was scanned in at 300
dpi, it has 1800 (300*6) dots per row which gives a total of 3,240,000 dots for the
whole image. If the final marked size is to be 25mm x 25mm then the final
resolution will be 1800 dpi. If a Dot Frequency of 1 (1250 dots/sec) is selected, it
will take 43 minutes and 12 seconds (non DSP marker) to mark. Also in order for
the dots not to overlap (the optimum) a beam width of 0.0005 inches would be
required which is difficult to achieve and hence the quality of the final mark would
be degraded. Raising the Dot Frequency will reduce the total mark time of the
image but again could degrade the mark on some materials because of the reduced
peak power available at these increased speeds. Reducing the original scanned
image to 100 dpi results in a final mark of 600 dpi, which at a Dot Frequency of 1
will reduce the mark time to 4 minutes and 48 seconds (non DSP marker). The dot
separation will be 0.0016 inches, which is achievable with the 160mm lens and a
1mm aperture. Using the standard set-up of the Electrox laser marker marking
systems (160mm lens, 3mm aperture, X4 beam expansion) the size of one marked
dot is approximately 0.1mm (0.004"). This corresponds to 250 dpi so the minimum
scanned resolution of the original should be 250 dpi. A bitmap file with an original
resolution of 300 dpi gives good results using the standard set-up.

16.4.1 Timings with DSP Lasers

The timings given above for the bitmap marking are for a laser marker fitted with the
non DSP galvanometers. The marking of bitmap images is improved considerably
with the fitting of DSP galvanometers. This is as a result of the way in which the
bitmaps are marked – only the pixels to be marked are visited as opposed to all
pixels. In general if we have a 50% black and white image the equivalent marking
time would be reduced to 50% of the original. In the examples above these times
would be reduced to 21 minutes 36 seconds and 2 minutes 24 seconds respectively.

257 Document No: QP00033 Issue: H

 Scrîba 3 Software Programming Manual Issue H

16.5 Aperturing
For most applications a standard 3 mm (.118") aperture in the laser cavity is
sufficient. However it is possible to mark higher and lower resolution images using
other sizes of aperture.
For high resolution marking a 1.8 mm (.070") aperture may be used. A bitmap file of
600 dpi can then be marked as this aperture produces a much smaller dot size,
allowing more dots to be placed in a specific area without destroying the image.
When this aperture is used more power is required, due to the physical reduction of
the laser beam size.
By contrast, if a mark must be made at a lower resolution than 200 dpi, a better result
will be achieved if a larger 4.5 mm (.177") aperture is inserted. This makes the
diameter of the marked dot larger therefore requiring less resolution. Less laser
power is needed when using a larger aperture.

Note that as well as changing the aperture size, the focal length of the lens and the
power available in the laser marker can also have an effect on the final dot size.

16.6 Scan Speed (Dot Frequency)

The scan speed refers to the number of dots marked per second. The minimum scan
speed is 1,250 dots per second (1.250 kHz). The scan speed is programmable in
steps up to 6,250 dots per second (6.250 kHz).

The advantage of a higher scan speed is that the picture can be marked much faster
than at a lower scan speed. However as the scan speed increases, the peak power of
each laser pulse decreases. This reduces the quality of the mark on some materials
as the dot size decreases. Experimentation with the scan speed is the best way to
determine if the quality of the marked image is affected.

The scan speed is adjusted in the Picture data block, as the W Freq property. Whole
numbers from 1 to 5 may be entered in this window. The software defaults at 2. The
following charts indicate the scan speed at each programmed number:

The Scrîba 1, Scriba Eplus and the Generation 2 electronics values are as follows :-

W Freq Scan Speed

1 1250 dots / second

2 2500 dots / second

3 5000 dots / second

4 7500 dots / second

5 10000 dots / second

258 Document No: QP00033 Issue: H

 Scrîba 3 Software Programming Manual Issue H
The Scrîba 2, Scrîba 2plus, Cobra, Cobra 2 and Cobra 2plus values are as follows:

W Freq Scan Speed

1 1250 dots / second

2 1563 dots / second

3 2083 dots / second

4 3125 dots / second

5 6250 dots / second

Normally the scan speed or dot frequency pertains to the rate at which the material is
hit. This can be added to by altering the Frequency in the Laser properties tab. The
default value is zero which is compatible with earlier versions of software.

16.6.1 Hits per Pixel

There are certain instances where multiple hits are required for each individual pixel
that is to be marked. This is particularly useful in achieving high contrast marks on
materials such as stainless steel. This provides limited higher localised heating
giving a different effect to multiple passes of the entire bitmap. It must be noted that
an increase in the Hits per Pixel will result in a proportional increase in the marking
time. The maximum value of Hits per Pixel is 255. This feature is only available
with DSP laser markers.

16.7 Grey Scale Images

Grey scale images can be marked via an indirect method. Import the bitmap image
as normal and then set the Mark as Greyscale property to Yes. When this property is
set to Yes the property Greyscale Power Settings is enabled. When the image is
sent, will be split into, up to 16 separate images which will each be marked at a
power specified in the Greyscale Power Settings dialog (Figure 16.14). This dialog
allows the individual power settings for each of the 16 images to make up the final
grey scale image. These power settings will be dependent on the material and
whether the material is light turning dark or dark turning light.

To specify a linear gradient, set the power values for grey scales 1 and 16 then click
the Start – End Linear button. This is usually a good starting point for the grey
scales. The individual power settings may also be changed using either the slider
bar, or by clicking the slide bar and typing in the power required in the Current
Value edit box.

259 Document No: QP00033 Issue: H

 Scrîba 3 Software Programming Manual Issue H

Figure 16.14 Greyscale Power Settings Dialog

16.8 Marking Rotary Pictures

You can use the rotary feature of the marker for marking pictures on a curved
surface. In order to be able to access the rotary feature the ‘Rotary Enable’ option
must be selected in the preferences window. The properties which control rotary
marking can be seen in the Picture data block window (Figure 16.1) and are Part
Radius and Start Angle. See Section 13.5 for further details.

Note: For a rotary to operate correctly the marker must already have been set up
using the ‘Rotary Set-up’ command, see section 7.91.

16.7.1 Part Radius

This sets the radius of the part to be marked in millimetres or inches depending on
the units selected in the preferences. If the radius is given as zero no rotary
actions are performed. The maximum value is 132mm or 5.2 inches. When the Part
Radius is set to zero the other rotary functions are disabled.

16.7.2 Reset Zero Degrees

Reset Zero Degrees resets the current position of the rotary axis to be zero degrees.
This is used mainly when the home switch is not in use with the rotary axis. This is
not available if the Part Radius is set to zero.

16.7.3 Start Angle

Start Angle is the angle of the rotary axis at which the marking is going to begin.
This is not available if the Part Radius is set to zero. Values between +/-360 are
valid.

260 Document No: QP00033 Issue: H

 Scrîba 3 Software Programming Manual Issue H

17
Section 17: 1D and 2D Codes Programming
In this section:
17.1 Bar Codes
17.2 Bar Code Properties
17.2.1 Justification
17.2.2 Height
17.2.3 Wide Bar Width
17.2.4 Narrow Bar Width
17.2.5 Bar/Gap Aspect Ratio
17.2.6 Wide/Narrow Ratio
17.2.7 HSep
17.2.8 Quiet Zone
17.2.9 Gap
17.2.10 Positive or Negative
17.2.11 Density
17.2.12 Line Width and Line Sep
17.2.13 Use Wide Bar Width
17.2.14 Bar Code 128 Additional Functions
17.3 Data Matrix Programming
17.3.1 Format
17.3.2 ECC Level
17.3.3 Rows
17.3.4 Columns
17.3.5 Number of Lines
17.3.6 Cell Size
17.3.7 Matrix Size
17.3.8 Line Width
17.3.9 Beam On Time
17.3.10 Scan Direction
17.3.11 Inverted
17.3.12 Bitmap Style
17.3.13 Interlaced
17.3.14 Contour Fill
17.3.15 Use Overall Size
17.3.16 Cell Separation
17.3.17 Text
17.3.18 UID Conformance Characters
17.4 3DI Code Programming
17.4.1 Beam Step Distance
17.4.2 Beam Step Inset
17.4.3 Diameter
17.4.4 Text
17.5 RSS-14 (Reduced Space Symbology) Programming
17.5.1 Linked
17.5.2 Stacked
17.5.3 Negative
17.5.4 CCA

261 Document No: QP00033 Issue: H

 Scrîba 3 Software Programming Manual Issue H
17.6 File Input
17.7 Serialisation
17.8 Variable Text Fields

262 Document No: QP00033 Issue: H

 Scrîba 3 Software Programming Manual Issue H

Codes
The Electrox laser marker is capable of marking a number of different machine-
readable 1D and 2D codes. These include the most popular bar codes, Data Matrix,
3DI and RSS-14 codes.
Using the laser to mark codes requires knowledge of how to achieve the highest
possible contrast on the material using various laser properties and how to program
the code to mark each line and space within the specifications of the code.

17.1 Bar Codes

All bar codes consist of a leading and trailing white space, called a ‘quiet zone’ and
the encoded data. The Electrox laser marker can mark bar codes encoded in one of
four different formats. These are:

Code 39 – standard and extended ASCII

Code 128 – types A, B and C
Code 2 of 5 Interleaved
UPC-A
EAN-13

 Code 39 standard, consists of 43 characters: 0 to 9, A to Z and seven special

characters.

 Code 39 extended ASCII version consists of the full 128 ASCII character set.

Note: Code 39 has an '*' at the beginning and end of the encoded data which
is marked automatically by the software.

 Code 128 type A has no lower case characters and includes the control
characters with ASCII values less than 32.

 Code 128 type B has the full 128 ASCII character set.

 Code 128 type C is a compact, numeric only code – even number of digits.
A leading zero is added to the bar code to maintain an even number of digits
within the code. This is the shortest of the Code 128 codes.

 Code 2 of 5 interleaved is a compact, numeric only code – even number of

digits. A leading zero is added to the bar code to maintain an even number of
digits within the code.

 The UPC-A bar code consists of 12 numerals, the last of which is the check
digit

 The EAN-13 bar code consists of 13 numerals, the last of which is the check
digit.

Included in the Programs.ini file are two programs to calculate this last digit after
entering the first 11 numbers for UPC-A or the first 12 numbers for EAN-13. They

263 Document No: QP00033 Issue: H

 Scrîba 3 Software Programming Manual Issue H
are UPC-A and EAN13, Typing \p in the text area of the data block will allow the
selection of these programs.

The Scrîba 3 software allows you to use the \p operator for bar codes as well as any
other scripted programs that are available such as date and shift coding. For more
information on these features, see Section 22 – Scriba Programming Language.

Note that simulation of the bar code is only a representation of the bar code and not
an exact rendition of the encoded characters.

17.2 Bar Code Properties

Figure 17.1 Bar Code Special Properties

The special-to-type bar code properties within the Data Block Properties window are
be described here. Positional, Control and Laser properties are described in Section
12.
To achieve readable bar codes it is important to identify the best set of properties for
the particular material being marked. As well as the laser properties of Power,
Frequency and Rate, consideration must be given to Bar Width, Bar/Gap Aspect
Ratio, HSep, Density, Line Width and Line Sep. These can all affect the readability
of the bar code as well as the length of the marked code.

17.2.1 Justification

The bar code may be Left Justified, Right Justified or Centred relative to the X and
Y co-ordinates entered in the data block window. Select the justification you require
from the list. Bar codes are positioned from the bottom edge of the code.

264 Document No: QP00033 Issue: H

 Scrîba 3 Software Programming Manual Issue H

17.2.2 Height

The Bar Height property sets the Height of the bar code. The default value is 6 mm
(.240"). For optimum hand scanning of the bar code, the recommended height
should be no less than 6 mm or 15 percent of the bar code length whichever is the
greater.

17.2.3 Wide Bar Width

The Wide Bar Width property sets the width of the widest bar in the bar code. This
property defaults to the correct value for the density selected and should not
normally require changing. This property only has an effect in code 39 and
interleaved code 2 of 5 formats.

17.2.4 Narrow Bar Width

The Narrow Bar Width property sets the width of the narrowest bar in the bar code.
This property defaults to the correct value for the density selected and should not
normally require changing. This property only has an effect in code 39 and
interleaved code 2 of 5 formats.

17.2.5 Bar/Gap Aspect Ratio

The Bar/Gap Aspect Ratio property field specifies the ratio of a wide bar to a narrow
bar. This property defaults to the correct value for the density selected and should
not normally require changing.

17.2.6 Wide/Narrow Ratio

This is the ratio of the wide bar width to the narrow bar width. This property is used
in conjunction with the Use Wide Bar Width property.

17.2.7 HSep

The HSep property adjusts the width of the spaces in the bar code. The default value
is 100%, where the width of a bar equals the width of a space. If the correct line
width and line separation have been programmed this will not need adjusting.
However, if the wide bars are not the same width as the wide spaces (or the narrow
bars are not the same as the narrow spaces), this value may be modified. A value of
50% gives the following: The narrow bar is twice the width of the narrow gap and
the wide bar is twice the width of the wide gap.

17.2.8 Quiet Zone

The Quiet Zones are the light spaces that appear before and after the bar code.
When a negative bar code is marked, the quiet zones are automatically marked. A
positive bar code does not require quiet zones to be marked as the material itself is
the quiet zone.

265 Document No: QP00033 Issue: H

 Scrîba 3 Software Programming Manual Issue H

Figure 17.2 Quiet Zones

The default value for the quiet zones is 6 mm (.240"). To change the size of the
quiet zones, enter the value into the Quiet Zone field in the data block window.
When a bar code is previewed it is always displayed with the quiet zones
irrespective of whether a Positive or Negative bar code is being marked. These
areas must remain free of other marks to ensure the bar code reads correctly.

17.2.9 Gap

The Gap property sets the separation between each individual character in the bar
code. This property defaults to the correct value for the density selected and should
not normally require changing.

17.2.10 Positive or Negative

A bar code may be positive or negative, depending upon whether the marked area
appears dark on a light background or light on a dark background. This will depend
on the material being marked. The default value is a negative bar code, in which the
marked area is lighter, so the quiet zones and spaces are being marked. A positive
bar code is needed for materials which turn darker when marked, so that the bars are
marked. Test marks may be required to determine which format is more suitable.
The Positive/Negative selection is accomplished by selecting Yes or No for the
Negative property (Yes for negative and No for positive).

17.2.11 Density

Bar codes can be marked in density ranges from 1.7 characters per inch (cpi) to 9.4
cpi. Lower density bar codes are much more readable, but fewer characters can
occupy a given space. High density bar codes allow more information to be encoded
within a given space, but are more likely to cause reader errors. Careful
programming, especially regarding line width, is required when high density bar
codes are marked.

The Density property is used to select the density of the bar code being encoded.
Each density selection automatically changes the Bar Width, Bar/gap Aspect Ratio
and Gap properties in the data block properties to maintain the requirements of the
selected density. These properties can then be fine tuned afterwards if required.

17.2.12 Line Width and Line Sep

Each bar of the bar code is made up of multiple passes of the laser to achieve the
desired line thickness. The number of lines used for each bar is determined using
the bar properties Line Width and Line Sep. If Line Width and Line Sep are equal
266 Document No: QP00033 Issue: H
 Scrîba 3 Software Programming Manual Issue H
then a 50% overlap will be achieved.
It is very important to determine the line width of the laser on the material that is
being marked with the bar code, especially if you are marking high-density bar
codes.
To determine the line-width simply, mark a straight line on the material with the
laser properties you will use and measure it under magnification.

17.2.13 Use Wide Bar Width

When this property is set to Yes, the software uses the wide bar width to calculate
the narrow bar width using the Wide/Narrow Ratio property. When this is set to No,
the software uses the narrow bar width to calculate the wide bar width using the
Wide/Narrow Ratio property.

17.2.14 Bar Code 128 Additional Functions

Bar code 128 has additional functional capability. This is achieved by inserting
special codes into the text area when creating the bar code. These codes are listed in
Table 17.2.11 below:

Text Code A Code B Code C

^0 FNC3 FNC3 xx
^1 FNC2 FNC2 xx
^2 shift to B shift to A xx
^3 set code C set code C xx
^4 set code B FNC4 set code B
^5 FNC4 set code A set code A
^6 FNC1 FNC1 FNC1
^7 US DEL xx
^^ ^ ^ xx
^~ RS ~ xx
^\ \ \ xx

Table 17.2.11
xx – invalid
set code – sets all succeeding characters to the new code until the end of the barcode
or until a new code is encountered.
shift code – changes only the next character and then reverts to the original code.
This encoding is defined in the Uniform Symbology Specification Code 128 (USS
Code 128). The operation of function codes FNC1 and FNC4 may vary from reader
to reader.
Example 1:
To encode S009813746 starting with type B and changing to type C to use the
compactness of type C (type C is numeric only).
Create a Bar Code Data Block and select Code128 type B.
In the text area type S0^309813746
The S0 is then marked in type B and the remainder is marked in type C.

267 Document No: QP00033 Issue: H

 Scrîba 3 Software Programming Manual Issue H
Example 2:
To encode 1234560019X using type C and switching to type B for the alphabetic
character.
Create a Bar Code Data Block and select type Code 128 type C.
In the text area type 1234560019^4X
All the numeric characters are marked in type C and the final alphabetic character is
marked in type B.

17.3 Data Matrix Programming

Figure 17.3 shows the simulation of the Data Matrix. This is an accurate
representation of the Data Matrix grid pattern but will only ever simulate each
element of the matrix with a solid square.

Figure 17.3 Data Matrix Simulation

Data Matrix data block properties set up the position, the laser properties and the
properties used to construct the matrix (Figure 17.4).

268 Document No: QP00033 Issue: H

 Scrîba 3 Software Programming Manual Issue H
Figure 17.4 Data Matrix Special Properties

As with bar codes the optimal properties for Data Matrix marking must be
considered. As well as Power, Frequency and Rate, consideration must be given to
Number of Lines, Cell Size and Line Width. These can all affect the final mark and
hence the readability of the Data Matrix.

17.3.1 Format

Format defines the range of characters to be encoded and is separated into 6 groups,
1-6.
1 = Digits 0 to 9 and space.
2 = Uppercase letters A-Z and space.
3 = Uppercase letters A-Z, 0 to 9, space, comma, period, slash and minus sign.
4 = Uppercase letters A-Z, 0 to 9 and space.
5 = ASCII characters 0-127.
6 = ISO characters 0-255.

17.3.2 ECC Level

ECC is the Error Correction Code and is divided into 14 levels, 0 to 12 and 26.
Level 0 = ECC 000, Level 1 = ECC 010,
Level 2 = ECC 040, Level 3 = ECC 050,
Level 4 = ECC 060, Level 5 = ECC 070,
Level 6 = ECC 080, Level 7 = ECC 090,
Level 8 = ECC 100, Level 9 = ECC 110,
Level 10 = ECC 120, Level 11 = ECC 130,
Level 12 = ECC 140, and Level 26 = ECC 200.

This defines the level of error correction that is applied to the Data Matrix. The
higher the error correction level the greater amount of damage can be sustained by
the code to maintain readability. This also means that the amount of additional
information within the Data Matrix is also increased. Therefore there is a trade off
between the size of the Data Matrix, the final readability (due to potential damage)
and the amount of information it contains.

17.3.3 Rows

The Rows property allows you to define a fixed size for the code regardless of the
number of characters in the code. Any value other than 0 sets the code to a fixed
size. The value entered must be greater than or equal to the actual number of cells
required or an error message will appear. If a value of 0 is entered then the software
will determine the number of cells based on the number of characters to be encoded.

17.3.4 Columns

The Columns property is used to define rectangular Data Matrix codes. The number
of columns must be a multiple of two and larger than the number of rows. If using
version 2 of the Data Matrix, this property accesses a combo-box, which lists all the
possible rectangle sizes, these are: 8x18, 12x26, 12x36, 16x36 and 16x48. For

269 Document No: QP00033 Issue: H

 Scrîba 3 Software Programming Manual Issue H
version 2 Data Matrix the Columns property will only be enabled for certain Row
values ie 8, 12 and 16.

NOTE: Version 2 of the Data Matrix allows rectangular codes at the dimensions
specified with ECC200 only. Version 1 of the Data matrix allows rectangular codes
for other ECC levels. Care must be taken, as some column-row combinations will
not be valid.

17.3.5 Number of Lines

Number of Lines sets the number of fill lines used to make up each individual cell.
If a value of 0 is entered then each cell is made up from a single laser spot and the
line width property changes to beam on time. If a value of 1 is entered each cell, or
set of cells if they are adjacent, is marked as a rectangle. If a value higher than 1 is
entered then each cell is made up from horizontal lines. The line spacing is
calculated in the software based on the cell size and the number of lines. If a value
of -1 is entered this allows the marker to calculate the optimal number of lines to fill
each cell in the Data Matrix.

17.3.6 Cell Size

The Cells Size is the size of each cell. The number of cells and the size of each cell
will determine the overall size of the code. An 18 x 18 cell code with a cell size of
0.25 mm will be 4.5 mm square. This property is enabled when the Overall Size
property is set to No.

270 Document No: QP00033 Issue: H

 Scrîba 3 Software Programming Manual Issue H

17.3.7 Matrix Size

This is the total size of the Data Matrix to be marked. This property is enabled when
the Overall Size property is set to Yes. The number of cells and the overall size will
determine the overall size of the individual cells. An 18 x 18 cell code with an
overall size of 18mm will give a cell size of 1mm.

17.3.8 Line Width

Line Width is the width of the marked line (as measured on the material). This
property is used to calculate the offset required to make marked and un-marked cells
the same size. It also determines the distance between adjacent fill lines of the Data
Matrix cell.

It is very important to determine the line width of the laser on the material that is
being marked with the Data Matrix.
To determine the line-width simply, mark a straight line on the material with the
laser properties you will use and measure it under magnification.

17.3.9 Beam On Time

Beam On Time is only used if the number of fill lines is set to 0 so each cell is made
from a single laser spot. This property then sets the beam on time for each spot in
milliseconds so a value of 6.5 would hold the beam on for 6.5 ms (0.0065 seconds).
This property will only be visible when the number of fill lines is set to zero.

17.3.10 Scan Direction

This is the direction in which the cells of the Data Matrix are marked, either
horizontally (left to right – top to bottom) or vertically (bottom to top – left to right).

17.3.11 Inverted

If this is set to Yes the Data Matrix marking will be inverted. This is for use where
the material being marked becomes darker when marked. When the Data Matrix is
inverted a quiet zone of one cell width will be marked surrounding the Data Matrix.

17.3.12 Bitmap Style

If this is set to Yes the Data Matrix will be marked as if it was a bitmap image. This
also enables the picture frequency and hits per pixel properties, which work exactly
the same as for a picture data block. The number of lines per cell specified in the
bitmap style now define how many dots appear within each Data Matrix cell. For
example if three is specified then the cell will consist of nine dots in a three by three
matrix.

271 Document No: QP00033 Issue: H

 Scrîba 3 Software Programming Manual Issue H

17.3.13 Interlaced

When set to Yes the Data Matrix will be marked interlaced. This is useful to reduce
the local heating effect of the laser beam. This is set to No by default.

17.3.14 Contour Fill

When set to Yes the fill for the Data Matrix becomes as series of concentric squares.
In some instances this gives a more even fill dependent on the material being
marked.

17.3.15 Use Overall Size

When set to Yes the Matrix Size property is enabled which allows the overall size of
the Data Matrix to be specified from which the cell size is determined. When set to
No the Cell Size property is enabled which allows the cell size to be specified from
which the overall size of the Data Matrix is determined.

17.3.16 Cell Separation

This is used to provide increased separation between the cells and is mainly used to
counteract cell growth issues. Cell growth may vary dependent on the material
being marked.

17.3.17 Text

The data to be encoded should be entered in the text area for the data block. The
length of this data must not exceed 180 characters.

272 Document No: QP00033 Issue: H

 Scrîba 3 Software Programming Manual Issue H

17.3.18 UID Conformance Characters

These are a special set of characters used specifically for UID (Uniquely Identifying
Items used with the US Department of Defense.
For further information regarding UID see the following documents:
1. DoD Guide to Uniquely Identifying Items v2.0
2. MIL-STD-130N

The special delimiter characters required for UID conformance when using Data
Matrix can be implemented as follows:

Format trailer character - RS – achieved by typing ^^

Data element separator - GS – achieved by typing ^]
Message trailer - EOT – achieved by typing ^D

To achieve the correct pattern on the simulation screen all the entries must be
preceded by the backslash (\), thus \^^, \^] and \^D. If the programs.ini scripting is
in use with serialisation then the backslash is not required in the programs.ini file.

As well as the above characters for UID conformance all the characters of ASCII
values 1 to 31 can also be encoded. Note these are unprintable characters and will
not mark as text.

ASCII Mnemonic Entry ASCII Mnemonic Entry

value value
16 DLE ^P
1 SOH ^A 17 DC1 ^Q
2 STX ^B 18 DC2 ^R
3 ETX ^C 19 DC3 ^S
4 EOT ^D 20 DC4 ^T
5 ENQ ^E 21 NAK ^U
6 ACK ^F 22 SYN ^V
7 BEL ^G 23 ETB ^W
8 BS ^H 24 CAN ^X
9 HT ^I 25 EM ^Y
10 LF ^J 26 SUB ^Z
11 VT ^K 27 ESC ^[
12 FF ^L 28 FS ^\
13 CR ^M 29 GS ^]
14 SO ^N 30 RS ^^
15 SI ^O 31 US ^_

Note that the correct firmware (G8H series) must be installed within the marker for
these characters to be correctly encoded and marked.

273 Document No: QP00033 Issue: H

 Scrîba 3 Software Programming Manual Issue H

17.4 3DI Code Programming

Figure 17.5 3DI Simulation

The simulation screen simulates only the position and size, it does not render the
actual encoded digits that will mark. Note that 3DI is numeric only.

3DI data block properties set up the position, the laser properties and the properties
used to construct the code. Figure 17.6 shows the special-to-type properties for the
3DI code.

Figure 17.6 3DI Special Properties

As with bar codes and Data Matrix the optimal properties for 3DI code marking
must be considered. As well as Power, Frequency and Rate, consideration must be
given to Beam Step Distance, Beam Step Inset and Diameter. These can all affect
the final mark and hence the readability of the 3DI code.

17.4.1 Beam Step Distance

Beam Step Distance is the distance between adjacent fill lines of the 3DI code.

It is very important to determine the line width of the laser on the material that is
being marked with the code, especially if you are marking high-density codes.
To determine the line-width simply, mark a straight line on the material with the
laser properties you will use and measure it under magnification.

17.4.2 Beam Step Inset

Beam Step Inset is the distance between the outline of each segment and the fill lines
of the segment.

274 Document No: QP00033 Issue: H

 Scrîba 3 Software Programming Manual Issue H
17.4.3 Diameter

This is diameter of the final circular 3DI code. The maximum is 25mm (one inch).

17.4.4 Text

The data to be encoded should be entered in the text area for the data block and
should consist of numerals only.

17.5 RSS-14 (Reduced Space Symbology) Programming

RSS-14 type CC-A reduced space symbology is supported by Scriba 3 and font 20
within the marker is used for the encoding. Types CC-B and CC-C are not
supported. An example of the RSS-14 symbology is shown below. This is
composite code consisting of a linear (1D bar coding) part and a 2D MicroPDF417
part. The linear part can be stand-alone whereas the 2D part must have an
accompanying linear part. The linear part encodes the item’s primary identification
and the 2D component usually contains supplemental information about the item.
The RSS-14 encodes a 14 digit EAN.UCC item identification with indicator digits of
zero or one.
The Composite Symbology encodes digits, uppercase and lowercase letters, and 20
selected punctuation characters. The selected punctuation characters are: . , ? < > ! % :
;&()-_"*'=+/

Figure 17.7

Below are the special properties associated with the RSS-14 data block. The
standard properties are described earlier. Only the additional properties are
described here. These additional properties are: Linked, Stacked, Negative and
CCA. For detailed information about the use of these properties and how they are
likely to affect the size of the resulting mark see the International Symbology
Specifications, Reduced Space Symbology (RSS) and EAN.UCC Composite
Symbology.

275 Document No: QP00033 Issue: H

 Scrîba 3 Software Programming Manual Issue H

Figure 17.8 RSS-14 Special Properties

17.5.1 Linked

The linked property is set if the encoding is to be linked. This is the linkage flag
within the RSS-14 and indicates whether a 2D part accompanies the linear part.

17.5.2 Stacked

The stacked property defines if the RSS & CCA to be stacked. This will generally
be the case where the linear part is split into two or more stacked 1D bar codes.

17.5.3 Negative

The negative property determines whether the image will be generated as a negative
image or not.

17.5.4 CCA

This refers to the 2D part of the RSS-14 symbology. Only CCA is currently
available and this cannot be changed. CCA is a variant of the MicroPDF 417
symbol. For reference CCB is a subset of the MicroPDF417 and CCC is a PDF417
symbol.

For the RSS reader to read the symbols accurately the default aspect ratio is set to
0.5 with a character separation of 0%.

276 Document No: QP00033 Issue: H

 Scrîba 3 Software Programming Manual Issue H

17.6 File Input

Alphanumeric lists may be imported into a 3DI (numeric only) or Data Matrix data
block to be encoded in the same manner that a file can be imported to a Text Line or
Text Ring data block. Refer to Section 18.3 on File input programming for more
information. Remember that these lists for 3DI codes must be numeric only. File
Input is not available for bar codes.

17.7 Serialisation
All the 1D and 2D codes can be serialised using the Scrîba 3 software. Refer to
Sections 18.1 and 18.2 for more information on serialisation.
Note: that some codes are numeric only.

17.8 Variable Text Fields

All the 1D and 2D codes can use variable text fields. Refer to Section 18.4 for more
information on variable text fields. Again note that some of the codes are numeric
only.

277 Document No: QP00033 Issue: H

 Scrîba 3 Software Programming Manual Issue H

18
Section 18: Serialisation, File Input and Variable Text Fields
In this section:
18.1 Serialisation
18.1.1 Serial Number Programming
18.2 Auto Serialisation
18.2.1 Auto Serial Number Programming
18.3 File Input Programming (Mail Merge)
18.3.1 File Input Example
18.3.2 Multiple File Input
18.3.3 File Input Commands
18.3.4 File Input with Unicode Text
18.3.5 File Input with Bar Codes
18.4 Variable Text Fields
18.4.1 Immediate Variable Text Fields

278 Document No: QP00033 Issue: H

 Scrîba 3 Software Programming Manual Issue H

Serialisation, File Input and Variable Text Fields

The Scrîba 3 software has the capability to do serialisation, file input (mail merge)
and variable text fields. These are three basic functions for different scenarios and
each is described in detail below. The Scrîba 3 software has the capability to mix
and match the above functions thereby allowing both serialisation and file input in
the same part programs.

All three functions are available for the Text Line, Text Ring, 3DI, Data Matrix
data blocks. Only serialisation and variable text fields are available for barcodes.

When using any one of the above functions or combinations of, the same Text
Substitution window appears when the part program is sent to the marker. This
window is dynamically altered according to the information being downloaded
and will probably differ with the examples shown here.

Serialisation Fields

Immediate Variable Text Field

File Input Fields

Figure 18.1 Text Substitution Dialog

Update

The Update button resends the currently displayed data.

279 Document No: QP00033 Issue: H

 Scrîba 3 Software Programming Manual Issue H

Next

The Next button moves the currently displayed data onto the next set of data.
The serial numbers are incremented by the increment value and the next file
input data is read from the selected text file.

Previous

The Previous button backs the currently displayed data to the previous set of
data. The serial numbers are decremented by the increment value and the
previous file data is read from the selected text file.

Execute

The Execute button initiates the marking process of the selected program. This
button has the same functionality as that within the Execute dialog accessed via
the Marker menu item.

Close

The Close button exits this dialog without sending any information to the
marker.

18.1 Serialisation

Numbers and/or letters can be serialised with the Scrîba 3 software. Up to 12

unique serial numbers can be marked in a single part program in either one or more
data blocks. The only limit on the numbers of characters for the serialisation is the
line length of 190 characters for each serial number. The program allows you to
mark individual parts or batches of parts with the same information before
advancing to the next serial number. From the software you can also increase or
decrease a serial number by any amount (Figure 18.2 Serialisation Window).

*Note that the host computer must remain connected to the Scrîba 3 when serialising
as it provides the next serial number for each mark.

Figure 18.2 Text Substitution Dialog - Serialisation

Each serial number can have an individual increment number which may be positive
or negative. Numbers, letters or both numbers and letters can be incremented.
280 Document No: QP00033 Issue: H
 Scrîba 3 Software Programming Manual Issue H
Multiple parts per serial number can also be satisfied. If the check box Leading
Zeros is checked then any serial number will be padded with leading zeros to the
number of characters that is shown in the Current Value. If this check box is not
checked then the leading zeros are suppressed.

If the Batch Control check box is checked, this activates the Parts Per Batch edit
which allows a quantity to be entered such that when that number is marked a
warning will be generated by the application.

If the current value is changed in any of the serialisation fields such that there is a
discrepancy between the number of characters entered here and the number of
characters entered in the data block text area an error message will be displayed.

Figure 18.3 Serial Number Warning

18.1.1 Serial Number Programming

To program a Serial number:

1. Program a Text Line, Text Ring, Barcode, 3DI or Data Matrix data block as
outlined in Sections 13 and 17.

2. Enter the text to be marked in the Edit window. Use square brackets [], to
enclose the numbers or letters to be serialised, with the characters in the
brackets as the starting characters for the serialisation. Text other than the
serialised information may be entered outside the brackets and will be
marked when the program is executed. The brackets will not be marked.

3. When the part program is downloaded, the Text Substitution dialog appears
(Figure 18.2). The text to be marked is shown in the window. The
information will have downloaded automatically. Some information can be
changed in this dialog, for example the start serial number. If any
information is changed then use the Update button to download the new
information.

4. When the part program is executed the number displayed on the screen is
marked.The software then automatically advances to the next number as
specified by the increment value. This is ready for marking when displayed
on the screen.

5. The part program is automatically updated to the next number to be marked

when the Serialisation screen is Quit. The information is not saved in the
part file unless the Save command is used to save the updated number. If the
Log Serialisations option is activated in the Preferences window then a list
of each serial number marked will be created (Section 3.11.1.11).

281 Document No: QP00033 Issue: H

 Scrîba 3 Software Programming Manual Issue H
6. If a Batch number is inserted in the Serialisation window the numbering will
stop when the last number has been marked and a signal is sent to a specified
Scrîba output module (Section 19).

18.2 Auto Serialisation

Auto Serialisation is used when serialisation is required at a high throughput (less

than one second between the end of one mark and the start of the next). Only one
serial number can be marked in this way up to a maximum of 32 characters long.
When using Auto Serialisation the host computer does not provide the next serial
number but still displays the numbers as they are marked on the screen. The last
number marked is saved locally in the marker memory and not in the part program.
Each time the program is downloaded to the marker the last number marked is
displayed in the Automatic Serialisation Window (Figure 18.4).

*Note that check digit creation is not available with auto serialisation. For more
information on using check digits see Section 22.

Figure 18.4 Auto Serialisation Dialog

As the auto serialisation is totally contained within the marker, when sending a part
program that contains auto serialisation the marker is interrogated as to its current
settings. The current serial number is that displayed in the top edit box (Serial
Number). The Increment type and value are also read back and displayed. Any of
this information can be changed.

There are four types of auto serial numbers: those that increment forever, those that
stop at the specified end number, those that reset to the start number on reaching the
specified end number and those that reset to the start number and stop. These are
selected with the radio buttons as shown in Figure 18.3. The last option is likely to
be used where resetting is required in preparation for the next mark or series of
marks particularly if the initiation of that mark is externally triggered.

282 Document No: QP00033 Issue: H

 Scrîba 3 Software Programming Manual Issue H
If any information is changed then use the Update button to download the new
information to the marker. The Quit button exits the dialog without sending any
information to the marker.

Once a program has been downloaded to the marker the computer can be removed
and the marker will continue to mark the auto serial numbers autonomously.

18.2.1 Auto Serial Number Programming

To program an Auto Serial number:

1. Program a Text Line, Text Ring, Barcode, 3DI or Data Matrix data block as
outlined in Sections 12 and 17.

2. In the Edit window enter [\A\].The brackets and anything between the A and
\ (backslash) will not be marked.

3. When the part program is downloaded, an Auto Serialisation dialog appears

(Figure 18.4).

4. Enter the characters to be marked in the edit window together with the
increment and end values if required and press the Update button. When the
part program is executed the number displayed in the window is marked.
The marker then automatically advances to the next number and displays it
on the screen.

5. The part program is not updated with the next number to be marked when
the Serialisation screen is Quit. Instead the information is stored in the
marker and will be displayed in the Auto Serialisation dialog when the part
program is sent again to the marker. The number of parts marked will be
incremented accordingly.

18.3 File Input Programming (Mail Merge)

The File Input feature is used to import text files into the Scrîba 3 Text Line, Text
Ring, Bar Code or Data Matrix data blocks. This is useful when marking repetitive
information in which only a portion of the information changes with each mark.

The input file is created in an editor program, such as Word or NotePad and is saved
in an ASCII text only file format. When creating the input file, each item should be
on a line by itself with a carriage return at the end of each line (carriage return
delimited).

To program a File Input in a part program:

1. Program a Text Line or Text Ring data block as outlined in Sections 13.4
and 13.6.

2. Enter the text to be marked, other than the input file information, in the Edit
window.

283 Document No: QP00033 Issue: H

 Scrîba 3 Software Programming Manual Issue H
3. Enter a set of curly braces, ‘{}’, where the input information is to be marked.
Both the open and close braces must be present. The braces and anything
within them will not be marked.

4. When the part program is downloaded to the marker, a standard Windows

File Open dialog appears on the screen from which you can select the text
file required (Figure 18.5).

5. When the part program is executed, each time a set of braces is encountered,
the next consecutive line of the text file is marked automatically.

Figure 18.5 Text File List Window

For example, if the file input text file has the first six lines as follows:
chris
fred
bert
bill
bob
sidney

Figure 18.6 Text File Input Window – first download

Figure 18.6 shows the first three lines of data from the imported text file. After
these are marked the next three lines of data from the text file are automatically
downloaded as shown in Figure 18.7 below.

284 Document No: QP00033 Issue: H

 Scrîba 3 Software Programming Manual Issue H

Figure 18.7 Text File Input Window – second download

18.3.1 File Input Example

Example: Word text only file (*.txt)
Joe Smith
1614 Winding Way
Indianapolis, Indiana
John Doe
1234 Any Street
Washington, D.C.
Mary Ann Jones
66 Banta Trail, Apt. 2D
Venice, Florida

A left justified text line data block with three file input locations.
Name: {1}
Address: {2}
{3}

The resulting marks are as follows:

Figure 18.8 Mark No.1

285 Document No: QP00033 Issue: H

 Scrîba 3 Software Programming Manual Issue H

Figure 18.9 Mark No.2

Figure 18.10 Mark No.3

18.3.2 Multiple File Input

This allows information from the input text file to be marked twice instead of once
without loading in the next item. To perform this operation you create a second data
block after a {} data block which contains {\<}.
e.g.

First Data Block Second Data Block

{} {\<}
{} {\<}
{} {\<}
{} {\<}

This will cause the input text from the first data block to be marked in the second
one as well.
So the first {\<} will copy information from the first {} data block, the second {\<}
will copy information from the second {} data block etceteras.
NOTE: Ensure that the number of {\<} data blocks does not exceed the number of {}
data blocks, and that the total number of pairs in any Part file does not exceed 64.

18.3.3 File Input Commands

It is possible to change the font, horizontal separation, height, filled status, slant, part
radius and start angle in a file input data block during an active file input. This is
achieved by inserting keywords into the file input file itself, these keywords are:

286 Document No: QP00033 Issue: H

 Scrîba 3 Software Programming Manual Issue H
\-FONTNUMBER <font number> - <font number> is 1 to 10 or 20
\-FONTHSEP <character sep> - <character separation> is ±100%
\-FONTHEIGHT <font height> - <font height> is the height in inches
\-FONTFILL <value> - <value> is 0 (not filled) or 1 (filled)
\-FONTSLANT <font slant> - <font slant> is ±60°
\-PARTRADIUS <part radius> - <part radius> is the part radius in inches
\-STARTANGLE <start angle> - <start angle> is 0 to 360°
\-XPOS <value> - <value> is the X position in inches
\-YPOS <value> - <value> is the Y position in inches
\-JUSTIFICATION <value> - <value> is L (left), R (right) or C (centre)

These commands may be upper, lower or mixed case.

These are followed by the new value. Include a set of statements for each file input
data block you wish to alter. If you wanted to change the font to Font 3 then you
would use the command: \-FONTNUMBER 3 etc.

Note that the range of font number has changed from 10 to 20. This change is
dependent upon the EPROM fitted to the laser marker.

File Input commands example:

The Data Block contents are:

Data Block 1 Text
{}
Data Block 2 Text
{}
Data Block 3 Text
{}

The File Input file contents are:

\-FONTNUMBER 3
\-FONTHEIGHT 3
\-FONTHSEP 25
\-FONTFILL 1
\-FONTSLANT 0
Mr. Baker
\-FONTNUMBER 1
\-FONTHEIGHT 2.5
\-FONTHSEP 0
\-FONTFILL 0
\-PARTRADIUS 25
22 Vale Rise
\-FONTNUMBER 5
\-FONTHEIGHT 1
\-FONTHSEP 0
\-FONTFILL 1
\-STARTANGLE 30
Forest Grove
Gerald Harvey

287 Document No: QP00033 Issue: H

 Scrîba 3 Software Programming Manual Issue H
216 Ails Lane
Cambridge Way
\-FONTNUMBER 1
\-FONTHEIGHT 1.5
\-FONTHSEP 100
\-FONTFILL 0
\-FONTSLANT 15
\-PARTRADIUS 30
\-STARTANGLE 999
Lesley Dawson
41 Hale’s Creek
Highbury

This will set the first data block’s contents to Font 3, Height, Hsep 25, Filled, No
Slant.
Second data blocks contents to Font 1, Height 2.5, Hsep 0, No Fill, Part Radius 25.
Third data blocks contents to Font 5, Height 1, Hsep 0, Filled, Start Angle 30.
This applies to the first six lines of text in the file input file, at which point the first
data block’s settings are changed to Font 1, Height 1.5, Hsep 100, No Fill, Slant 15,
Part Radius 30, Start Angle 999.

Limitations and prerequisites

1) All fonts must have been downloaded prior to the use of the file input file.
2) A template part file must include the correct number of data blocks. For
instance if you are using five lines and may require five different fonts then
the template part file must include five data blocks that each contain {} (for
file input).

Be Aware:
If you specify a character height of 3.46 inches etc, the marker will try to mark it.
There is no checking done on these parameters.

288 Document No: QP00033 Issue: H

 Scrîba 3 Software Programming Manual Issue H

18.3.4 File Input with Unicode Text

When Unicode text is being used for the File Input the File Input can only be used
with text line data blocks. Also within the text data block Unicode must be set to
Yes and the correct Unicode font selected. Note also that the incoming file must
have been saved as a Unicode file.

In Notepad this is done as follows:

Select from the Format menu the Font item and select the required font.

Figure 18.11 Notepad Font Selection

When the file is being saved, select from the File menu Save As…

Figure 18.12 Notepad Save As Selection

Then select the option Unicode big endian as shown above. In this way the file will
be saved correctly with the required Unicode text for use in Scriba 3.

289 Document No: QP00033 Issue: H

 Scrîba 3 Software Programming Manual Issue H

18.3.5 File Input with Bar Codes

There is the possibility when using input from other files in that the imported
characters may not be valid for the particular bar code selected. Should there be a
discrepancy between the input information and that allowed by the barcode type
selected then a dialog will be displayed as shown in Figure 18.13

Figure 18.13 Invalid Barcode Character Warning Message

To continue updating the marker with the input information select Yes, otherwise
select No. Selection of Yes ignores the error and may result in an erroneous barcode
being marked. Selection of No abandons the download.

18.4 Variable Text Fields

Variable text fields allow the program to contain a placeholder for a variable length
text string to be sent to the marker at a later time. Figure 18.11 shows a text block
containing a variable text placeholder, in this case ‘\F1\’. Variable text fields can be
used with Text Line, Text Ring, Bar Code and Data Matrix data blocks. Note that
the same caveats exist with respect to the characters used for variable text fields as
for file input with bar codes; see Section 18.3.4.

Up to 100 placeholders are available - F0 to F99. (Note: the placeholder must be

enclosed within the backslash (‘\’) characters). For more detailed information on
this feature see Section 18.1.

Figure 18.14 Edit Window – Variable Text Field (VTF)

For simulation purposes it is possible to show the correct length and position of the
variable text on screen. This is useful if the number of characters is known in
advance.

To allocate the required number of characters to represent the variable text field the
following can be entered: \F1XXXXXXXX\. This command allocates eight
character spaces and simulates the potential mark in the approximate position if left,

290 Document No: QP00033 Issue: H

 Scrîba 3 Software Programming Manual Issue H
right or centre justified. It will be absolutely correct if mono-spacing is selected
(Character Separation set to zero).
The extra characters after the ‘F1’ are not sent to the marker.

Note that the number of placeholders available is dependent upon the EPROM
(firmware) fitted to the laser marker. The full one hundred are available with the the
G5U series or later firmware. Prior to this level of firmware there are only 12
placeholders available (F0 to F9 and FA and FB).

18.4.1 Immediate Variable Text Fields

Generally variable text fields are intended for update via some software other than
this application. In some instances this may not be required and immediate update
required from within this application. For example an operator might be reading a
barcode from a different job card for each succeeding mark. Therefore by setting
the Immediate Variable Text Fields option to Yes in the part file preferences this can
be achieved.

When The Immediate Variable Text Field option is selected the window shown in
Figure 18.15 appears. Information is expected to be entered as shown in Figure
18.16. In this case ‘Fred Bloggs’ is entered. After entry of this information, the
Update button must be clicked to update the variable text field. If you wish to
change the information just sent, enter the new information and click the Update
button again.

Figure 18.15 Immediate Variable Text Fields

Figure 18.16 Immediate Variable Text Fields

291 Document No: QP00033 Issue: H

 Scrîba 3 Software Programming Manual Issue H

19
Section 19: Special Data Blocks and Commands
In this section:
19.1 Step and Repeat
19.1.1 StepRep
19.1.2 StepEnd
19.2 Direct Commands
19.2.1 CURRENT nn.n
19.2.2 FREQ nn.n
19.2.3 DELAY nnn.nnn
19.2.4 DISPLACE x,y (Duo Only)
19.2.5 DRILL x,y,t
19.2.6 >ICUR nn.n
19.2.7 MMMODE
19.2.8 OPCPOS n (Duo Only)
19.2.9 PENSET Initial Step, Line Step, Direction
19.2.10 PAUSE
19.3 Programmable I/O Commands
19.3.1 OUTHI n
19.3.2 OUTLO n
19.3.3 WAITHI n
19.3.4 WAITLO n
19.3.5 GOTO nnnn
19.3.6 LABEL nnnn
19.3.7 IFHI nn nnnn
19.3.8 IFLO nn nnnn
19.3.9 IFEQ x,y,z nnnn
19.3.10 IFNE x,y,z nnnn
19.3.11 OUTBITS xx,y,zz
19.3.12 SELPGM xx,y,zz
19.3.13 I/O Programming Examples
19.3.14 Dedicated Functions
19.4 Auto Programs

292 Document No: QP00033 Issue: H

 Scrîba 3 Software Programming Manual Issue H

Special Data Blocks and Commands

19.1 Step and Repeat

A step and repeat sequence is available and is used to repeat any data block or group
of data blocks and mark them at a given offset or pitch in both the X and the Y axis.
It is also possible to choose between marking the data blocks first in the X axis
(Rows) or first in the Y axis (Columns). A step and repeat sequence should include
both the StepRep and StepEnd data blocks (see below).
If any data block is made into a backdrop, this backdrop can also be stepped and
repeated along with the data to be marked.

StepRep Example 1

If we have a data block sequence as follows:

Data block 1 - StepRep
Data block 2 - Text Block
Data block 3 – StepEnd

This program will mark data block 2 the number of times specified by the StepRep
data block.

StepRep Example 2

If we have a data block sequence as follows:

Data block 1 - Text Block
Data block 2 - StepRep
Data block 3 - Text Block
Data block 4 – StepEnd

This program will mark data block 1 once and then mark data block 3 the number of
times specified by the StepRep data block.

StepRep Example 3

If we have a data blocks sequence as follows:

Data block 1 - Barcode Block
Data block 2 - StepRep
Data block 3 - Text Block
Data block 4 - Picture Block
Data block 5 - StepEnd
Data block 6 - Text Block

293 Document No: QP00033 Issue: H

 Scrîba 3 Software Programming Manual Issue H
This program will mark data block 1 once and then mark data block 3 and data block
4 the number of times specified by the StepRep data block and then finally mark
data block 6 just the once.

StepRep Example 4

If we have a data blocks sequence as follows:

Data block 1 - Barcode Block
Data block 2 - StepRep
Data block 3 - Text Block
Data block 4 - Picture Block
Data block 5 - StepEnd
Data block 6 - StepRep
Data block 7 - Text Block
Data block 8 – StepEnd

This program will mark data block 1 once, then mark data block 3 and data block 4
the number of times specified by the StepRep data block (data block 2), and then
finally mark data block 7 the number of times specified by the StepRep data block
(data block 6).

Note: that step and repeat sequences cannot be nested. All StepRep data blocks
should be terminated with a StepEnd data block before inserting another StepRep
data block.

19.1.1 StepRep

To program a Step and Repeat data block select StepRep from the Command sub-
menu in the Data Block menu or select the Step and Repeat from the toolbar.

The X Position and Y Position are the coordinates for the start of the Step and
Repeat. The X Pitch is the pitch (positive or negative) of the columns. The Y Pitch
is the pitch (positive or negative) of the rows.

Enter the number of Rows and Columns that are required and the order of marking -
whether to mark row by row (Rows First) or column by column (Columns First).
The control properties are reduced to Enable Send and Enable Simulate only.

294 Document No: QP00033 Issue: H

 Scrîba 3 Software Programming Manual Issue H

Figure 19.1 Step and Repeat Data Block Properties

19.1.2 StepEnd

The Step End command is used to stop the Step and Repeat command. When the
program encounters the Step End command it loops back to the Step and Repeat
command and repeats the data blocks between the two commands the specified
number of times before continuing with the remaining data blocks, if any. The Step
End data block contains only the one property as shown below – Enable Send.

Figure 19.2 Step End Data Block Properties

19.2 Direct Commands

The various Direct Commands allow the Scrîba 3 software to communicate directly
with the marker and the I/O controls. Direct commands are used when programming
and when using the Programmable I/O. When this software feature is used, it is very
important that the exact command words are used and that the units used are correct.
These commands give great flexibility to the marker and because of this they must
be used with care or potentially unexpected results may occur.

Figure 19.3 Direct Command Data Block Properties

Only the two properties, Enable Send and Pause Command are available for Direct
Command data blocks. For a description of these properties see Section 12.4 –
Control Properties.

There are a large number of Direct Commands used when programming. The most
commonly used commands are as follows. The Direct commands are entered into

295 Document No: QP00033 Issue: H

 Scrîba 3 Software Programming Manual Issue H
the Edit window and each command is placed on a separate line (terminated with a
carriage return).

19.2.1 CURRENT nn.n

This direct command will raise the marker lamp current to the value given and is
normally used together with the Delay command in the first data block of a part
program. Using this command the laser power is already at the level programmed in
the following data blocks when the shutter is opened so the resulting mark is
consistent in appearance. This command is synonymous with the Power property in
the individual data blocks.

19.2.2 FREQ nn.n

This direct command controls the frequency of the Q-switch in kHz. This command
will normally be used in conjunction with the CURRENT and DRILL commands.

19.2.3 DELAY nnn.nnn

When this command is encountered in the execution of a part program, the execution
of the program delays for the specified period of time up to 999.999 seconds.

19.2.4 DISPLACE x,y (Duo Only)

This direct command displaces the co-ordinates of the mark on Head 2 by the X and
Y values given.

19.2.5 DRILL x,y,t

This direct command will position the beam at the ‘x’ and ‘y’ values given and then
turn on the beam for the specified time ‘t’ in milliseconds. The laser properties used
will be those carried forward from the previous data block or they may be included
in the same direct command data block as shown.
A direct command data block could then look like this:
CURRENT 60.0
DELAY 1.5
FREQ 5.0
DRILL 25,25,3.5
This will move the beam to X 25 Y 25 and open the shutter for 3.5 ms at 60%
current (power) 5 kHz frequency after an initial delay of 1.5 seconds to allow the
marker to attain the power specified.

296 Document No: QP00033 Issue: H

 Scrîba 3 Software Programming Manual Issue H

19.2.6 >ICUR nn.n

This direct command sets the marker lamp current to the value given as soon as the
part file is sent to the marker. The lamp current will remain at this value until the
marker is turned off. This command is useful if the laser is marking continuously as
you do not require the delay command thus saving mark time.

19.2.7 MMMODE

The MMMode command allows you to enter commands into the data block in
metric mode as opposed to imperial. To program metric values enter MMMode on
the first line of the direct command data block followed by the relevant data on the
next lines. Careful use of this command is advised. It can affect the Displace
command above, any motion control and any step and repeats.

19.2.8 OPCPOS n (Duo Only)

This command allows you to change the position of the beam switch in the original
Scrîba Duo marker from Head 1 (OPCPOS 0) to both heads (OPCPOS 1) or to Head
2 (OPCPOS 2).

19.2.9 PENSET Initial Step, Line Step, Direction

This command is used to modify the default Penset command in the marker
firmware, which is used to fill an outline font. The initial step value is the distance
between the outline and the fill lines. The line step value is the distance between fill
lines and the direction is the direction of the fill. Vertical is 0 and horizontal is 1.
These properties are entered in thousandths of an inch. For example:

PENSET 2,3,0

This command is superceded by the Use Block Pen Setup property in the Text data
blocks (see Section 13.8 – Pen Setup).

19.2.10 PAUSE

The Pause command causes the part program to pause when it is encountered and
flashes the Start button on the control panel. To continue the mark the Start button
must be pressed again. This is synonymous with the Pause Command that appears
in the Control properties of the data block properties window (see Section 12.4 –
Control Properties).

297 Document No: QP00033 Issue: H

 Scrîba 3 Software Programming Manual Issue H

19.3 Programmable I/O Commands

The Programmable I/O feature is used primarily to integrate the marker system to
the customer’s parts handling system. There are three programmable inputs and
three programmable outputs as standard.

Programmable I/O commands are incorporated into the part program by selecting a
Direct Command data block and entering the desired command in the Edit window
of the data block. Multiple commands can be included in one data block, but each
command must be on a line by itself, with the exceptions of IFHI / GOTO and IFLO
/ GOTO. Commands are executed in the order in which they appear in the data
block.

If the command value is out of range, the command is ignored and normal execution
continues.

19.3.1 OUTHI n

The value n is a number, 11, 12, or 13, which specifies an output module. When this
command is encountered in the execution of a part program, the specified output
module is energised. If the specified module is already on, no action will occur. If
an output is high when the program is completed, it remains high. See Appendix D
for laser specific available outputs.

19.3.2 OUTLO n

The value n is a number, 11, 12, or 13, which specifies an output module. When this
command is encountered in the execution of a part program, the specified module is
de-energised. If the specified module is already off, no action occurs. See Appendix
D for laser specific available outputs.

19.3.3 WAITHI n

The value n is a number, 1, 2, or 3, which specifies an input module. When this

command is encountered in the execution of a part program, the program pauses and
waits for the specified input module to be energised before continuing the part
program. See Appendix D for laser specific available inputs.

19.3.4 WAITLO n

The value n is a number, 1, 2, or 3, which specifies an input module. When this

command is encountered in the execution of a part program, the program pauses and
waits for the specified input module to be de-energised before continuing the part
program. See Appendix for laser specific available inputs.

298 Document No: QP00033 Issue: H

 Scrîba 3 Software Programming Manual Issue H

19.3.5 GOTO nnnn

The value nnnn is a Label name consisting of from 1 to 4 ASCII characters (0-9, A-
Z, a-z). When this command is encountered in the execution of a part program, the
program jumps to the location specified by Label nnnn in the part program. See
Section 19.3.6, Label nnnn. The maximum number of Labels in a part program is 40.
An error message is displayed on the control panel if an attempt is made to exceed
this number.

19.3.6 LABEL nnnn

The value nnnn is a Label name consisting of from 1 to 4 ASCII characters (0-9, A-
Z, a-z). When this command is encountered in the execution of a part program, it
associates the current location in the part program with the Label name nnnn. This
command is used in conjunction with the commands GOTO nnnn, IFHI n GOTO
nnnn and IFLO n GOTO nnnn. The values for the GOTO command and the LABEL
command must be the same.

19.3.7 IFHI nn nnnn

The value nn is a number, 1-3 or 45-64, which specifies an input module. Inputs 1-3
refer to the standard opto-isolated input modules. Inputs 45-48 refer to the 4
dedicated user input lines, and inputs 49-64 refer the 16 bi-direction user input /
output lines. This command can be used in conjunction with GOTO and LABEL.
When it is encountered during execution of a part program and the specified input
module is energised, the program jumps to the location specified by the LABEL
nnnn and continues operation. See Appendix D for laser specific available inputs.

19.3.8 IFLO nn nnnn

The value nn is a number, 1-3 or 45-64, which specifies an input module. Inputs 1-3
refer to the standard opto-isolated input modules. Inputs 45-48 refer to the 4
dedicated user input lines, and inputs 49-64 refer the 16 bi-direction user input /
output lines. This command can be used in conjunction with GOTO and LABEL.
When it is encountered during execution of a part program and the specified input
module is de-energised, the program jumps to the location specified by the LABEL
nnnn and continues operation. See Appendix D for laser specific available inputs.

19.3.9 IFEQ x,y,z nnnn

The value x is a number representing the most significant bit of the input bits in use.
See Appendix D for laser specific available inputs. The value y is the number of
inputs being read and z is a decimal number used for the compare. This command
can be used in conjunction with GOTO and LABEL. When the command is
encountered during execution of a part program the specified inputs (bits) are read
and if the read number is equal to the compare value (z) then the program jumps to
the location specified by the LABEL nnnn.

299 Document No: QP00033 Issue: H

 Scrîba 3 Software Programming Manual Issue H
19.3.10 IFNE x,y,z nnnn

The value x is a number representing the most significant bit of the input bits in use.
See Appendix D for laser specific available inputs. The value y is the number of
inputs being read and z is a decimal number used for the compare. This command
can be used in conjunction with GOTO and LABEL. When it is encountered during
execution of a part program the specified inputs (bits) are read and if the read
number is NOT equal to the compare value (z) then the program jumps to the
location specified by the LABEL nnnn.

19.3.11 OUTBITS xx,y,zz

The value xx is a number representing the most significant bit of the output bits to
use. See Appendix D for laser specific available inputs. The value y is the number
of outputs being set and z is the decimal number which the outputs are being set to.
When the command is encountered during execution of a part program the specified
outputs are set accordingly.

19.3.12 SELPGM xx,y,zz

This is used in a Direct command block of a #AUTO program to define a selection

of programs to be run dependent on some external hardware signals. See Section
19.4 for further details of use.
xx is the highest I/O number being used
y is the number if input I/Os to be used (1 to 7)
zz is the error signal I/O port number
Input I/O number xx is the Most Significant Bit (MSB) of a binary number which
specifies the number of the program to be marked.

19.3.13 I/O Programming Examples

The following examples start with a simple program and culminate with one that is
relatively complex. The complexity of the your final IO program is going to depend
largely on how your handling system is configured and how it is connected to the
marker and what production criteria you have.

I/O Program Example 1

The Electrox laser marker is integrated with a simple rotary turntable system that
requires one input to the turntable to tell it to rotate and one output from the
turntable to indicate when it is in position (Figure 19.4).

When the operator presses the START button on the control panel, the controller
turns on Output Module 11, causing the turntable to move. The controller delays for
0.5 seconds before turning off Output Module 11. At this point the turntable is still
moving and the controller is waiting for Input Module 1 to turn on which signals
that the turntable is in position. When Input Module 1 turns on, the program
continues and marks the part with the information programmed in the data blocks
following the Direct Command data block.

300 Document No: QP00033 Issue: H

 Scrîba 3 Software Programming Manual Issue H

Figure 19.4 I/O Programming Example 1 – Edit Window

I/O Program Example 2 - a single program system

If we have the following data block sequence:

Data block 1 - Direct Command Block
Data block 2 - Text Block
Data block 3 - Direct Command Block
Data block 1 contains the following:
LABEL fred
WAITHI 1

Data block 3 contains the following:

OUTLO 11
DELAY 0.5
OUTHI 11
GOTO fred

If we have a handling system connected to the marker such that the handling system
uses input 1 to inform the marker that the handling system is ready and output 11 to
monitor when the marker has finished.

This program once started waits for the input 1 to go high (from the handling
system) at which point data block 2 is marked. Once data block 2 has been
completed data block 3 sends output 11 logic low (to the handling system) and after
0.5s returns the output 11 to a logic high again (a high going, half-second pulse).
When the pulse has been completed the program goes to the label ‘fred’ and
continues to run. This program will run forever or until there is operator
intervention or until the handling system stops (does not send input 1 high).
Because this program never ends, it never sends a completed signal back to the host
computer.

I/O Program Example 3 - a two program system

If we have the following data block sequence:

Data block 1 - Direct Command Block

Data block 2 - Text Block
Data block 3 - Direct Command Block
301 Document No: QP00033 Issue: H
 Scrîba 3 Software Programming Manual Issue H
Data block 4 - Direct Command Block
Data block 5 - Text Block
Data block 6 - Direct Command Block
Data block 1 contains the following:
LABEL fred
WAITHI 1
IFHI 2 GOTO jack
Data block 3 contains the following:
OUTLO 11
DELAY 0.5
OUTHI 11
GOTO fred
Data block 4 contains the following:
LABEL jack
Data block 6 contains the following:
OUTLO 11
DELAY 0.5
OUTHI 11
GOTO fred

If we have a more complex handling system connected to the marker such that the
handling system uses input 1 to inform the marker that the handling system is ready
and output 11 to monitor when the marker has finished. The complexity is in that
input 2, a signal from the handling system, is used to determine what to mark. In
this case we have two different items to be marked with different text and the
handling system using input 2 tells us which to mark.

This program once started waits for the input 1 to go high (from the handling
system). Control is then passed to data block 2. If the input 2 is high the program
goes to the label jack and executes data block 5 else if the input 2 is low the program
continues on to execute data block 2. The decision of which to mark is determined
by the state of input 2. Data blocks 3 and 6 are identical and both provide a half-
second pulse out to the handling system to signal to the handling system that the
respective mark is complete. Each data block then just returns to data block 1 - label
fred and the whole sequence is repeated. This program will run forever or until
there is operator intervention or until the handling system stops (does not send input
1 high).
Because this program is in a continuous loop, it never ends and therefore it never
sends an end-of-mark signal back to the host computer.
302 Document No: QP00033 Issue: H
 Scrîba 3 Software Programming Manual Issue H
19.3.14 Dedicated Functions

Additional special hardware can be fitted to the laser marker. There are two forms
of the beam switch unit (usually only fitted to a Duo). The first uses a set of
dedicated OPC commands (OPC – Optical Position Controller) and the second uses
the commands (OUTHI 15 and OUTLO 15), the flipper. You must ascertain which
hardware is fitted for correct control.

19.4 Auto Programs

As can be seen from the above examples the programming even for relatively simple
systems can be somewhat tedious and unwieldy. There is a more succinct way of
doing things particularly for simple systems and for this we use what are called Auto
or #Auto programs. If we were to replace IO Program Example 2 above with an
auto program we would do the following:
1) Remove data block 3
2) Change the contents of data block 1 to NAME #AUTO

We now have a system working in auto mode using the in-built marker signal
generation and monitoring. See Section 7 of the Electrox Laser System Manual for
the hardware information, signal timing diagram and connectivity.

The NAME #AUTO command tells the marker to use the auto mode. We could just
have renamed the Scrîba part file to #AUTO.BPT but this is a bit limiting if we want
more than one Auto program available to us.

Another main advantage of using the Auto program is that on completion of each
mark it does send an end-of-mark signal back to the host computer.

303 Document No: QP00033 Issue: H

 Scrîba 3 Software Programming Manual Issue H
Auto Program Example - an eight program system

For this example we will need to create nine separate programs.

The first program will have the following data block sequence:
Data block 1 - Direct Command Block
containing the following:
NAME #AUTO
SELPGM 23,3,31

The remaining eight programs will be of this form:

Program 0
Data block 1 - Direct Command Block containing NAME #0
Data block 2 etc - the mark for program 0
Program 1
Data block 1 - Direct Command Block containing NAME #1
Data block 2 etc - the mark for program 1
Program 2
Data block 1 - Direct Command Block containing NAME #2
Data block 2 etc - the mark for program 2
etcetera up to Program 7 (a total of eight programs).
Ensure that all programs are downloaded to the marker.

Assuming that the Auto signals are already connected up as detailed in the Electrox
laser System Manual then we only have to connect up three wires from the handling
system to the marker. The connections are defined by the SELPGM 23,3,31
command. This command can be interpreted as

‘Look at the three inputs starting at IO bit 23 and read the binary number there,
where bit 23 is the MSB and bit 21 is the LSB. Use IO bit 31 as an error
signal.’

The use of the error signal is optional. The binary number now read determines
which downloaded program is to be used. All open inputs here would force the
marker to run Program 0 and all closed inputs would force the marker to run
Program 7. See the table and I/O schematic below:

304 Document No: QP00033 Issue: H

 Scrîba 3 Software Programming Manual Issue H
The I/Os must be connected as shown below and the table shows which program will be
selected by the state of the opto-isolators.

Program number State required of outputs from opto-isolators

Input 3 Input 2 Input 1
0 OPEN OPEN OPEN
1 OPEN OPEN CLOSED
2 OPEN CLOSED OPEN
3 OPEN CLOSED CLOSED
4 CLOSED OPEN OPEN
5 CLOSED OPEN CLOSED
6 CLOSED CLOSED OPEN
7 CLOSED CLOSED CLOSED

Figure 19.5 I/O Connection for an eight program system

305 Document No: QP00033 Issue: H

 Scrîba 3 Software Programming Manual Issue H

20
Section 20: Motion Control
In this section:
20.1 Motion XY Step and Repeat
20.2 Motion XYZ Absolute
20.3 Motion XY Increment
20.4 Rotary Movement Control Block
20.4.1 Part Diameter or Part Radius
20.4.2 Start Angle
20.4.3 Reset Zero Degrees
20.4.4 Reset Part Radius
20.4.5 Using the Rotary Movement Control Block
20.4.6 Using Direct Commands
20.5 Motion Simulation
20.5.1 Enabling motion simulation
20.5.2 Motion simulation properties
20.5.3 Drag and Drop with Motion

306 Document No: QP00033 Issue: H

 Scrîba 3 Software Programming Manual Issue H

Motion Control

The motion control blocks are used to control external X, Y, and Z axes. In order to
use these blocks the marker must have already been sent the set-up commands (for
more information on set-up see Section 8.13 – Motion Control).

20.1 Motion XY Step and Repeat

This command block (Figure 20.1) is used to control the XY table positioning in a
manner similar to the Step Rep command, except that the stepping is performed by
the XY table. The X and Y start positions and pitches are entered in the units
selected via preferences (i.e. metric or imperial) along with the number of rows and
columns to repeat over. To enter this block into the program select Motion Control -
Step XY Axes from the Add data block menu. The following points must be taken
into consideration when using a Motion Step and Repeat:-

1. Unlike the Steprep data block a Motion Step and Repeat placed anywhere
within the program will cause the whole program to repeat. This means that
only one Motion Step and Repeat data block is allowed in a program.

2. It is possible to have both a Motion Step and Repeat and a normal Step
Rep/Step End pair in the same part program, however the Motion Step and
Repeat must appear before the normal Steprep in order to produce the
expected results.

This command should not be used with an Absolute motion in the same program, or
when position commands may be received from an external source via an >XYTP
serial link command (see Section 21).

Figure 20.1 Motion XY Step and Repeat Properties

307 Document No: QP00033 Issue: H

 Scrîba 3 Software Programming Manual Issue H

20.2 Motion XYZ Absolute

To add a Motion XY Absolute command block (Figure 20.2) select Motion Control
- XYZ Axes Absolute from the Add data block menu or the toolbar. This command
is used to move the axes to a preset position. The positions are entered in
millimetres or inches as selected within the preferences.
When marking is complete the tables will remain in the last position programmed.
If a command is entered that will cause the tables to move past the limits a message
will be displayed on the marker pendant and the command will not be executed.
This command should not be used when a Motion Step and Repeat is used.

Figure 20.2 Motion XY Absolute Data Block – Positional Properties

The Positional properties allow the X, Y and Z absolute destination positions to be

specified. Simultaneous movement in two or three axes can also be specified
thereby reducing the total time for the movement. If not selected, the axes will move
one after the other.

Figure 20.3 Motion XY Absolute Data Block – Control Properties

The Control properties allow the individual axes to be sent (or disabled) or to send
all the axes data or not. These would all normally be enabled.

Figure 20.4 Motion XY Absolute Data Block – Laser Properties

308 Document No: QP00033 Issue: H

 Scrîba 3 Software Programming Manual Issue H
The Laser properties are used to turn the laser beam on or off while moving. The
default is off. When Simultaneous XY is enabled the beam cannot be turned on for
the X and Y axes. When Simultaneous XYZ is enabled the beam cannot be turned
on for any of the axes.
When any one of the X, Y or Z motion axes with the beam turned on, the Power and
Frequency properties become available. These properties then allow marking while
moving for each axis (straight lines) with the power and frequency specified.

20.3 Motion XY Increment

To add a Motion XY Increment command block (Figure 20.5) select Motion Control
- XY Axes Increment from the Add data block menu or the toolbar. This command
is used to move the axes to a position relative to the current position. Values may be
positive or negative to move the table be the specified amount in any direction. The
positions are entered in millimetres or inches as selected within the preferences.

This command should not be used when a Motion Step and Repeat is used.

Figure 20.5 Motion XY Increment Data Block Properties

20.4 Rotary Movement Control Block

Initially ensure that the rotary axis been set up. For more information see Section
8.13.1 - Rotary Set-up).
Normally only text and bit mapped images can be marked around a cylinder but the
rotary system can also be used for marking items at different points around the
circumference. This can be achieved as long as the whole of the mark lies within the
depth of focus for the particular lens and this will depend upon the curvature of the
cylinder being marked.

Assuming that all the above criteria have been met we can set up the rotary to, say
mark two different items, one at the zero point and the second at the 180 degree
point. This can be achieved in two ways. Firstly using the Rotary Movement
Control Block and secondly using Direct commands.

309 Document No: QP00033 Issue: H

 Scrîba 3 Software Programming Manual Issue H

Figure 20.6 Rotary Movement Control Block Special Properties

20.4.1 Part Diameter or Part Radius

Dependent on the setting of the File Preference Use Part Radius, this
property will either be called Part Radius or Part Diameter. This property is
the radius or the diameter of the rotary part being marked.

20.4.2 Start Angle

This is the angle of the rotary at which the mark will be placed. This angle is
relative to the zero degree position.

20.4.3 Reset Zero Degrees

If Reset Zero Degrees is set to Yes then the current position is the new zero
angle position and all following angles are relative to this position. This is
useful in a part program where several moves are required relative to the first
in which case this property will be set to Yes for the first move and then set
to No for succeeding moves.

20.4.4 Reset Part Radius

The property specifies whether to set the part radius to zero at the end of the
block or not. By default this property is set to Yes. Setting the radius to zero
turns off the rotary movement thereby allowing normal marking. This is
useful when doing rotary moves between two logo blocks for example.

20.4.5 Using the Rotary Movement Control Block

This example shows how to use the Rotary Movement Control Block for moves
between non-rotary marks (logos).
The part program consists of the following data blocks:
Data block 1
Rotary Movement data block with Reset Zero Degrees set to Yes and
Reset Part Radius set to No.
This is now the zero position.
Data block 2
Item to mark – possibly a vector graphic.
Data block 3

310 Document No: QP00033 Issue: H

 Scrîba 3 Software Programming Manual Issue H
Rotary Movement data block with Reset Zero Degrees set to No, Rest
Part Radius set to No and the Start Angle set to the required angular
position.
Data block 4
Second item to mark – possibly a vector graphic.

20.4.6 Using Direct Commands

This example shows how to use Direct commands for moves between non-rotary
marks (logos).
The part program consists of a minimum of four data blocks as follows:
Data block 1
Direct command data block – rotary parameters
PRAD 2.0
STANG 0
Data block 2
Item to mark – possibly a vector graphic.
Data block 3
Direct data block containing
STANG 180
PRAD 0
Data block 4
Second item to mark – possibly a vector graphic.

The first data block sets up the rotary parameters for a two inch radius part and start
at the zero position. The third data block moves to the required angular position and
then turns the rotary off by setting the PRAD to zero. If this is not set to zero then
the marker will try to interpret one of the axes as rotation which will then appear as
jitter during the second mark.

This second example shows how to create a line 360° around a cylinder.
This can be done in one Direct command data block as follows:

Data Block 1
CURRENT 50.0 must set up the laser parameters
FREQ 4.0
PRAD 2.0 any non-zero value will do
STANG 999 this is the new zero
STANG 180 go to 180°
STANG 999 reset the zero point
STANG 180 go to 180° (=360°)

311 Document No: QP00033 Issue: H

 Scrîba 3 Software Programming Manual Issue H

20.5 Motion Simulation

20.5.1 Enabling motion simulation

Motion simulation is enabled automatically once a motion control data block has
been added to the current part file.
NOTE: It is recommended that the grid spacing be increased to something in the
order of 50mm (2.0 inches), because redrawing of the simulation field can take a
long time with fine grid spacing.

20.5.2 Motion simulation properties

Figure 20.7 Motion simulation properties

The part file preferences now contain four properties that alter the motion
simulation; these are shown in Figure 20.7 and explained below:

Motion Field Width & Motion Field Height: These specify the height and width of
the motion field and should be set to the actual maximum travel values of the motion
system.

Motion X Origin & Motion Y Origin: These specify the origin (0,0) of the motion
field, it can be set to anywhere within the motion field dimensions but is usually
located in one of the four corners.

20.5.3 Drag and Drop with Motion

Drag and drop operations on the simulate screen when motion control is present
behave differently to standard drag and drop operations in the following ways:
All data blocks will be offset by the value determined by the position of the motion
origin. This will not affect the X and Y positions in the data blocks properties, only
the position that the data block is simulated in.
The simulated position of each data block will be affected by the previous motion
control data block in the part file.

NOTE: Using motion simulation it is very easy to create data blocks that are well
outside the marking field, so care must be taken to ensure that all X and Y positions
within all data blocks are within the limits of the marking field.

312 Document No: QP00033 Issue: H

 Scrîba 3 Software Programming Manual Issue H

21
Section 21: The Laser Marker Serial Link Control
In this section:
21.1 Variable Text Fields
21.2 A Typical Program
21.2.1 Loading Phase
21.2.2 Marking Phase
21.3 Marker Response Summary
21.4 Main Serial Link Commands
21.5 Additional Serial Link Commands

313 Document No: QP00033 Issue: H

 Scrîba 3 Software Programming Manual Issue H

The Laser Marker Serial Link Control

There is a set of commands called the Serial Link Control. This set of commands is
in addition to those direct commands already defined in Section 19 – Special Data
Blocks and Commands.
These control commands consist of a four letter word preceded by the ‘>‘ character.
One or two of the commands are followed by a further data string and terminated
with the carriage return character <CR>. These commands usually elicit a response
from the marker of a three character string preceded by the ‘<‘ character.
These commands provide a protocol for a third party program to communicate with
the marker without the use of this application. Some of these commands can also be
used in Direct Command data blocks.

21.1 Variable Text Fields

One of the main reasons for using this set of commands is the availability of the
Variable Text Fields facility. To use this facility a program should have been
created in the Scrîba 3 software and then downloaded to the laser marker. This
program should consist of, at minimum, a single text data block (see Figure 21.1).

Figure 21.1 Variable Text Field – Edit Window

This \F1\ command becomes a placeholder for a variable length text string to be sent
to the marker at a later time. The following example shows the updating of the
variable text field. In this example we will call the Scrîba 3 program DEMO.BPT.

1) Download the Scrîba 3 program to the marker

2) Select the program by sending >SPGM DEMO

The marker will respond with <R0 (program found)

3) Set the contents of the variable text field by sending

>SFLD 1 testing 123
The marker will respond with <R0 (successful)

4) Execute the mark by sending >MARK

The marker will respond with <R0 (command OK)
and then with <R9 (successful completion of mark)

The text marked would be ‘testing 123’.

314 Document No: QP00033 Issue: H

 Scrîba 3 Software Programming Manual Issue H
The same variable text field placeholder can be used in multiple data block. This
gives us the ability to mark the same data into a bar code data block and a text data
block for example. For more information see Section 18.4 – Variable Text Fields.

21.2 A Typical Program

A detailed control sequence is shown next. Only the normal responses are shown.
For each command the full range of responses would have to be considered and
appropriate actions taken.
Note: All commands and responses are followed by an ASCII carriage return <CR>

21.2.1 Loading Phase

COMMAND RESPONSE
1) >STAT Check if communications are alive
<Rn (n = other than 4 is OK)
2) >RERR Clears error register
<R0
<ERRhhhhhhhhhhhhhhhh
<ERRhhhhhhhhhhhhhhhh Ignore the h values.
3) Erase Clears all programs from memory.
No response
4) Send your precompiled Scrîba 3 program
No response
5) >RERR Check for errors
<R0
<ERR0000000000000000
<ERR0000000000000000 Ignore the h values.
6) Loop to 4 if more programs to load.

21.2.2 Marking Phase

7) >STAT Check if laser on and ready.
<Rn
n = 6 = Laser is not on, manual intervention will be required.
n = 0 indicates everything is ready
n = 5 indicates Laser is on, but shutter enable or a program is not ready.
8) >SPGM PNAME Select the desired program
<R0 Found it
<R3 If not found

315 Document No: QP00033 Issue: H

 Scrîba 3 Software Programming Manual Issue H

9) >SFLD N STRING Set all fields which will be used by

the selected program (repeat this
step for each variable text field).
<R0
10) >STAT (Optional) is everything ready
<R0 This indicates that the Laser is on, a
program is selected and that the,
shutter is enabled (console switch
on and work station door closed!)
11) >MARK Execute the mark
<R0 Marking started! (else problem)
|
|
| Duration of the mark
|
|
<R9 = Mark complete all OK
<R8 = Means mark was aborted. During
the mark time a >QUIT can be sent
to abort the mark, and a <R7 will be
returned.
12) Loop to (7) for more variable text field updates.

21.3 Marker Response Summary

For each >xxxx command sent to the marker a <Rn response will be returned. The general
meaning of the responses are as follows:

RESPONSE MEANING
<R0 OK - action accomplished
<R1 Unknown command
<R2 Bad command format
<R3 Program not found
<R4 Busy - marking in progress
<R5 Not marking - Laser ready, but shutter not enabled or program
not selected.
<R6 Marker hardware not ready to mark (Laser not on)
<R7 Marking was aborted by a >QUIT command or the STOP
button
<R8 Mark aborted - hardware fault
<R9 Done marking - cycle completed OK

In response to >XYTP and ZATP commands, <R3 translates to, an error occurred
while moving or the command would move the table out of range.

316 Document No: QP00033 Issue: H

 Scrîba 3 Software Programming Manual Issue H

21.4 Main Serial Link Commands

In general the marker will process these commands and program downloading
ONLY when it is not marking. The only two commands which will be processed
while marking are the >QUIT command and the >STAT command. Use the >STAT
command to check before sending other commands to the marker. If >STAT returns
an <R4 then wait for marking complete. During marking, program commands will
be ignored with no response at all; >xxxx commands will also be ignored, but will
return a <R4.
The status of the marker can be checked by use of the >STAT command. Three
conditions must be satisfied before automated marking can take place:
1) The Laser must be on, this is a manual operation.
2) The shutter must be enabled, this means the shutter enable switch on the
console must be set and an external switch on the work station must be
closed (Shutter Interlock J3-4 to J3-3). The external switch would normally
close just moments before a mark is to take place.
3) A program must be present and selected. >STAT will return a <R6 if the
laser is off. It will return a <R5 if conditions 2 or 3 are not true, and a <R0
indicates all 3 conditions are satisfied.

COMMAND RESULTS

>CFLD Clear all field strings

Responses: <R0 Action accomplished

<R1 Unknown command
<R4 Busy - command ignored

>SFLD n string Sets field N to specified string

N can be 0 to 9, and A or B (12 fields)
String can be up to 60 characters

Responses: <R0 Action accomplished

<R1 Unknown command
<R2 Bad command format
<R4 Busy - command ignored

>SPGM name Select Program “name”

name must be 12 characters or fewer in uppercase only

Responses: <R0 Action accomplished

<R1 Unknown command
<R3 Name not found
<R4 Busy - command ignored

317 Document No: QP00033 Issue: H

 Scrîba 3 Software Programming Manual Issue H
>STAT Request marker status

Responses: <R0 OK, ready to mark (Laser on & shutter enabled

& pgm selected)
<R1 Unknown command
<R4 Busy - Marking in Progress
<R5 Laser is ON, but shutter not enabled or
program not selected
<R6 Laser not on

>SETM xx,yy,zzz Matrix field command used in conjunction with a

program using a StepRep command.

xx = number of x parts must match x and y values as in

yy = number of y parts the StepRep command in the preloaded program.
zzz = Field select string consists of field selectors (0 ... 9, A, B) ordered in
rows.

>MARK Start marking the selected program

Responses: <R0 Marking is started (see * below)

<R1 Unknown command
<R3 Program not selected
<R4 Busy - command ignored
<R6 Hardware not ready (Laser or shutter enable is
off)

Note: If marking was started (<R0 received) then a

second response will be returned when the marking is
complete.

<R7 Mark was halted by stop button or >QUIT

<R8 Mark did not complete because of hardware
fault
<R9 Mark complete - all OK

>SBIT nn Sets the specified output bit nn, if nn is negative the

output bit is reset. See Appendix D for available
outputs.

Responses: <R0 OK
<R2 Output bit not valid

318 Document No: QP00033 Issue: H

 Scrîba 3 Software Programming Manual Issue H
>TBIT nn Tests the specified input bit nn. See Appendix D for
available inputs.

Responses: <R0 Input is at level A

<R2 Input bit not valid
<R3 Input is at level B
Level A and B are opposites. The actual inputs depend
on the hardware connected and which laser is in use.

>QUIT Abort mark

Responses: <R0 Was not marking

<R1 Unknown command
<R4 Unknown command and was marking
<R7 Mark aborted. This response is really from the
MARK command, as shown above. *

>RERR Request errors

Responses: <R1 Unknown command

<R4 Busy - command ignored
The normal response is 3 lines as follows.
<R0
<ERRhhhhhhhhhhhhhhhh
<ERRhhhhhhhhhhhhhhhh

Where h is a Hex character (0 to 9 and A to F). Each of the 16 characters represent 4

bits and when placed in a 64 bit array the particular errors can be determined. The
first <ERR group is the most recent error occurrence and the next group is the error
occurrence before that. Reading these clears the error registers so that the same bits
will not be seen again (See Appendix B - Standard Error Messages for the encoding of
these bits).

319 Document No: QP00033 Issue: H

 Scrîba 3 Software Programming Manual Issue H

21.5 Additional Serial Link Commands

Additional commands are available which might be needed for an automated

installation. These commands are global, and once sent will remain active until a
power shut down.

NOERROR

This will disable the unprompted sending of errors to the host. Errors will be sent
only when requested by >RERR.

MIRROR N

N is the field rotation and mirror property (0 to 7). This is the same setting which
can be entered on the console under the MIRROR menu. It allows changing the
orientation of the marking field. This property is saved in battery backed RAM and
will be retained during a power down.

0 - X+Y+ (Normal)

1 - X+Y-

2 - X-Y+

3 - X-Y- (180 rotation)

4 - SX+Y+ (Swap X and Y)

5 - SX+Y- (270 clockwise rotation)

6 - SX-Y+ (90 clockwise rotation)

7 - SX-Y- (Swap and flip both X and Y)

320 Document No: QP00033 Issue: H

 Scrîba 3 Software Programming Manual Issue H

22
Section 22: Laser Marker Programming Language
In this section:
22.1 Using the Scriba Programming Language with Serial Numbers
22.1.1 How Scriba serial numbers work
22.1.2 Sample Serial Number Program
22.1.3 Entering a Serial Number Program in a Text Block
22.1.4 Entering New Programs
22.1.5 Sample Check-Digit Program
22.1.6 Date Coding
22.1.7 Extending Date Coding Functions
22.2 Scriba Programming Language Reference Manual
22.2.1 Programming Constructs
22.2.2 Built-in Functions
22.3.2.1 String Manipulation
22.2.2.2 Time/Date
22.2.2.3 Date Offset Function
22.2.2.4 Numeric
22.2.2.5 Type Conversion
22.2.2.6 Miscellaneous
22.2.2.7 Scriba Serial Number Interface Routines
22.2.3 Built-in Commands
22.2.3.1 Miscellaneous
22.2.4 Operators
22.2.5 Variables
22.2.5.1 Predefined Variables
22.2.5.2 Return Values
22.2.6 General Syntax
22.2.7 Limitations

321 Document No: QP00033 Issue: H

 Scrîba 3 Software Programming Manual Issue H

Introduction
The Scriba Programming Language provides a user extendable architecture for the
Scriba 3 Windows software. It may be used to enhance the built in features and
coding schemes and should prove powerful enough to allow the creation of new
coding schemes if required. One of the main functions for this is to create check
digits for all types of mark, i.e. straight text, serial numbers, file input, barcodes, etc.
Examples of these types of program are included.

22.1 Using the Scriba Programming Language with Serial Numbers

22.1.1 How Scriba serial numbers work

There are now two phases of operation that a user program must be aware of when
dealing with serial numbering.
1. The sending phase when the serial number is transmitted to Laser marker
2. The increment/decrement phase when the serial number is updated.
To enable the program to determine which phase is currently being undertaken by the
Scriba 3 software five functions are available:

Function Name Related to phase

Sending() 2

SNumInc() 3

SNumDec() 3

SNumIncVal() 3

NOTE: Previously in the Scriba 3 software there was an additional step which used
the function SNumDef(), this function is no longer needed and should be removed
from any programs that have been written. Serial numbers are now fully capable of
changing length at any time during the serialisation operation.

The Sending() function returns true when the Electrox laser marker requires a serial
number to be transmitted. This may be when the Update button is pressed in the serial
number dialog, or after marking has completed as a result of pressing the pendant start
button. On detecting that the laser marker requires a serial number to transmit the
program should perform whatever processing is necessary to generate that serial
number.

The SNumInc(), SNumDec() and SNumIncVal() functions come into play when either
the (“+ Inc”) or (“- Dec”) buttons are pushed in the serial number dialog, or when the
serial number is being updated as a result of a send to the laser. SNumInc() and
SNumDec() return true when the serial number needs incrementing or decrementing
respectively.

322 Document No: QP00033 Issue: H

 Scrîba 3 Software Programming Manual Issue H

Next to each serial number in the serial number dialog box is an edit in which you can
modify how much each serial number is incremented or decremented by. The
SNumIncVal() function allows a program to retrieve the value entered in the
appropriate ‘INC’ edit.

22.1.2 Sample Serial Number Program

The following serial number program generates a ‘MOD 23’ check digit and shows
the use of the functions :- Sending(), SNumInc(), SNumDec() and SNumIncVal().
;
;
;
[MOD23]
return = ""
if ( defined(param1) AND defined(param2) )
if ( Sending() )
p1 = left$(param1,2)
p1a = right$(param1,len(param1)-2)
p1 = p1 + "0"*(4-len(p1a)) + p1a
val1 = val(p1) * 10000.0
val1 = val1 + val(param2)
m23 = long(val1 mod 23) + 1
return = param1+"-"+ltrim(param2,"0")
return = return + "-”
return = return + mid$("ABCDEFHIKLMNOPRSTUVWXYZ",m23,1)
if ( len(return) < SerNoLen )
return = return + (" "*(SerNoLen-len(return)))
endif
endif
if ( SNumInc() )
newp2 = str$(val(param2) + SNumIncVal() )
param2 = "0"*(len(param2)-len(newp2)) + newp2
endif
if ( SNumDec() )
newp2 = str$(val(param2) - SNumIncVal() )
param2 = "0"*(len(param2)-len(newp2)) + newp2
endif
else
return = "MOD23() : Expected two parameters"
endif

323 Document No: QP00033 Issue: H

 Scrîba 3 Software Programming Manual Issue H

22.1.3 Entering a Serial Number Program in a Text Block

As with normal serial numbers the program is entered inside square brackets “[]”.
The program name is preceded by the program introduction sequence “\p”. As soon
as these two characters are detected a dialog box appears allowing the user to select
from the available programs (See ‘Entering new programs’).

Figure 22.1 Choose Program Dialog

Once the selection is made the program name is entered in the text area for the data
block followed by a pair of brackets “()” with the cursor placed between the
brackets. Any parameters required by the program must be entered between these
brackets - the type, format and number of parameters is determined by the function
of the given program and the maximum limit of parameters is set at nine.

For example the text entered for the above program might look like:

[\pMOD23(65867,10000)]

with the parameters “65867” and “10000” being picked up in the program through
the variables “param1” and “param2”. Note the positions of the square brackets.

Note: All spaces entered in or around the parameters are treated as a significant part
of that parameter and therefore WILL affect the result generated by the program.

Note: That on the second last line of this example the return value is set to -
"MOD23() : Expected two parameters", this line executes if not enough
parameters were supplied to the program call. If that is the case this line will be
marked instead of what was expected.

324 Document No: QP00033 Issue: H

 Scrîba 3 Software Programming Manual Issue H

22.1.4 Entering New Programs

All programs are entered in a configuration file called “PROGRAMS.INI”. The

format is similar to standard .INI files in that the name of each program is entered as
a section header (i.e. within square brackets), this is then followed by the program
code. Additionally a program name may be preceded by any number of comment
lines (i.e. line beginning with a semi-colon). Note: Comment lines beginning with a
semi-colon must not occur within the program code text, for embedded comments
use the REM command instead.

Example PROGRAMS.INI
;
; Program 1
;
[PROGRAM1]
if ( defined(param1) AND defined(param2) )
...
do program stuff
...
return = “.RETURN INFO.”
else
return = “.PROGRAM1 requires two parameters.”
endif
;
; Program 2
;
[PROGRAM2]
...
Program2 code
...

When the Scrîba 3 software starts up the programs and their names are read from
PROGRAM.INI, changes to PROGRAM.INI are not reflected in the program
selection dialog box unless the ‘UPDATE’ button is pressed.

325 Document No: QP00033 Issue: H

 Scrîba 3 Software Programming Manual Issue H

22.1.5 Sample Check-Digit Program

An algorithm for creating a check-digit using modulo 11 is supplied as follows :-

The number to encode in this sample is 6175516

Each digit in the number is assigned a weight as in - 765432765.... which is applied

to the number from right to left.

Therefore the result of weighting this number is as follows :-

6 1 7 5 5 1 6
6 * 7 = 42
1 * 6 = 6
5 * 5 = 25
5 * 4 = 20
7 * 3 = 21
1 * 2 = 2
6 * 7 = 42
===
158

Next the sum of the weighted values is taken = 158

Then the modulo 11 value of 158 is taken which results in 4 - this is the check-digit
and is appended to the number to give :-

61755164

If the result of the modulo 11 is 10, the check-digit ‘0’ (zero) is used.

326 Document No: QP00033 Issue: H

 Scrîba 3 Software Programming Manual Issue H

The following is the program code segment to achieve the above algorithm.

[MOD11]
sum = 0
mult = 7
Length = LEN( param1 )

FOR( i=Length; i>=1; i=i-1 )

ch = MID$(param1, i, 1)
sum = sum + mult * VAL(ch)

IF (mult > 2)
mult = mult - 1
ELSE
mult = 7
endif
NEXT

sum = sum MOD 11

IF ( sum == 10 )
sum = 0
endif

ch = STR$(sum)
return = param1 + ch

NOTES

 The above program is NOT a serial number program, for an example of a serial
number program look back at the MOD23 program shown earlier.

 If a non-serial number program is used as a serial number program, that is

enclosed within a pair of square brackets ‘[]’, it will be treated as a standard
program and serial numbering will be ignored. (It is crucial to the operation of
the Scriba 3 Windows Software that a program used for serial numbering must
follow the conventions laid out in the MOD23 example, that is it must provide
serial number support through the use of the functions: Sending(), SNumInc(),
SNumDec() and SNumIncVal().

327 Document No: QP00033 Issue: H

 Scrîba 3 Software Programming Manual Issue H

22.1.6 Date Coding

The Scriba Programming Language has two built in functions for including date
and/or time information in a mark (see the next section for details on these
functions).

The simplest form for including date information in a mark is provided in the
supplied ‘PROGRAMS.INI’ file and is as follows :
[DATE]

if ( defined(Param1) )

return = Date(Param1)

else

return = "Date() : Missing Parameters"

endif

To use this program in a suitable block simply enter the characters ‘\d’, this will
automatically insert ‘DATE()’ for you. Next add in the format string between the
brackets as described in the following section. The result can then be seen by
simulating the program. (Note, ‘\d’ is a shortcut for entering the DATE command,
you may also enter the characters ‘\p’ and select ‘DATE’ from the list of available
programs).

The characters used to separate the date format parts can be any character except a
comma. The standard terminology is used whereby d is the day of the month, m is
the month and y is the year. So the following are valid:

(dd/mm/yy)

(dddd-dd-mmmm-yyyy)

(dd:mm:yyyy)

(JJ-yy)

but these are invalid

(dd,mm,yy)

(dd,mmmm/yyyy)

328 Document No: QP00033 Issue: H

 Scrîba 3 Software Programming Manual Issue H

22.1.7 Extending Date Coding Functions

The basic date coding functions may be used to create other forms of coding. For
example, a user may require a code such as :-

T20

where ‘T’ represents the year 1998 (‘U’ represents 1999 and so on), and 20 is the
current week number. This may be achieved by creating the following small
program.
[DATE2]

strvar = date("yyyy")

numvar = val(strvar)

code = chr$(asc("T")+(numvar-1998))

code = code+date("ww")

return = code

The program name ‘DATE2’ heads the program in square brackets. The first two
lines get the current year and convert it to a numeric value. Line three calculates the
letter for the current year and line four adds the string for the week number to that
letter. Finally, the return value is set which contains the information to mark and
simulate.

As before, to use this program in a data block enter the characters ‘\p’ and select the
name ‘DATE2’ from the list of programs. (Note, this program requires no
parameters).

22.2 Scriba Programming Language Reference Manual

22.2.1 Programming Constructs

Three basic construct are provided as follows:

1. IF/ELSE/ENDIF

if ( <expression> )
...
[else]
...
endif
The conditional ‘if’ construct requires that the mandatory <expression> is
always enclosed within brackets. The ‘else’ condition is optional but the
‘endif’ is mandatory.

329 Document No: QP00033 Issue: H

 Scrîba 3 Software Programming Manual Issue H

2. FOR/NEXT

for ( [variable init]; <loop condition>; <variable increment> )

...
next

The ‘for’ loop construct requires the for control statement to be enclosed
within brackets. Within the control statement the ‘variable init’ part is
optional but the ‘loop condition’ and the ‘variable increment’ are mandatory.
The separating semi-colons must always be included.

For example, the following is legal

for ( ; a<10; a=a+1 )

...
next

while this is not legal.

for ( a<10; a=a+1 )

...
next

3. WHILE/WEND

while ( <expression> )
...
wend

The ‘while’ construct requires that the mandatory <expression> is always

enclosed within brackets. The ‘wend’ statement is also mandatory.

All constructs are fully nestable within each other.

330 Document No: QP00033 Issue: H

 Scrîba 3 Software Programming Manual Issue H

22.2.2 Built-in Functions

22.3.2.1 String Manipulation

string = Left$( string, length )
Returns length characters from the left of string, length must be >= 0

string = Right$( string, length )

Returns length characters from the right of string, length must be >= 0

string = Mid$( string, start position, length )

Returns length characters from start position within string, length must be >=
0, start position must be >= 1

string = Chr$( ASCII value )

Returns the character with the given ASCII value.

string = Str$( number[, C-Style format string] )

Returns the number converted to a string. Optionally supply a c-style format
string

number = Val( string)

Returns the numeric value of a string

number = Len( string )

Returns the length of a string

number = Asc( string )

Returns the ASCII value of the first character of a string

string = UpCase$( string )

Returns the string converted to upper case.

string = LoCase$( string )

Returns the string converted to lower case.

string = Ltrim( string, trim_char=“ “ )

Returns string with trim_char characters removed from the left.
If trim_char is omitted the space character is assumed.

string = Rtrim( string, trim_char=“ “ )

Returns string with trim_char characters removed from the right.
If trim_char is omitted the space character is assumed.

331 Document No: QP00033 Issue: H

 Scrîba 3 Software Programming Manual Issue H
FloatVal Command

There is now a new built in command within the Scriba programming language. It
performs a similar function to Val but instead of converting the string to an integer
value, it converts it to a floating point value.

eg. The string “383552.2753” would become the floating point value 383552.2753.
eg. The string “263581827” would become the value 263581827.
The function is used in the following format

number = FloatVal( string )

returns the floating point value of the string

This function has an additional benefit, where the Val function only accepted strings
up to ten characters long, FloatVal allows strings up to 16 characters long.

22.2.2.2 Time/Date
string = Time()
Returns a string with system time
Format is “HH:MM:SS.hh”

string = Date( format )

Returns a string with the system date

The format is passed as a string with the following character sequences having
predefined meanings:

‘D’ Gives the date in the form 1..31

‘DD’ Gives the date in the form 01..31
‘DDD’ Gives the date in the form ‘Sat’…’Sun’
‘DDDD’ Gives the date in the form ‘Saturday’… ‘Sunday’
‘DTH’ Gives the date in the form ‘1st’, ‘2nd’, ‘3rd’ etc..
‘M’ Gives the month in the form 1..12
‘MM’ Gives the month in the form 01..12
‘MMM’ Gives the month in the form ‘Jan’…’Dec’
‘MMMM’ Gives the month in the form ‘January’ ‘December’
‘W’ Gives the week number in the form 1..53
‘WW’ Gives the week number in the form 01..53
‘YY’ Gives the year number in the form ‘03’
‘YYYY’ Gives the year number in the form ‘2003’
‘JJ’ Gives the Julian day (day of the year) without a leading zero
‘JJJ’ Gives the Julian day (day of the year) with a leading zero

332 Document No: QP00033 Issue: H

 Scrîba 3 Software Programming Manual Issue H

‘I’ Gives the ISO week number in the form 1..53

‘II’ Gives the ISO week number in the form 01..53

Note that there is a difference of one between the week number (W) and the ISO week
number (I) for some years.

All other characters are taken as literal characters.

To use the characters 'DMWY' literally, use the escape character - e.g. '\D'

Examples:
d = Date(“DDDD DD-MM-YYYY”)
would assign a value in the form of “Wednesday 08-07-98” to the variable d.

Date: 1st March 2007

Date Code: \dDATE(DD-MM-YY-JJ-JJJ)
Result: 01-03-07-60-060.

Date: 10th October 2007

Date Code: \dDATE(JJ)
Result: 283

22.2.2.3 Date Offset Function

This function allows the user to mark a ‘best before’ date or a ‘manufactured on’
date other than the current date

When using the date function, it is possible to apply an offset to the date returned by
the system. This offset can be in days, months, years or a combination of these and
may be positive or negative; a positive offset gives a future date and a negative
offset gives a past date.

To apply an offset to the system date, use the same method as you would for a
normal date, and add the offset parameters (if required) as shown below.

\dDate(FORMAT,day,month,year)

where FORMAT is the date format parameter, day is the day offset, month is the
month offset and year is the year offset.
e.g.
Offset Command
+30 days \dDate(FORMAT,30)
+1 month \dDate(FORMAT,0,1)
-3 years \dDate(FORMAT,0,0,-3)
-2 days, +1 month \dDate(FORMAT,-2,1)
+5 days, -2 months, +1 year \dDate(FORMAT,5,-2,1)
No Offset \dDate(FORMAT)

333 Document No: QP00033 Issue: H

 Scrîba 3 Software Programming Manual Issue H

For this function to work, the programs.ini file will need to be changed so that the
date function now looks as follows:

[DATE]
if ( defined(Param4) )
return = Date( Param1,Val(Param2),Val(Param3),Val(Param4) )
else
if ( defined(Param3) )
return = Date( Param1,Val(Param2),Val(Param3) )
else
if ( defined(Param2) )
return = Date( Param1,Val(Param2) )
else
if ( defined(Param1) )
return = Date(Param1)
else
return = (“Date: missing parameter”)
endif
endif
endif
endif

22.2.2.4 Numeric

number = Round( number )

Rounds a number up/down

number = Abs( number )

Returns the absolute value of a number

22.2.2.5 Type Conversion

number = Long( number )

Converts the value to a LONG type

number = Float( number )

Converts the value to a FLOAT type
22.2.2.6 Miscellaneous

number = Defined( variable name )

Returns whether or not the variable already exists

Clr( [variable name] )

Clears one or all variables from memory.

334 Document No: QP00033 Issue: H

 Scrîba 3 Software Programming Manual Issue H
22.2.2.7 Scriba Serial Number Interface Routines

boolean = Sending()
Returns true if the laser marker requires the program to generate a serial number to
send to the laser.

boolean = SNumInc()
Returns true if the laser marker is incrementing the current serial number.

boolean = SNumDec()
Returns true if the laser marker is decrementing the current serial number.

number = SNumIncVal()
Returns the amount to increment/decrement the current serial number as entered in
the Scrîba 3 Software’s “Serial Number Dialog”.

22.2.3 Built-in Commands

22.2.3.1 Miscellaneous

REM
Provides the method of embedding comments within the program.

335 Document No: QP00033 Issue: H

 Scrîba 3 Software Programming Manual Issue H

22.2.4 Operators

The following operators are available to be used with various data types.

The operators are listed in order of precedence.

Category Operator Applicable Types

Sub-expression () Any
Unary + Any
- Numeric
! or NOT Numeric
Multiplicative * Numeric and (String * numeric)
/ Numeric
% or MOD Numeric
Additive + Any
- Numeric
Shift << or SHL
>> or SHR
Relational < Any
<= Any
> Any
>= Any
== Any
<> Any
IN String
Bitwise OR | Numeric
Bitwise AND & Numeric
Logical AND Any
OR Any
Assignment = Any

336 Document No: QP00033 Issue: H

 Scrîba 3 Software Programming Manual Issue H
22.2.5 Variables

All variables are defined as variants, that is any variable will automatically convert
itself to the type of the source of the assignment. Three basic data types exist -
STRING, LONG (32 bit signed number) and FLOAT.

The following are all legal:

a = “A String”

b = 10 - assignment of a LONG (32 bit signed)

c = 10.75 - assignment of a FLOAT

Variables will survive after execution has finished to allow consecutive runs to be
interdependent (Does not include PARAM1..PARAM9 - see below).

22.2.5.1 Predefined Variables

Depending on how the program call is set up within the data block in question, there
may be up to nine predefined variables called PARAM1,PARAM2,...PARAM9. For
example the following text in a data block gives a program call with two parameters.

[\pMOD23(65867,10000)]

Where “65867” is accessible in the program via the variable “PARAM1” and
“10000” via “PARAM2”.

These variables must be used with care. Any modification to the values of these
parameter variables will be copied back to the program call within the data block.
This facility is used mainly when writing serial number programs so that any
increments/decrements to the serial number is reflected in the data block.

WARNING: Modifying parameter variables PARAM1 to PARAM9 is a powerful

feature of the Scrîba 3 Programming Language, however because it is a powerful
feature the programmer must exercise caution in maintaining the range and lengths
of these variables otherwise it may be possible to CRASH the Scrîba 3 Software.

22.2.5.2 Return Values

To return a value to Scrîba 3 from a program all that is required is to assign that
value to a variable called ‘RETURN’ as in:

return = “some value”

More often than not the return value is what the laser is required to mark however
there are exceptions to this, serial numbering is one example where the return value
is not always what is to be marked.

Note: The assignment of the return variable does not cause the program to exit at
that point, it acts just as any normal variable assignment. It is the programmer’s
responsibility to ensure that the return value is correct at the end of the program.

337 Document No: QP00033 Issue: H

 Scrîba 3 Software Programming Manual Issue H
22.2.6 General Syntax

 Statements may be separated with white space or colons.

 All parameters may contain any expression which evaluates to the correct type.

 Programs should be entered in straight ASCII.

22.2.7 Limitations

1. It is not possible to create user-defined functions within programs.

2. The programs are interpreted from pure ASCII.

338 Document No: QP00033 Issue: H

 Scrîba 3 Software Programming Manual Issue H

23
Section 23: Laser Marker Profiles

In this section:
23.1 Setup Profile Selection
23.2 Creating a New Profile
23.3 Existing Profile

339 Document No: QP00033 Issue: H

 Scrîba 3 Software Programming Manual Issue H

Introduction
When a single computer is used with a number of laser markers that are fitted with
DSP galvanometers confusion can arise between individual machine setups. Each
machine can be given a setup profile that can be named and stored. This allows a
convenient way of setting up and controlling multiple machines with the one
computer.

23.1 Setup Profile Selection

Figure 23.1 shows the DSP Machine Selection dialog. This dialog is displayed each
time connection is established with a DSP laser marker.

Figure 23.1 Setup Profile Selection Dialog

This dialog consists of a list of all set-up profiles that have been saved on this PC, if
the DSP machine that has been connected to has previously had a set-up profile
assigned to it, then select that named profile from the list.
If the machine has no had a DSP profile attached to it, then click the New Machine
button. This will then display the New Machine Set-up dialog.

23.2 Creating a New Profile

This dialog is displayed whenever the New Machine button is clicked in the Profile
Selection dialog.

Figure 23.2 New Machine Set-up Dialog

Enter a name for the new profile. This can be any name or the serial number of the
machine eg. A0165, MyLaserMarker, Keyboard Marking, Scriba #2.
Click the OK button when a name has been entered. A new profile is generated
based on the DSP parameters read back from the marker. This profile will then be
available for selection in the Set-up Profile Selection dialog.

340 Document No: QP00033 Issue: H

 Scrîba 3 Software Programming Manual Issue H

23.3 Existing Profile

If an existing profile is selected from the Setup Profile Selection dialog, then the
DSP version and galvanometer type from the currently connected machine, and the
lens selected in the software will be compared to the saved values in the selected
profile. If any of these values do not match, then the profile mismatch dialog is
displayed (Figure 23.3)

Figure 23.3 Profile Mismatch Dialog

Select Alternative Profile:

Clicking this button allows the selection of an alternative profile, which will display
the Profile Selection dialog. This is useful if the wrong profile was originally
selected.

Marker Correct:
Clicking this button causes the marker values that have been read back to be used
within the selected profile. When the mouse is run over the Marker is Correct button
the Marker values are highlighted.

Profile Correct:
Clicking this button causes the profile values stored on the computer to be sent to the
marker. When the mouse is run over the Profile is Correct button the Profile values
are highlighted. This is used if the lens has been changed via the Lens Setup from
the Marker menu.

To change the lens selected in the software, use the drop down Selected Lens list in
the Marker group. This is useful if the lens has been changed but not updated in the
profile.

Once the DSP version, Galvo Type and Lens have been checked and if necessary
corrected, then the DSP parameters will be read back from the marker and compared
to those in the selected profile. If these values differ, then the Parameter Mismatch
dialog will be displayed (Figure 23.4)

Note: Differences in parameters 200 (Wobble radius) and 201 (Wobble frequency)
will not cause this dialog to display. These parameters are usually changed within
the part program sent to the laser marker.
341 Document No: QP00033 Issue: H
 Scrîba 3 Software Programming Manual Issue H

Figure 23.4 Mismatched Parameters Dialog

This dialog displays a list of all parameter numbers, names, the values read back
from the marker and the values saved in the current profile. Any lines highlighted in
red have differing last saved and read back values.

The following options are available:

1. Clicking on the Marker is Correct button sends the values stored in the
current profile to the marker. This is useful if the values in the marker
have somehow been corrupted. When the mouse is run over the Marker is
Correct button the Marker values are highlighted.

2. Clicking on the Profile is Correct button copies the read back values into
the current profile. This is useful if the current profile has become
corrupted or the DSP parameters have been altered not using the Scriba 3
Software. When the mouse is run over the Profile is Correct button the
Profile values are highlighted.

3. Clicking on the Pick Another Profile button displays the Profile Selection
dialog. This is useful if the wrong profile has been accidentally selected.

342 Document No: QP00033 Issue: H

 Scrîba 3 Software Programming Manual Issue H

24
Section 24: On-The-Fly Marking

In this section:
24.1 On-The-Fly Marking
Important Note
24.1.1 On-The-Fly Setup
24.1.1 Using the On-The-Fly System
24.1.1.1 Trigger Type
24.1.1.2 Trigger Polarity
24.1.1.3 Distance
24.1.1.4 Time Delay
24.1.2 On-The-Fly Preferences
24.1.3 Marking Angle
24.1.4 Conveyor Angle
24.1.5 Direct Commands – Trigger Settings
24.1.6 On-The-Fly Programming Examples
24.1.6.1 Using the trigger signal with TRIG 1 and TRIG2 to mark when the trigger
signal goes low
24.1.6.2 Using the trigger signal with TRIG 1 and TRIG2 to mark when the trigger
signal goes high
24.1.6.3 Marking a set time after the previous mark
24.1.6.4.1 Marking a set distance after the previous mark using TRIG5
24.1.7 On-The-Fly Tiling

343 Document No: QP00033 Issue: H

 Scrîba 3 Software Programming Manual Issue H

24.1 On-The-Fly Marking

Important Note
It is imperative that the lens marking field diameter is set up correctly for on-the-fly
systems. This figure is used in calculations by the software for achieving optimum
performance and ease of setup.
The mirror mode of the marker must also be set to NORM (X+Y+).

There are two types of on-the-fly marking: those marks that are wholly contained
within the marking field and those which are not. On-the-fly tiling deals with the
marking of logo files whose size is greater than the marking field of the selected
lens.

24.1.1 On-The-Fly Setup

The easiest way to set up for an on-the-fly system is to use the Linear On-The-Fly
Setup Wizard detailed in section 3.17. This provides a visual representation of the
orientation of the laser to an external conveyor system.

24.1.1 Using the On-The-Fly System

The easiest way to use the on-the-fly system is to use the On-The-Fly Trigger block
which can be selected from the DataBlock menu. This datablock provides special
properties for the On-The-Fly Trigger datablock which are described below:

Figure 24.1 On-The-Fly Trigger DataBlock Properties

24.1.1.1 Trigger Type

One of six trigger types can be selected. These are:

1. Reset Trigger – this disarms all triggers. Selection of this disables all
other trigger properties.
2. External Trigger – this requires an external hardware trigger
signal. The Trigger Polarity property is enabled.
3. Time Delay from last mark – this uses a specified time delay
from the last mark to the next. The Time Delay property is enabled.
4. Time Delay from external trigger – this uses a specified time
delay from an external hardware trigger signal. The Trigger Polarity
and Time Delay properties are enabled.

344 Document No: QP00033 Issue: H

 Scrîba 3 Software Programming Manual Issue H
5. Distance from last mark – this uses a specified distance delay
from the last mark to the next – essentially the pitch of the marks. The
Distance property is enabled.
6. Distance from external trigger – this uses a specified distance
delay from an external hardware trigger signal. The Trigger Polarity
and Distance properties are enabled.

24.1.1.2 Trigger Polarity

This property is only enabled when an external trigger is selected. The trigger
polarity has two options – Rising and Falling. Selection of Rising specifies a rising
edge trigger implemented internally as a TRIG 2 followed by a TRIG 1. Selection
of Falling specifies a falling edge trigger implemented internally as TRIG 1
followed by a TRIG 2.

24.1.1.3 Distance

This property is only enabled when a trigger using distance is selected. The distance
specified is the pitch of the marks or if an external trigger is selected, this will be the
distance delay from the trigger point. Internally this issues a TRIG 5 command. If
an external trigger is selected the TRIG 5 is preceded by a TRIG 1/TRIG 2
combination as specified in the Trigger Polarity property above.

24.1.1.4 Time Delay

This property is only enabled when a trigger using a time delay is selected. The time
delay specified is the time between marks or if an external trigger is selected, this
will be the time delay from the occurrence of the trigger signal. Internally this issues
a TRIG 3 command. If an external trigger is selected the TRIG 3 is preceded by a
TRIG 1/TRIG 2 combination as specified in the Trigger Polarity property above.

24.1.2 On-The-Fly Preferences

The on-the-fly preferences are as follows:

Direction reversed Not used on G2 control units

Pulses per metre Number of pulses per metre moved.
Marking angle Angle of the mark with respect to the marking field axes.
Offset Linear offset with respect to the marking field axes 0,0
point.
Conveyor angle Angle of the conveyor with respect to the marking field
axes.

345 Document No: QP00033 Issue: H

 Scrîba 3 Software Programming Manual Issue H

24.1.3 Marking Angle

Y+
Laser enclosure plan view
mirror mode =NORM X+
(Normal marking field)

Marking 0 90 180 -90

angle
Mark

24.1.4 Conveyor Angle

Conveyor angle = 90

Y+

Conveyor Laser enclosure plan Conveyor

angle = 0 view X+ angle = 180
mirror mode = NORM

Conveyor angle = -90

The direction of motion of the conveyor relative to the laser enclosure is shown
above. This must be set using the Scriba 3 software. Any angle between -180° and
+180° can be used, to a precision of up to three decimal places, i.e. 97.153°.

24.1.5 Direct Commands – Trigger Settings

The trigger signal can be used in a number of ways. The command TRIG X (,Y.Y) is
used in a Direct Command Block, where X is the trigger type and Y.Y is the
parameter for the trigger type. Not all trigger types have a parameter. The command
with its options is listed below:

Command Function
TRIG 0 This disarms and resets the TRIG command.
TRIG 1 Waits for the logic high signal on the trigger input.
TRIG 2 Waits for the logic low signal on the trigger input.
TRIG 3,Y.Y Waits for a specified time between marks.
TRIG 4 Not used on G2 control units.
TRIG 5,Y.Y Sets a distance from the end of the previous mark to the next
mark.

346 Document No: QP00033 Issue: H

 Scrîba 3 Software Programming Manual Issue H
24.1.6 On-The-Fly Programming Examples

24.1.6.1 Using the trigger signal with TRIG 1 and TRIG2 to mark when the
trigger signal goes low
Data block #1 (Direct command data block)

MMMODE (set the system to metric mode)

LABEL WXYZ (sets label WXYZ)
TRIG 1 (waits for a high level)
TRIG 2 (waits for a low level)

Data block #2 (Textline data block)

1234 (marks ‘1234’ every falling edge of the trigger signal)

Data block #3 (Direct command data block)

GOTO WXYZ (goes back to start of program)

24.1.6.2 Using the trigger signal with TRIG 1 and TRIG2 to mark when the
trigger signal goes high
Data block #1 (Direct command data block)

MMMODE (set the system to metric mode)

LABEL WXYZ (sets label WXYZ)
TRIG 2 (waits for a low level)
TRIG 1 (waits for a high level)

Data block #2 (Textline data block)

1234 (marks ‘1234’ every rising edge of the trigger signal)

Data block #3 (Direct command data block)

GOTO WXYZ (goes back to start of program)

24.1.6.3 Marking a set time after the previous mark

Data block #1 (Direct command data block)

MMMODE (set the system to metric mode)

LABEL WXYZ (sets label WXYZ)
TRIG 3,1.3 (waits for a low level)

Data block #2 (Textline data block)

1234 (marks ‘1234’ every 1.3s after the previous mark)

Data block #3 (Direct command data block)

GOTO WXYZ (goes back to start of program)

347 Document No: QP00033 Issue: H

 Scrîba 3 Software Programming Manual Issue H
24.1.6.4.1 Marking a set distance after the previous mark using TRIG5

The distance specified in the TRIG5 command is in the positive (upstream) direction
of the conveyor’s movement.

Data block #1 (Direct command data block)

MMMODE (set the system to metric mode)

TRIG 5,12.5 (mark 12.5mm from the 0,0 position of the field)
LABEL WXYZ (sets label WXYZ)
TRIG 2 (waits for a low level)
TRIG 1 (waits for a high level)

Data block #2 (Textline data block)

1234 (marks ‘1234’ 12.5mm from the 0,0 position)

(N.B. using a carriage return in the text may cause unexpected results)

Data block #3 (Direct command data block)

TRIG 5,44.52 (mark 44.52mm from the end of the last mark)
GOTO WXYZ (goes back wait for next trigger)

This program makes the initial mark 12.5mm from the centre of the marking field in
the upstream direction of the conveyor’s movement when the trigger signal goes
high. The next time the trigger signal goes high it will mark the same line of test
44.52mm upstream of the end of the previous mark. It is recommended not to use
carriage returns in the text blocks as this changes the effective end point of the mark
and may cause unexpected distances between the marks.

Note: for faster on-the-fly marking the marking start point can be moved closer to
where the next mark is required. This is done by adding a final text line to mark a
space at a position on the edge of the marking field nearest to the oncoming part.

24.1.7 On-The-Fly Tiling

This allows the slicing of logos into tiles while marking on-the-fly.

To accomplish on-the-fly tiling, this can only be achieved if the tiling is done along
the axis of the conveyor and therefore it is imperative that the Marking Angle and
the Conveyor angle set in the File Preferences are identical. Any discrepancy here
will result in gaps between the tiles and angular errors of the tiles.

See Section 14.8.3 for further information for the setting up of on-the-fly tiling for
logos.

348 Document No: QP00033 Issue: H

 Scrîba 3 Software Programming Manual Issue H

Appendix A: DXF File Specification used for Importing

This appendix lists the DXF commands supported by the Scriba 3 software. These will
generally cover most files. Files must be created at AutoCad release 12.

A.1 Glyph Symbol

Solid
Supported Command:

X-Pos, Y-Pos, Z-Pos. (An arrow head is drawn by these three points)
Line
Supported Command:
X-Pos, Y-Pos
Arc
Supported Command:

X-Pos, Y-Pos, Radius, Start Angle, Stop Angle.

All arcs are treated as counter clockwise.

Circle
Supported Command:
X-Pos, Y-Pos, Radius.

Text
Supported Command:
X-Pos, Y-Pos, Text Height, Text Scale, Text Angle, Text Slant, Vertical
Justification.
Unsupported Command:
Text Slant is treated as 0.
Text layout is treated as LEFT_JUSTIFICATION.

Mtext
As Text Glyph.

Attrib
As Text Glyph.

Dimension
Polyline
Start a Polyline section.

Vertex
Supported Command:
X-Pos, Y-Pos, Vertex Flag

349 Document No: QP00033 Issue: H

 Scrîba 3 Software Programming Manual Issue H
Seqend
End an Polyline section.

LWPolyline
Supported Command:
X1-Pos, X2-Pos, X3-Pos, … , Xn-Pos, Bulge.
All these points will be linked by line glyph one by one.

Hatch
Supported Command:
Line Hatch, Solid Hatch.

A.2 Control Symbol

Insert
Supported Command:
X-Pos, Y-Pos, Insert Block Name, Block X-Scale, Block Y-Scale.
Function InsertBlock() is called to insert the specified block.
All other blocks, which are not inserted by Insert command, will be inserted at
the end of CdxfGplParse::Parse() with the X-Pos=0 & Y-Pos=0.

Section
Supported Command:
Entities.
Scriba 3 processes the DXF only if Entities command is found.
Unsupported Command:
Ignores all other commands.

EndSec
End a Section.

Block
Supported Command:
X-Pos, Y-Pos, Block Name, Block Attribute.

EndBlk
End and Block.

Entities
Supported Command:
Line, Dimension, Text, Attrib, Mtext, LWPolyLine, Solid, Arc, Circle, Polyline,
Vertex, Seqend, Hatch, Insert.

A.3 Important Notes

All other commands are not supported.
Slant Text of DXF is NOT supported.
Text Justification of DXF is NOT supported.

350 Document No: QP00033 Issue: H

 Scrîba 3 Software Programming Manual Issue H

Appendix B: Standard Error Messages

The following error messages will be unsolicited from the marker.
Refer to the System Manual for detailed information about the errors and their
corrective action.

An error message returned from the Electrox laser marker consists of a 19 character
string and is of the following format:

ERR0001000000000000<CR>
corresponds to "High voltage not ready"

Error No. Error Description Error String

0 Power supply fault HexDigit 1 01 00 00 00 00 00 00 00

1 Shutter closed limit switch 02 00 00 00 00 00 00 00
2 Shutter enable 04 00 00 00 00 00 00 00
3 Interlock fault 08 00 00 00 00 00 00 00
4 Water over temp (lamp pumped) HexDigit 0 10 00 00 00 00 00 00 00
Water too hot/cold
Cooling error (Raptor)
5 Water level low (lamp pumped) 20 00 00 00 00 00 00 00
Chiller/water fault
Fibre break fault (Raptor)
6 Water flow fault 40 00 00 00 00 00 00 00
Peltier fault (Raptor)
7 Control is not on 80 00 00 00 00 00 00 00
8 HV/PSU/laser not ready HexDigit 3 00 01 00 00 00 00 00 00
9 Lamp/diode not on 00 02 00 00 00 00 00 00
10 Voltage/Current fault 00 04 00 00 00 00 00 00
11 HV over temp 00 08 00 00 00 00 00 00
12 RF not ok HexDigit 2 00 10 00 00 00 00 00 00
Master oscillator fail (Scorpion)
Laser gen. fault (Rapide & UV)
13 RF low 00 20 00 00 00 00 00 00
RF over temp (DSP galvos)
14 RF load is bad 00 40 00 00 00 00 00 00
Back reflection (Scorpion)
Laser over current (Rapide)
15 RF over temp (non DSP galvos) 00 80 00 00 00 00 00 00
Temp out of range ( Scorpion)
Laser over temp (Rapide)
QSW over temp
16 Undefined error HexDigit 5 00 00 01 00 00 00 00 00
17 PC input overflow 00 00 02 00 00 00 00 00
18 Framing error 00 00 04 00 00 00 00 00
19 Receiver error 00 00 08 00 00 00 00 00

351 Document No: QP00033 Issue: H

 Scrîba 3 Software Programming Manual Issue H
20 Parity error HexDig 4 00 00 10 00 00 00 00 00
21 Shutter fault 00 00 20 00 00 00 00 00
22 Broken lamp/diode 00 00 40 00 00 00 00 00
23 Change lamp/diode 00 00 80 00 00 00 00 00
24 Change DI water HexDigit 7 00 00 00 01 00 00 00 00
25 EEPROM error 00 00 00 02 00 00 00 00
26 Galvanometer Fault 00 00 00 04 00 00 00 00
27 Undefined error 00 00 00 08 00 00 00 00
On-the-fly over speed (DSP galvos)
28 Undefined error HexDigit 6 00 00 00 10 00 00 00 00
29 USB error 00 00 00 20 00 00 00 00
30 UPC bar code error 00 00 00 40 00 00 00 00
31 Too many errors 00 00 00 80 00 00 00 00
32 Memory is full HexDigit 9 00 00 00 00 01 00 00 00
33 Program table full 00 00 00 00 02 00 00 00
34 Serial number error 00 00 00 00 04 00 00 00
35 Undefined character 00 00 00 00 08 00 00 00
36 Logo not loaded HexDigit 8 00 00 00 00 10 00 00 00
37 Checksum error 00 00 00 00 20 00 00 00
38 Serial port time out 00 00 00 00 40 00 00 00
39 Picture marking error 00 00 00 00 80 00 00 00
40 Dot spacing too large HexDigit 11 00 00 00 00 00 01 00 00
41 Zero radius in CPU 00 00 00 00 00 02 00 00
42 Value out of field 00 00 00 00 00 04 00 00
43 Character too complicated - filling 00 00 00 00 00 08 00 00
error
44 Calibration fault HexDigit 10 00 00 00 00 00 10 00 00
45 Multi-program full 00 00 00 00 00 20 00 00
46 Character full 00 00 00 00 00 40 00 00
47 Cannot find auto program 00 00 00 00 00 80 00 00
48 Label not found HexDigit 13 00 00 00 00 00 00 01 00
49 Part Radius too small 00 00 00 00 00 00 02 00
50 Bad motion calibration 00 00 00 00 00 00 04 00
51 Motion out of range 00 00 00 00 00 00 08 00
52 Motion limit switch HexDigit 12 00 00 00 00 00 00 10 00
53 Barcode 128 character error 00 00 00 00 00 00 20 00
54 Program to save too big (Scriba 1 – 00 00 00 00 00 00 40 00
Y series)
55 IDM mark error 00 00 00 00 00 00 80 00
56 RSS14 mark error HexDigit 15 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 01
57 Head 2 out of bounds 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 02
58 Cannot find block 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 04
59 Label already defined 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 08
60 Too many labels HexDigit 14 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 10
61 Undefined error 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 20
62 Auto serial number error 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 40
63 OPC error 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 80

352 Document No: QP00033 Issue: H

 Scrîba 3 Software Programming Manual Issue H

Appendix C: Installed Scriba Files

The following files are installed to the install directory. The default the install
directory is C:\Program Files\Electrox\Scriba 3.

Scriba3.exe The Scrîba 3 program.

ScribFnt.exe Font Converter program to convert True Type non-
Unicode fonts to the Scriba format (elf).
FontMakerNET.exe Font Converter program to convert True Type
Unicode fonts to the Scriba format (elf).
LaserCal.exe Laser Parameters Calculator program.
ScribaDraw.exe Scriba drawing program.
MarkerComms.exe The marker communications program.
FileConverter.exe Part File Converter program to convert Scriba 1
and 2 programs to Scriba 3 format.
QSedit.exe Quality Settings Editor program. This is for
advanced users only.
UIDCreator.exe UID encoding and creation program.
FileReg.exe This registers the .bpt design file with the Scriba 3
program. This program only needs to be run once.
StoredFileDownloader.exe Utility for downloading to the marker and storing
in non-volatile memory. Requires G22Q firmware
or later (generation 2 electronics).
ElectroxCapture.exe Electrox image capture application. Used with the
vision system for calibration purposes.
borlndmm.dll Dynamic linked libraries necessary for the Scriba 3
cc3250.dll and the additional programs to run.
idm_v1_32.dll
idm_v2_32.dll
msvcr70.dll
RSSDLL.dll
ScribaComms.dll
Font1.elf Laser marker embedded fonts. Font 1 is variously
Font2.elf called Helvetica or OCR-B. Font 2 is OCR-A.
PDF417B20.elf PDF417B20 (font 20) is used for the RSS-14
encoding.
Marker.ini Configuration file containing lens information.
Programs.ini Special features configuration file.
ScribaDraw.ini Configuration file for the Scriba drawing program.
FileConverter .ini Configuration file for the file converter program.
LensInfo.xml Configuration file used by the Laser Parameters
Calculator program.
Standard.txt Template file used by the UIDCreator program
QualitySettings_6230.dat Data and definition files used by the QSedit
QualitySettings_6240.dat program.
QualitySettings_6450.dat
QualitySettings_6230.def
QualitySettings_6240.def
353 Document No: QP00033 Issue: H
 Scrîba 3 Software Programming Manual Issue H
QualitySettings_6450.def
DSPParams_6230.sdf
DSPParams_6240.sdf
locale.txt Language files used by the Scriba 3 program.
translate.txt
language.txt
TEST1_xxx.elc Test files used by the Scriba 3 program. These are
TEST2_xxx.elc defined for each available lens.
EZUSB2K.inf USB driver system files.
EZUSB.sys
EZMON.sys
HOURGLAS.ani Image files used by the Scriba 3 program.
*.bmp
cv110.dll Files required for the vision system.
cxcore110.dll
ElectroxCaptureDLL.dll
highgui110.dll
Camera.xml
Calibration.xml
Distortion.xml
Calibrated_Points.xml
Intrinsic.xml
Perpective.xml
S163_Vision.xyc
S254_Vision.xyc
S163_Vision.elc
S254_Vision.elc
vcredist_x86.exe Microsoft distributable for programs written in
C++.
SmartFlashEx.exe SmartFlash application used to update the G2
firmware.

354 Document No: QP00033 Issue: H

 Scrîba 3 Software Programming Manual Issue H

Appendix D: Laser Inputs/Outputs

The following is a list of the input and outputs available on the lasers markers.

Generation 1 Electronics Generation 2 Electronics

1 Input 1 Input
2 Input 2 Input
3 Input 3 Input
11 Output 11 Output
12 Output
13 Output 13 Output
41 Output 21 Input
42 Output 22 Input
43 Output 23 Input
44 Output 24 Input
45 Input 25 Input
46 Input 26 Input
47 Input 27 Input
48 Input 28 Input
49 Input or Output (switch dependent) 31 Output
50 Input or Output (switch dependent) 32 Output
51 Input or Output (switch dependent) 33 Output
52 Input or Output (switch dependent) 34 Output
53 Input or Output (switch dependent) 35 Output
54 Input or Output (switch dependent) 36 Output
55 Input or Output (switch dependent) 37 Output
56 Input or Output (switch dependent) 38 Output
57 Input or Output (switch dependent) 41 Input
58 Input or Output (switch dependent) 42 Input
59 Input or Output (switch dependent) 43 Input
60 Input or Output (switch dependent) 44 Input
61 Input or Output (switch dependent) 45 Input
62 Input or Output (switch dependent) 46 Input
63 Input or Output (switch dependent) 47 Input
64 Input or Output (switch dependent) 48 Input
41 Output
52 Output
53 Output
54 Output
55 Output
56 Output
57 Output
58 Output

355 Document No: QP00033 Issue: H

 Scrîba 3 Software Programming Manual Issue H

Appendix E: Changing Scriba 3 Data Block Default Settings

The Scriba 3 data block property default settings can be changed by modifying the
blockpropertydefaults.csv file. This file can be opened using Microsoft Excel.

Figure E.1 BlockPropertydefaults file – original

Figure E.1 shows the first part of the original blockpropertydefaults.csv file before
any editing has been done. If the VALUE column is left blank the standard defaults
as programmed into the Scriba 3 will be effective. To change these defaults change
the value in the VALUE column for the respective property.

Figure E.2 below shows the same section modified.

The default X Position for a logo data block has been changed to 1.5. This will be in
millimetres if in metric mode or inches in imperial mode.
The default Y Position for a logo block has been changed to 2.
The default laser power for a logo block has been changed to 75%.
The default Control->Enable Send has been set to Yes.
The default Control->Enable Simulate has been set to Yes.
The default Control->Pause Command has been set to Yes.

356 Document No: QP00033 Issue: H

 Scrîba 3 Software Programming Manual Issue H
The default Control->Backdrop has been set to Yes.
The default Horizontal Justification is set to right.
left – 0, centre - 1, right – 2, text fills - 3
The default X Slant has been set to 15 degrees.

Figure E.2 Blockpropertydefaults file – modified

Rules for modifying values:

The value for most properties will be as in the format of the format as shown in
Scriba 3. For example X and Y positions in millimetres or inches as specified.
Angles will be in degrees etc.
The values for the properties with Yes or No values are Yes and No.
For properties with a range of values these begin at zero up to the maximum number
minus one. For example horizontal justification has four values which are Left – 0,
Centre - 1, Right – 2, Text Fills – 3.
These properties are listed below:
All data blocks
Laser Pulse Width: 1. – 0, 2. – 1, 3. – 2, 4. – 3, 5. – 4, 6. – 5, 7. – 6, 8. – 7, 9.
– 8, 10. – 9, 11. -10, 12. – 11, 13. – 12, 14. -13, 15. – 14, 16. – 15, 17. –
357 Document No: QP00033 Issue: H
 Scrîba 3 Software Programming Manual Issue H
16, 18. – 17, 19. – 18, 20. – 19, 21. -20, 22. – 21, 23. – 22, 24. – 23, 25. –
24, 26. - 25
Logo data block
Horizontal Justification: Left – 0, Centre - 1, Right – 2
Vertical Justification: Top – 0, Centre – 1, Bottom – 2
Maintain Aspect Behaviour: Size to Width – 0, Size to Height – 1, Default -2
Vector Tiling: None – 0, Rotary – 1, Linear – 2, On The Fly – 3, Linear –
User Defined – 4
Tiling Direction: Horizontal – 0, Vertical – 1
Block Type: First – 0, Middle – 1, Last – 2, Only – 3, Ignore -4
Rotary Tiling Justification: Normal – 0, Centre – 1, Start – 2, End - 3
Text line data block
Justification: Left – 0, Centre – 1, Right - 2, Text Fills – 3
Vertical Justification: Normal – 0, Top – 1, Centre – 2, Bottom - 3
Text Fills Justification: Left - 0, Centre - 1, Right – 2
Text Input Language: Arabic - 0, Baltic - 1, Russian(Cyrillic) - 2, Greek – 3,
Hebrew – 4, Japanese – 5, Korean(Hangul) – 6, Simplified
Chinese(GB2312) - 7, Thai - 8, Traditional Chinese(Big5) – 9, Turkish –
10, Western European – 11
Fill Direction: Vertical – 0, Horizontal - 1
Text ring data block
Justification: Counter Clockwise – 0, Centre – 1, Clockwise - 2, Text Fills –
3
Vertical Justification: Normal – 0, Top – 1, Centre – 2, Bottom – 3
Direction: Clockwise – 0, Counter Clockwise - 1
Fill Direction: Vertical – 0, Horizontal - 1
Barcode data block
Justification: Left – 0, Centre – 1, Right – 2
Code: Code 39 Extended – 0, Code 39 Standard – 1, Interleaved 2 of 5 – 2,
Code 128-A – 3, Code 128-B (Std) – 4, Code 123-C - 5, UPC-A - 6
Data Matrix data block
Format: Numeric and Space – 0, Alphanumeric (UpperCase) and Space – 1,
Alphanumeric plus Space, Comma, Period, Slash and Minus Sign – 2,
Alphanumeric and Space – 3, ASCII character set (0-127) – 4, IOS
character set (0-255) – 5
ECC Level (V2): ECC 000 – 0, ECC 010 – 1, ECC 040 – 2, ECC 050 – 3,
ECC 060 – 4, ECC 070 – 5, ECC 080 – 6, ECC 090 – 7, ECC 100 – 8,
ECC 110 – 9, ECC 120 – 10, ECC 130 – 11, ECC 140 – 12, ECC 200 – 13
Scan Direction: Horizontal – 0, Vertical -1
Picture data block
Justification: Top Left – 0, Bottom Left – 1, Centre – 2, Top Right – 3,
Bottom Right – 4, Filled – 5
Maintain Aspect Behaviour: Size to Width – 0, Size to Height - 1, Default - 2
Motion XYZ Step Rep data block
Order: Rows First – 0, Columns First – 1
Step Rep data block:
Order: Rows First – 0, Columns First – 1

358 Document No: QP00033 Issue: H